ACCA F6UK December 2015 Notes PDF

Se
OpenTuition.com
Free resources for accountancy students
ACCA Paper
F6
pt
em
20 be
15 r/D
ex ec
am em
s be
Taxation (UK)
FA 2014
Please spread the word about OpenTuition, so

that all ACCA students can benefit.
ONLY with your support can the site exist and
continue to provide free study materials!
Visit opentuition.com for the latest updates watch the free lectures that accompany these
notes; attempt free tests online;
get free tutor support, and much more.
OpenTuition Lecture Notes can be downloaded FREE from http://opentuition.com

Copyright belongs to OpenTuition.com - please do not support piracy by downloading from other websites.
The best things

in life are free
IMPORTANT!!! PLEASE READ CAREFULLY
To benefit from these notes you must watch the free

lectures on the OpenTuition website in which we
explain and expand on the topics covered
In addition question practice is vital!!
You must obtain a current edition of a Revision / Exam
Kit from one of the ACCA approved content providers
they contain a great number of exam standard
questions (and answers) to practice on.
You should also use the free Online Multiple Choice
Tests and the Flashcards which you can find on on the
OpenTuition website.
http://opentuition.com/acca/
December 2015 Examinations
Paper F6
CONTENTS
Syllabus
Tax rates and allowances
iii
The UK Tax System
Income tax computation
Property Income and Investments Individuals
19
Tax Adjusted Trading Profit Individuals
25
Capital Allowances
29
Trading Profit Basis Periods
41
Tax Adjusted Trading Losses Individuals
47
Partnerships
55
Employment Income
59
10
Pension Schemes
69
11
National Insurance Contributions (NIC)
73
12
Capital Gains Tax Individuals
75
13
Capital Gains Tax Individuals Shares
85
14
Capital Gains Tax Individuals Reliefs
89
15
Corporation tax
101
16
Calculation of Corporation Tax Liability
105
17
Long Period of Account
109
18
Tax Adjusted Losses Companies
111
19
Chargeable Gains Companies
117
20
Chargeable Gains Companies Further Aspects
121
21
Chargeable Gains Companies Reliefs
125
22
Corporation Tax Groups
129
23
Inheritance Tax
135
24
Value Added Tax VAT
145
25
Self Assessment and Payment of Tax for Companies
157
26
Self-Assessment and Payment of Tax for Individuals
161
Answers to examples
165
Practice Questions
213
Practice Answers
227
OpenTuition Course Notes can be downloaded FREE from OpenTuition.com.

Copyright belongs to OpenTuition.com - please do not support piracy by downloading from other websites.
Free ACCA course notes Free ACCA lectures Free tests Free tutor support StudyBuddy Largest ACCA forums
Paper F6
Practice Questions and Answers index

Question
Page No.
Answer
Page No.
UK Tax System
Tax avoidance and tax evasion
213
227
Kate
Income tax calculation
213
227
Jessica
Income tax calculation restriction of personal allowances
213
228
Karl
Income tax calculation additional rate taxpayer
213
228
Mr & Mrs Elderely
Personal age allowance and planning aspects
213
229
Michael
Restriction of personal age allowances
214
230
Peter
Property Business Profit
214
231
Matthew
Property Business Losses
214
231
Charlie
Rent a Room Relief
214
231
10
John
Adjustment of trading profit
215
232
11
Carl
Calculation of capital allowances
216
233
12
Jason
Trading Income basis periods: opening years
216
234
13
Stephen
Trading Income basis periods: opening and closing years
217
234
14
Grace
Trading Income basis periods: opening years with capital allowances
217
235
15
David
Capital allowances: plant and machinery
217
236
16
Max
Trading losses New Business
218
237
17
Elliot
Trading losses Continuing business
218
238
18
Anne and Betty
Partnerships: change in partners, losses
218
238
19
Renner
Employment Income
219
239
20
George
Pension contributions
219
241
21
Tony
National Insurance Contributions
220
241
22
Chorley Ltd
Adjustment of profit, calculation of Taxable Total Profits
220
242
23
Sail Ltd
Calculation of corporation tax
221
242
24
Swish Ltd
Corporation tax losses
221
243
25
Trunk Limited
Chargeable Gains Disposal of shares by a company
221
243
26
Granger Limited
Chargeable Gains Part Disposal and Chattels companies
222
244
27
Westcroft Limited
Chargeable Gains Destroyed assets
222
245
28
Mighty Ltd
Rollover relief
222
245
29
Claude
Capital losses Individuals
222
246
30
Cheryl
Capital Gains Tax calculation
223
246
31
Shamus
Capital Gains Tax Individuals (Damaged assets)
223
246
32
Zoe
Share matching Individuals
223
247
33
Michael
Share matching with rights issue Individuals
223
247
34
Jenny
Entrepreneurs relief
223
248
35
Beth
Rollover relief Individuals
224
248
36
Wendy
Gift relief
224
249
37
Amy
Principal Private Residence and Letting relief
224
249
38
Nathan
Inheritance Tax
224
250
39
VAT
VAT Registration and calculation of VAT
225
251
40
Geewizz Ltd
Default surcharge, cash accounting scheme, annual accounting scheme
225
252
41
Factor Limited
Overseas aspects of VAT
225
252
42
Group Relief
Group relief
226
252
43
Jim
Payments on Account Individuals
226
254
44
Enquiries
Self assessment Individuals
226
254
45
Cannock Limited
Self assessment Companies
226
254
Paper F6
SYLLABUS
Aim
To develop knowledge and skills relating to the tax system as applicable to individuals, single companies, and groups of companies.
Objectives
On successful completion of this paper candidates should be able to:
t
t
t
t
t
t
3
Explain the operation and scope of the tax system and the obligations of taxpayer and/or their agents and the implications
of non-compliance
Explain and compute the income tax liabilities of individuals and the effect of national insurance contributions (NIC) on
employees, employers and the self-employed
Explain and compute the Corporation Tax liabilities of individual companies and groups of companies
Explain and compute the Chargeable Gains arising on companies and individuals
Explain and compute the Inheritance Tax liabilities of individuals
Explain and compute the effects of Value Added Tax on incorporated and unincorporated businesses
Position of the paper in the overall syllabus

The syllabus for Paper F6, Taxation, introduces candidates to the subject of taxation and provides the core knowledge of the
underlying principles and major technical areas of taxation as they affect the activities of individuals and businesses.
Candidates are introduced to the rationale behind and the functions of the tax system. The syllabus then considers the separate
taxes that an accountant would need to have a detailed knowledge of, such as income tax from self-employment, employment and
investments, the corporation tax liability of individual companies and groups of companies, the national insurance contribution
liabilities of both employed and self employed persons, the value added tax liability of businesses, the chargeable gains arising
on disposals of investments by both individuals and companies, and the inheritance tax liabilities arising on chargeable lifetime
transfers and on death..
Having covered the core areas of the basic taxes, candidates should be able to compute tax liabilities, explain the basis of their
calculations, apply tax planning techniques for individuals and companies and identify the compliance issues for each major tax
through a variety of business and personal scenarios and situations.
Detailed syllabus
4.1
The UK tax system and its administration

(a)
The overall function and purpose of taxation in a modern economy
(b) Principal sources of revenue law and practice
(c)
The systems for self assessment and the making of returns
(d) The time limits for the submission of information, claims and payment of tax, including payments on account
(e)
The procedures relating to enquiries, appeals and disputes
(f)
Penalties for non-compliance
4.2
Income tax and NIC liabilities

(a)
The scope of income tax
(b) Income from employment
(c)
Income from self-employment
(d) Property and investment income
(e)
The comprehensive computation of taxable income and income tax liability
(f)
National Insurance contributions for employed and self employed persons
(g) The use of exemptions and reliefs in deferring and minimising income tax liabilities
ii
Paper F6
SYLLABUS
4.3
Corporation tax liabilities

(a)
The scope of corporation tax
(b) Taxable Total Profits
(c)
Chargeable gains for companies
(d) The comprehensive computation of corporation tax liability
(e)
The effect of a group corporate structure for corporation tax purposes
(f)
The use of exemptions and reliefs in deferring and minimising corporation tax liabilities
4.4
Chargeable gains
(a)
The scope of the taxation of capital gains
(b) The basic principles of computing gains and losses.
(c)
Gains and losses on the disposal of movable and immovable property
(d) Gains and losses on the disposal of shares and securities
(e)
The computation of capital gains tax
(f)
The use of exemptions and reliefs in deferring and minimising tax liabilities arising on the disposal of capital assets
4.5
Inheritance tax
(a)
The basic principles of computing transfers of value
(b) The liabilities arising on chargeable lifetime transfers and on the death of an individual
(c)
The use of exemptions in deferring and minimising inheritance tax liabilities
(d) Payment of inheritance tax
4.6
National insurance contributions

(a)
The scope of national insurance
(b) Class 1 and Class 1A contributions for employed persons
(c)
Class 2 and Class 4 contributions for self employed persons
4.7
Value added tax

(a)
The VAT registration requirements
(b) The computation of VAT liabilities
(c)
The effect of special schemes
Approach to examining the syllabus

The syllabus is assessed by a three-hour paper-based examination. There will be 15 minutes reading and planning time given at
the start of the exam.
Assessment: Taxation (GBR)
The paper will be predominantly computational and all questions are compulsory
Section A of the exam comprises 15 multiple choice questions of 2 marks each
Section B of the exam comprises four 10 mark questions and two 15 mark questions
The two 15 mark questions will focus on income tax and corporation tax
The section A questions and the other questions in section B can cover any area of the syllabus.
Paper F6
Paper F6
TAX RATES AND ALLOWANCES

The following tax rates and allowances will be reproduced in the examination paper for Paper F6. In addition, other specific
information necessary for candidates to answer individual questions will be given as part of the question. For example, in the case
of corporate chargeable gains the relevant retail prices index for particular dates will be given.
Income Tax
Basic rate
Higher rate
Additional rate
Normal rates Dividend rates

20%
10%
40%
32.5%
45%
37.5%
1 31,865
31,866 150,000
150,001 and over
A starting rate of 10% applies to savings income where it falls within the first 2,880 of taxable income
Personal Allowance
Personal Allowance
Born on or after 6 April 1948
Born between 6 April 1938 and 5 April 1948
Born before 6 April 1938
Income limit
Personal Allowance (born before 6 April 1948)
Personal Allowance
10,000
10,500
10,660
27,000
100,000
Residence status
Days in UK
Previously resident
Not previously resident
Less than 16
Automatically not resident
16 to 45
Resident if 4 UK ties (or more)
46 to 90
Resident if 4 UK ties
91 to 120
121 to 182
Resident if 1 UK tie (or more)
183 or more
Automatically resident
Automatically resident
Child benefit income tax charge

Where income is between 50,000 and 60,000, the charge is 1% of the amount of child benefit received for every
100 of income over 50,000.
Car Benefit Percentage

The base level of CO2 emissions is 95 grams per kilometre.
The percentage rates applying to petrol cars with CO2 emissions up to this level are:
75 grams per kilometre or less
5%
76 grams to 94 grams per kilometre
11%
95 grams per kilometre
12%
Car Fuel
The base figure for calculating the car fuel benefit is 21,700
iii
iv
Paper F6

New individual savings accounts (NISAs)
The overall investment limit is 15,000.
Pension Contribution Limits

The maximum contribution that can be made without evidence of earnings is 3,600.
Annual allowance
201415
40,000
201112 to 201314
50,000
The maximum contribution that can qualify for tax relief without any earnings is 3,600.
Authorised mileage allowances

All cars
up to 10,000 miles
45p
over 10,000 miles
25p
Capital Allowances
Plant and machinery
Main pool
18%
Special rate pool
8%
Motor cars
New cars with CO2 emissions up to 95 grams per kilometre
100%
CO2 emissions between 96 and 130 grams per kilometre
18%
CO2 emissions over 130 grams per kilometre
8%
Annual investment allowance

Rate of allowance
100%
Expenditure limit
500,000
Cap on income tax reliefs

Unless otherwise restricted, reliefs are capped at the higher of 50,000 or 25% of income.
Corporation Tax
Financial year
2012
2013
2014
Small profits rate
20%
20%
20%
Main rate
24%
23%
21%
Lower limit
300,000
300,000
300,000
Upper limit
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
1100
00
00
Standard fraction
Marginal Relief
Standard Fraction (U A) N/A
Paper F6

Value Added Tax
Standard rate
Registration limit
Deregistration limit
20%
81,000
79,000
Inheritance Tax: Tax Rate:

1 325,000
Excess
Nil
40%
20%
Death rate
Lifetime rate
Inheritance Tax: Taper relief

Percentage
reduction
20%
40%
60%
80%
Years before death

Over 3 but less than 4 years
Rates of Interest
Official rate of interest:
Rate of interest on underpaid tax:
Rate of interest on overpaid tax:
3.25%
3.0%
0.5%
Capital Gains Tax - Individuals

Annual Exemption
Rate of tax
lower rate
higer rate
Entrepreneurs relief lifetime limit
Rate of tax
11,000
18%
28%
10,000,000
10%
National Insurance (not contracted out rates)

Class 1
Employee
Class 1
Employer
Annual
7,956
[7,7957 41,865]
41,866 and above
7,956
7,957 and above
Employment allowance
@
@
@
0%
12%
2%
@
@
0%
13.8%
2,000
Class 1A
Class 2
Class 4
13.8%
2.75 per week
Small earnings exemption limit
7,956 per year
[7,957 41,865] per year
41,866 and above per year
5,885
@
@
@
0%
9%
2%
1. Calculations and workings need only be made to the nearest .

2. All apportionments should be made to the nearest month.
3. All workings should be shown in Section B.
FREE
ACCA
Course
Notes
FREE
ACCA
Lectures
Ask
ACCA
Tutor
FREE
ACCA
Tests
Find
ACCA
Study
Buddy
OpenTuition.com
Paper F6
Chapter 1
THE UK TAX SYSTEM
The overall function and purpose of taxation in a modern society
1.1
Economic factors
Spending by the government and the system of taxation impacts on the economy of a country.
Taxation policies have been used to influence economic factors such as employment levels, inflation and imports/exports
Taxation policies are also used to direct economic behaviours of individuals and businesses. For example they encourage individual
saving habits (Individual Savings Accounts), and giving to charity (Gift Aid Scheme).
Further they may discourage motoring (fuel duties), smoking & alcohol (duties and taxes) and environmental pollution (landfill tax).
As government objectives change, taxation policies may be altered accordingly.
1.2
Social justice
The taxation system accumulates and redistributes wealth within a country.
Different taxes have different social effects.
(a)
Progressive taxation:
As income rises the proportion of taxation raised also rises, for example UK income tax
(b)
Regressive taxation
As income rises the proportion of taxation paid falls, for example, tax on cigarettes is the same regardless of the level of
income of the purchaser, so as income rises it represents a lower proportion of income.
(c)
Proportional taxation
As income rises the proportion of tax remains constant, for example Latvian/Lithuanian income tax
(d)
Ad Valorem principle
A tax calculated as a percentage of the value of the item, for example Value Added Tax
Types of taxes
Income Tax
Payable by individuals on most income
National Insurance Contributions
Payable by individuals who are employed or self employed and businesses in

relation to their employees
Capital Gains Tax
Payable by individuals on the disposal of capital assets
Inheritance Tax
Payable by individuals on lifetime and death transfers of assets.
Corporation Tax
Payable by companies on income and chargeable gains
Value Added Tax (VAT)
Payable by the final consumer on purchases of most goods and services
Paper F6
THE UK TAX SYSTEM
Chapter 1
Direct and indirect taxation
3.1
Direct taxation
Taxes are paid directly to the Government, based on income and profit.
Examples are:
t
t
t
t
3.2
Income tax
Corporation tax
Capital gains tax
Inheritance tax
Indirect taxation
Taxes are collected via an intermediary who passes them on to the government for example:
t
VAT where the consumer pays VAT to a supplier, who then pays to the government
Structure of the UK tax system
4.1
HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC)

The treasury formally imposes and collects taxation. The management of the treasury is the responsibility of the Chancellor of the
Exchequer. The administration function for the collection of tax is undertaken by HMRC
4.2
Commissioners
At the head of HMRC are the commissioners whose duties are:
(a)
to implement statue law
(b) oversee the process of UK tax administration
The main body of HMRC is divided into District offices and accounting and payment offices
4.3
District Offices
The Commissioner appoints Officers of HMRC to implement the day to day work of HMRC
4.4
Accounts and payment offices

These concentrate on the collection and payment of tax.
Sources of tax law
5.1
Tax legislation / statutes

Adherence is mandatory. It is updated every year by the annual Finance Act.
The Government may issue Statutory Instruments which are detailed notes on an area of tax legislation.
5.2
Case law
This refers to decisions made in tax cases. The rulings in the courts are binding and so provide guidance on the interpretation of
tax legislation.
5.3
HMRC guidance
This is issued due to the complexity of the legislation
(a)
(b)
Statements of practice
Extra statutory concessions
(c)
(d)
Internal guidance manuals

Press releases
(e)
Pamphlets
sets out how HMRC intend to apply the law

sets out circumstances in which HMRC will not apply the strict letter of the law
where it would be unfair.
HMRCs own manuals which are available to the public
provide details of a specific tax issue, for example, used to communicate the
information stated in the annual budget
provide explanations of various tax issues in non technical language
THE UK TAX SYSTEM
Paper F6
Chapter 1
The interaction of the UK tax system and overseas tax systems
6.1
Other countries
The UK has entered into Double Tax Treaties with various countries. These contain rules which prevent income and gains being taxed
twice, but may include a non-discrimination provision preventing a non-resident individual from being treated less favourably than
a resident individual.
Where there is no double tax treaty the UK system will allow relief for double tax.
6.2
The European Union

The aim of the EU is to remove barriers and distortions due to different economic and political policies imposed in different
member states.
Although EU members do not have to align their tax systems, members can agree to jointly enact specific laws known as Directives.
The most important example is VAT, as EU members have aligned their policies according to EU legislation but the members do
not need to align the rate.
Cases have been brought before the European Court of Justice regarding the discrimination of non-residents, some of which have
led to a change in UK tax law.
Tax avoidance and tax evasion
7.1
Tax evasion
Any action taken to evade taxes by illegal means, for example
(a)
suppressing information - failing to declare taxable income to HMRC
(b) providing false information - claiming expenses that have not occurred
Tax evasion carries a risk of fines and/or imprisonment
7.2
Tax avoidance
Any legal method of reducing your tax burden, for example taking advantage of an Individual Savings Account or making best use
of available allowances, exemptions and reliefs..
The term is also used to describe tax schemes that utilise loopholes in the tax legislation.
HMRC have introduced new disclosure obligations regarding tax avoidance schemes and a new General anti-abuse rule has been
introduced to back up the existing specific legislation. The rule targets abusive arrangements (action that cannot be regarded
as reasonable) arising from tax arrangements designed to achieve tax advantages such as decreasing a source of income or
overstating a deduction.
Professional and ethical guidance

Accountants often act for taxpayers in dealings with HMRC.
Their duties and responsibilities should be towards both clients and HMRC
8.1
The accountant must uphold standards of the ACCA that is

(a)
to adopt an ethical approach to work, employers and clients
(b) acknowledge the professional duty to society as a whole
(c)
maintain an objective outlook
(d) provided professional high standards of service, conduct and performance at all times.
8.2
The ACCA Code of Ethics and Conduct

The ACCA Code of Ethics and Conduct sets out five fundamental principles which members should adhere to meet these
expectations, namely:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Integrity
Objectivity
Professional competence and due care
Confidentiality
Professional behaviour
THE UK TAX SYSTEM

E XAMPLE 1
Identify which taxes apply to the following situations and state whether the tax is direct or indirect
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
A sole trader earns 100,000 profit in a year

A company has profit of 250,000 in a year and employs 30 employees
An individual sells an antique table for 100,000 which cost 40,000 eight years ago
A business buys raw materials from a supplier
A company sells a factory for 750,000 bought for 250,000 three years ago
An individual dies and bequeaths his estate of 1,000,000 to his children
Paper F6
Chapter 1
Paper F6
Chapter 2
INCOME TAX COMPUTATION
Introduction
One of the 15 mark questions in section B will always be an income tax question. It is likely to contain most sources of taxable
income and require an income tax computation to be prepared. However, there may be also be marks available for dealing with
trading losses, pensions, national insurance contributions, and the residence status of an individual. In addition any of the other
10 mark questions in section B may be based on any aspect of income tax and specific income tax issues will be tested in Section
A of the exam.
There are two main parts to the computation, firstly the computation of Taxable Income and secondly the calculation of the
Income Tax Liability and/or Income Tax Payable thereon.
The Taxable Income will also be divided into three possible analysis columns, Dividend income, Savings Income which is interest
income and Non-Savings Income which will be made up of employment income, trading profits of the self-employed and property
income. This analysis is required as different tax rates may apply to the different types of income.
In computing Taxable Income UK taxpayers may be entitled to a deduction of a Personal Allowance, a level of tax free income. The
details of this are in Section 4 of this chapter, but the normal Personal Allowance available to those taxpayers born since 6 April
1948, is 10,000 for the 2014/15 tax year.
Computation of Taxable Income

An Income Tax Computation is prepared for each taxpayer and records the income to be taxed for that individual for a tax year. The
tax year runs from April 6 to following April 5. The tax year 2014/15 runs from April 6, 2014 to April 5, 2015. Therefore each source of
income requires its own basis of assessment to determine how much income is to be assessed to tax in each such tax year.
Proforma income tax computation for 2014/15
Trading Profit
Less Trading Loss relief brought forward
Employment Income
Property Income
Dividends from UK companies 10090
Building society interest 10080
Bank deposit interest 10080
Other interest - gross
TOTAL INCOME
Less
Qualifying interest
Other Trading Loss reliefs
NET INCOME
Less: Personal Allowance
TAXABLE INCOME
1.1
Non-savings income
X
(X)
X
X
X
Savings income
Dividends
X
(X)
(X)
X
(X)
X
X
X
X
X
Exempt Income
The following sources of income are exempt from income tax
(a)
(b)
(c)
Interest or bonuses on National Savings & Investment Certificates

Interest and dividends within an Individual Savings Account [ISA]
Gaming, lottery and premium bond winnings
Total
X
(X)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(X)
(X)
X
(X)
X
Paper F6
Chapter 2
1.2
Tax liability and Tax Payable

Having calculated the taxable income, the examiner could ask for one of two things:
(a)
(b)
1.3
Tax liability =
Tax payable =
income tax on taxable income

tax liability
LESS
tax already deducted at source, for example, Pay As You Earn (PAYE) on employment income and tax
credits on interest received net.
Taxation of non-savings income.

Non-savings income is taxed at the following rates:
1 to 31,865
31,866 150,000
150,001 +
20%
40%
45%
(basic rate)
(higher rate)
(additional rate)
Non-savings income consists of:

(a)
(b)
(c)
Trading Profit - see chapters 4-8

Employment Income - see chapter 9
Property Income - see chapter 3
E XAMPLE 1
Mr Smith is a single man, born in 1960, who has been working for many years and earns a salary of 50,000 per annum (PAYE 9,627).
Calculate the income tax payable for Mr Smith in 2014/15?
Savings income and Dividend Income

Savings income is interest income and is received either gross or net of deduction of basic rate tax at source
2.1
Types of taxed savings income

(a)
Building society interest
(b) Bank deposit interest
(c)
Company loan stock interest
Paper F6
Chapter 2
Most building society interest, bank deposit interest and company debenture interest is received by individuals net of 20% income
tax deducted at source. This tax credit is refundable if the amount deducted at source exceeds the Tax Liability of the taxpayer.
2.2
Interest received Gross:

(a)
National Savings & Investment (NSI) Bank Interest
(b) Government Stock Interest (Gilts, Treasury Stock, Exchequer stock)
2.3
Basis of assessment
Savings income is assessed in the tax year that it is received.
2.4
Dividend Income
Dividends are included on the computation on a basis of actual amounts received in the Tax Year. The figure is also grossed up but
now at a rate of 100/90 for what is a notional tax credit of 10%. In this case no actual tax is deducted at source by the company
paying the dividend nor then paid over to HMRC. As no tax has actually been paid no repayment can therefore arise if this credit
exceeds the Tax Liability. For this reason the notional tax credit on dividends is always deducted first.
2.5
Calculation of tax on all savings income and all dividend income

(a)
Interest received net and dividends must be grossed up for inclusion in the income tax computation
interest received net is grossed up by 10080
dividends are grossed up by 10090
(b) Interest received (including interest received gross) is included in the saving income column of the computation, dividends
received are included in the dividend column
(c)
Any deductions in the income tax computation (personal allowance and/or reliefs) are deducted first from non-savings
income, then savings income, then dividend income hence the order in which the analysis columns are listed.
(d) Non-savings income is treated as the first slice of taxable income to be taxed followed by savings income then dividend
income. The total of this tax is the Tax Liability of the taxpayer
(e)
Tax suffered as source is deducted from the tax liability in order to arrive at tax payable.
(f)
If there is no liability, the tax suffered on interest and PAYE may be repaid, but tax suffered on dividends is not repayable.
(g) The different types of income are taxed as follows and in this order:
t
t
Non Savings
Savings
Dividends
1 to 31,865
31,866 150,000
150,001 +
20%
40%
45%
Savings income is taxed in the same way as non-savings income, however a starting rate of tax of
10% will apply to the first 2,880 of savings income in the following circumstance:
The 10% rate only applies where savings income falls within the first 2,880 of taxable income.
If the first 2,880 consists of non-savings income then the 10% rate will not apply.
After considering non savings and savings income the dividend tax rates are:
1 31,865 @ 10%
31,866 150,000 @ 32.5%
150,001 + @ 37.5%
Paper F6
Chapter 2
E XAMPLE 2
Billy had a trading profit of 25,000 and received bank deposit interest of 8,000 in 2014/15
Calculate Billys income tax payable in 2014/15
E XAMPLE 3
Recalculate Billys income tax payable, assuming the bank deposit interest is 16,000
E XAMPLE 4
Molly receives bank interest of 16,000 and no other income in 2014/15.
Calculate Mollys income tax payable in 2014/15
Paper F6
Chapter 2
E XAMPLE 5
Rework the example of Molly, assuming she makes a trading profit of 11,000 in addition to the bank interest.
E XAMPLE 6
Daisy received a salary of 15,000 (PAYE 1,112), received 8,000 bank deposit interest and dividend income of 1,800 in 2014/15
Calculate Daisys income tax payable for 2014/15
10
Paper F6
Chapter 2
E XAMPLE 7
Recalculate Daisys income tax payable, assuming Daisy received a salary of 35,000 (PAYE 5,705) and received bank deposit interest of 9,600. Dividend income received remains at 1,800.
Personal allowances
The Personal Allowance (PA) is a level of tax free income available to UK taxpayers and is deducted from Net Income to derive
Taxable Income on the Income Tax Computation and as can be seen on the pro forma computation on page 5 is deducted from the
analysis columns in the order of firstly non-savings income, followed if necessary by savings income and finally dividend income.
t
t
t
t
The normal PA for 2014/15 is 10,000. However if an individuals Adjusted Net Income (ANI) exceeds 100,000 then the PA
is reduced by:
[ ANI 100,000 ]
Once adjusted net income 120,000 the PA is reduced to nil.
Net income is total income less qualifying interest payments and trading loss reliefs (see pro forma page 5)
ANI is net income less gross personal pension contributions and less gross gift aid payments (see section 5)
E XAMPLE 8
Mike received gross employment income of 108,000 in 2014/15 of which 33,130 was deducted at source under PAYE in 2014/15.
Calculate Mikes income tax payable for 2014/15.
Paper F6
Chapter 2
E XAMPLE 9
Ken made trading income of 130,000, received bank interest of 32,000 and dividend income of 32,400 in 2014/15.
Calculate Kens income tax payable for 2014/15.
t
t
t
t
t
The normal PA for the tax year 2014/15 is 10,000 which is given to taxpayers who were born from 6 April 1948
Taxpayers born between 6 April 1938 and 5 April 1948 enjoy a higher PA of 10,500 instead of the normal PA of 10,000
Taxpayers born before 6 April 1938 receive a slightly higher PA of 10,660 instead of the normal PA of 10,000
However where Adjusted Net Income (ANI) exceeds 27,000, the higher PA is restricted by
[ ANI 27,000 ] until it is reduced to a minimum of the normal PA of 10,000
There will again be a further reduction if ANI exceeds 100,000 as detailed previously and therefore regardless of a persons
age, no personal allowances will be available where adjusted net income 120,000
E XAMPLE 10
Tony has adjusted net income of 27,800 in 2014/15. He was born in 1945.
Calculate the personal allowance to which Tony is entitled.
E XAMPLE 11
Recalculate the personal allowance assuming Tonys adjusted net income is 31,100 in 2014/15
11
12
Paper F6
Chapter 2
E XAMPLE 12
James was born in 1940. He made a trading profit of 102,000 and receives bank interest of 3,200 in 2014/15.
Calculate Jamess income tax payable for 2014/15.
E XAMPLE 13
Norman was born in 1935 and has net income in 2014/15 of 28,000 and had made gift aid payments of 400 during the tax year
Calculate the personal allowance available to Norman for 2014/15
Reliefs
4.1
Reliefs are tax deductible

The only reliefs examinable at Paper F6 are
(a)
(b)
qualifying interest
loss reliefs
Paper F6
Chapter 2
4.2
Qualifying interest is:

(a)
On a loan to purchase an interest in a partnership or a contribution to the partnership of capital or a loan
(b) On a loan to purchase plant or machinery used in the business, by a partner
(c)
On a loan to purchase plant and machinery by an employee if used in the performance of duties
(d) On a loan to purchase an interest in a close company
4.3
Loss reliefs
These will be explained in chapter 7.
E XAMPLE 14
Kathy has trading profit of 50,000 in 2014/15 and paid 1,000 interest on a loan to purchase plant & machinery used in the business of
her partnership.
Calculate Kathys income tax liability for 2014/15
Payments to charity under the Gift Aid System
5.1
Basic rate taxpayers

Payments to charity under gift aid are treated as being paid net of the basic rate of tax (20%). For a basic rate taxpayer tax relief at the
basic rate is automatically obtained as payments are made to the charity net of basic rate relief being given at source ie to give a charity
100 the taxpayer need only make a gift aid payment of 80 . The charity will then be able to claim back from HMRC the basic rate tax
of 20 thereon collected by HMRC from the taxpayers income. Therefore the donation is not deducted in the calculation of Taxable
Income, but see note below on restriction of personal allowance.
5.2
Higher rate tax payer

For higher rate taxpayers, 40% tax relief is given as follows:
(a)
(b)
20% at source (as noted above), and

20% through the income tax computation, obtained by extending the basic rate band by the gross donation (so that more
income is taxed at 20% and less at 40%)
13
14
Paper F6
Chapter 2
The taxpayer can elect to treat gift aid payments made by 31 January to have been made in the previous year, ie a payment made
by 31 January 2016 can be treated as if paid in tax year 2014/15. This would be advantageous if the taxpayer was likely to be a basic
rate taxpayer in 2015/16 but was a higher rate taxpayer in 2014/15
5.3
Additional rate tax payer

For additional rate taxpayers, 45% tax relief is given as follows:
(a)
(b)
20% at source (as noted above) and

25% through the income tax computation by extending both the basic rate band and higher rate band by the gross
donation (so that more income is taxed at 20% instead of 40% and 40% instead of 45%)
The same treatment as gift aid payments will also apply to payments made by individuals into their Personal Pension Scheme (see
chapter 10)
See section 3 on page 10 that both the gross gift aid payments and personal pension contributions are deducted in arriving at the
adjusted net income figure used to restrict the personal allowance of the taxpayer.
E XAMPLE 15
Elliot has trading profit of 48,000 in 2014/15. He paid 1,600 to charity under the gift aid system.
Calculate Elliots income tax liability for 2014/15
E XAMPLE 16
Thomas earned 160,000 trading profit in 2014/15. In the tax year he paid 6,400 to charity under the gift aid scheme.
Calculate Thomass income tax liability for 2014/15.
Paper F6
Chapter 2
E XAMPLE 17
Kerry made a trading profit of 102,000 in 2014/15. In addition she received bank interest of 3,200 and dividend income of 2,700. She
paid interest of 3,000 on a loan to contribute capital into a partnership of which she is a partner. She made a payment of 4,800 to charity
under the gift aid scheme.
Calculate Kerrys income tax payable for 2014/15.
Jointly owned assets of a married couple, or by a couple in a civil partnership

Spouses and civil partners are taxed as two separate people. Each spouse / civil partner has their own Income Tax Computation and
includes within it their own taxable income and is entitled to a personal allowance or an age related personal allowance depending
on his or her own age and income
6.1
Joint property
When spouses/civil partners own income generating assets jointly, it is assumed that they are entitled to equal shares of the
income and it is split accordingly on a 50:50 basis between them.
However they may make a joint election to HMRC to split the income according to their actual ownership shares, (except in the
case of jointly held bank or building society accounts).
The rules allow couples to rearrange joint income between them to better use their personal allowances and lower tax rates
thereby reducing their overall tax liabilities
Note, for shares held in a husband and wife (or civil partner) company, dividends are always divided according to the exact
proportion to which each is actually entitled, it is never assumed that it is in equal proportions.
The 50:50 rule may also be used to reduce income tax liabilities where a higher rate taxpayer currently owns outright an income
producing asset while their spouse is not fully using either their personal allowance or basic rate band. A transfer of a nominal
amount of the capital ownership eg 5% would allow 50% of the income to be assessed on the transferee spouse! Clearly if the
taxpayer was happy to transfer the entire ownership of the asset to the spouse then an even greater amount of tax would be saved!
15
16
Paper F6
Chapter 2
E XAMPLE 18
Elton is a higher rate taxpayer (but with an adjusted net income of 100,000). This includes 20,000 of rental income on a property
owned entirely by Elton on which he pays tax at 40%, a tax liability therefore of 8,000 thereon. David his civil partner has no income.
Discuss how Elton and David could reduce their income tax liabilities
Child Benefit Income Tax Charge

Child benefit is a tax free benefit payable to parents irrespective of what level of taxpayer they may be. It was decided therefore
that from the tax year 2013/14 if a persons Adjusted Net Income (ANI) (or whose partner) exceeds 50,000 and they received child
benefit, that a child benefit income tax charge would be raised to gradually remove the benefit from such higher income earners
such that when the ANI reached 60,000 the benefit would be entirely removed.
If both partners have income over 50,000 the partner with the higher income is liable for the charge.
Where ANI falls between 50,000 and 60,000 the income tax charge would amount to 1% of the child benefit received for every
100 of income in excess of 50,000.
The following information will therefore be provided in the tax rates and allowances section of the examination paper:
Where income is between 50,000 and 60,000 the charge is 1% of the amount of child benefit received for every 100 of income
over 50,000.
The income tax charge is added in deriving the income tax liability of the taxpayer.
Illustration 1
Catherine received child benefit of 1,056 in 2014/15 and has ANI for the year of 54,000.
As Catherines ANI is between 50,000 and 60,000 the child benefit income tax charge is 422 (1,056 x 40% (54,000 50,000 / 100))
Illustration 2
Victoria receives child benefit of 3,147 in respect of her 4 children and has ANI of 77,000.
As Victorias ANI exceeds 60,000 the child benefit income tax charge is 3,147, being the full amount of the child benefit received.
Paper F6
Chapter 2
Residence
Prior to 2013/14 the chargeability of an individual to income tax and capital gains tax in a tax year was based upon the taxpayers
residence and ordinary residence.
The new rules have abolished the term ordinary residence and created a new statutory test of residence.
These rules are detailed and the following table will therefore be given in the tax rates and allowances section of the examination
paper.
Days in UK
<16
16 45
46 90
91 120
121 182
>183
Previously Resident (R)

Automatically NOT R
R if 4 UK ties
R if 3 UK ties
R if 2 UK ties
R if 1 UK tie
Automatically R
Not Previously Resident (R)

Automatically NOT R
Automatically NOT R
R if 4 UK ties
R if 3 UK ties
R if 2 UK ties
Automatically R
In the above table a taxpayer is Previously Resident if they have been resident in any of the previous 3 tax years.
The above table shows that the following persons will automatically be treated as NOT resident in the UK:
t
t
Anyone in the UK for less than 16 days in tax year.

A person in the UK for less than 46 days in tax year and who was not resident in previous 3 tax years
In addition a person who works full time overseas and who has not been in the UK for more than 90 days in the tax year is
automatically not resident.
The above table also shows that any person in the UK for at least 183 days in the tax year is automatically RESIDENT. The following
persons are also treated as automatically resident, unless they meet one of the automatic non-resident tests:
t
t
A person whose only home is in the UK

A person who carries out full time work in the UK
Where none of the automatic tests apply then based on the above table a persons status will be based on both how many days
they are in the UK and how many ties they have with the UK in a tax year.
There are 5 UK ties as follows:
t
t
t
t
t
Spouse/civil partner or minor child in the UK

House in UK which is used during tax year
In UK for more than 90 days in either of 2 previous tax years
More time in UK than in any other country in tax year
Doing substantive work in UK
A UK day is where the person is in the UK at midnight.

The detailed rules are far more complex but only the above rules are examinable.
17
18
Paper F6
Chapter 2
Illustration 1
Sebastian was not previously resident in the UK but spent 35 days in the UK during 2014/15.
Sebastian is automatically not resident, as in UK for less than 46 days and not previously resident.
Illustration 2
Fernando was not previously resident in UK but bought a holiday home in the UK on 1 May, 2014 and lived in it for 140 days in the
2014/15 tax year. The remainder of the year he lived in his home in Spain.
Fernando was in the UK too long (>45 days) to be automatically treated as not resident, but not long enough to be treated as
automatically resident (<183 days) nor did he have his only home in the UK.
Using the table therefore as he has been in UK for between 121 days and 182 days and has only one tie with the UK (made use of UK
house), so as he was not previously UK resident he is therefore not UK resident in 2014/15.
Illustration 3
Lewis was in the UK for 80 days in 2014/15 when he lived in the only home that he owns.
Lewis has been in the UK too long to be treated as automatically not resident, irrespective of his previous residence. He will, however
be treated as automatically UK resident as his only home is in the UK.
Illustration 4
Jensen has always been UK resident spending about 10 months of the year in the UK, but on 1 May, 2014 he purchased an apartment
overseas where he lived for most of the tax year returning to the UK for a further 50 days in 2014/15 when he stayed at the family
home with his wife and children.
Jensen has spent more than 15 days in UK in 2014/15 so will not be automatically not resident. He will also not be automatically
resident in the UK as he has not spent 183 days in the UK nor does he have his only home in the UK.
As he was in the UK for between 46 and 90 days he will remain resident for 2014/15 as he has 3 UK ties:
Spouse/children in UK
A house in the UK that he uses
In the UK for more than 90 days in previous 2 years
Paper F6
Chapter 3
PROPERTY INCOME AND

INVESTMENTS INDIVIDUALS
Income liable
The following income is liable to assessment under Property Income:
(a)
(b)
1.1
rents under any lease or tenancy agreement

premium received on the grant of a short lease
Basis of assessment
Income from land and buildings is computed as if the letting of the property were a business, and the amount assessable under
property income will be the rental business profits for the individual in the tax year.
Accounts should be drawn up using the accruals basis. Any expenses payable for the same period can be deducted. Capital
expenditure is not allowable.
E XAMPLE 1
Jim bought a property and rented it out for the first time on 1 July 2014. The rent of 6,000 per annum is paid alternatively (1) quarterly in
advance (2) quarterly in arrears, or (3) annually in advance.
He paid allowable expenses of 300 in November 2014 for redecoration and 500 in May 2015 for repairs completed in March 2015.
Calculate the Property Income for 2014/15.
19
20
PROPERTY INCOME AND INVESTMENTS INDIVIDUALS

1.2
Paper F6
Chapter 3
Allowable deductions
(a)
To be allowable expenses must have been incurred wholly and exclusively in connection with the business for example
insurance
(b)
agents fees
other management expenses, for example cleaning expenses
repairs
interest on a loan to purchase the property
Capital expenditure is not allowable.
Repairs are allowable revenue expenses.
(c)
(d)
Improvements are capital and therefore disallowed
Capital allowances may be claimed for expenditure on plant and machinery used for the maintenance of the property
If the lettings are furnished, tax relief is usually given for the furniture and furnishings by a 10% wear and tear allowance,
calculated as:
10% rental income
or, if the landlord pays council tax, water rates or business rates on the property:
10% (rental income less council tax / business rates and water rates)
(e)
Relief is available for revenue expenditure incurred before letting commenced, under the pre-trading expenditure rules. ie
expenditure incurred up to 7 years prior to renting is treated as being incurred on day one of the letting business
E XAMPLE 2
Sid owns a furnished property that is let out at an annual rent of 3,600, payable monthly in advance. During the year 2014/15 he incurred
the following expenditure:
May 2014
June 2014
November 2014
May 2015
Construction of a garage, replacing the car port

Insurance for year from 1 July 2014 (insurance for the previous year to 30 June was 420)
Drain clearance
Redecoration (work completed in March 2015)
2,000
480
380
750
The tenant vacated the property during June 2014 without having paid the rent due for June. Sid was unable to trace the defaulting
tenant, but managed to let the property to new tenants from 1 July 2014.
Calculate the Property Income for 2014/15 assuming that Sid claims the 10% wear and tear allowance.
Paper F6
Chapter 3
Property losses
If total expenses exceed total rental income, the property income assessment is nil and the excess property loss is carried forward
and offset against future property income only.
Furnished holiday lettings

There are special rules for furnished holiday lettings.
The letting is treated as if it were a trade. This means that, although the income is taxed as income from a UK property business
some of, the provisions which apply to actual trades also apply to furnished holiday lettings as follows:
(a)
Capital allowances (see chapter 5) are available on furniture instead of the wear and tear allowance
(b) Income qualifies as earnings for pension relief (see chapter 10)
(c)
Capital gains tax rollover relief, gift relief and entrepreneurs relief are all available.
The profit or loss is computed for tax years on an accruals basis. Losses may only be carried forward against future profits from
furnished holiday lettings
The lettings must be of UK or European Economic Area furnished accommodation made on a commercial basis with a view to the
realisation of profit. In addition the following conditions must also be satisfied:
(d)
(e)
(f)
The accommodation must be available to let for at least 210 days in the tax year.
The accommodation must actually be let for at least 105 days in the year
No one person occupies the property for more than 31 consecutive days. If one or more persons does occupy the property
for more than 31 consecutive days then these periods of long letting must not exceed 155 days in the year
Rent a Room relief

If an individual lets a room or rooms, furnished, in his or her main residence as living accommodation then gross rents up to
4,250 p.a. are exempt.
The exemption may be ignored if the tax payer wants to generate a loss where expenses exceed income, or where actual expenses
exceed 4,250.
If gross rent exceed 4,250 p.a. the tax payer may choose to assess as follows:
(a)
Ordinary calculation
Gross rent
Less: expenses
Wear & tear allowance
Property Income
(b)
X
(X)
(X)
X
Alternative calculation (election)

Gross rent
X
Less: rent a room relief
(4,250)
Property Income
X
The election must be made for 2014/15 by 31 January 2017 and stays in force until it is revoked.
E XAMPLE 3
Barbara rents a room in her main residence. Gross rents are 85 per week and expenses amount to 120 per year
Calculate Barbaras Property Income and state the due date for any relevant election.
21
22
Paper F6
Chapter 3
Lease premiums on grant of short lease (50 years or less)
5.1
Introduction
(a)
When a tenant takes on a new lease he may be required to pay a one-off premium in addition to the annual rent. If the
lease is for less than 50 years, part of the premium is assessed on the landlord as property income, the remainder is treated
as a capital receipt.
The treatment of the capital receipt is outside the syllabus
(b)
The amount of the premium assessed as Property Income is:

P
Where:
51 n
50
P = total premium
n = duration of lease in years
E XAMPLE 4
Bill grants Richard a lease to a shop on 30 June 2014
Annual rent 5,000 due on 1 July 2014
Term
20 years
Premium
60,000
Calculate the Property Income assessment for Bill in 2014/15

5.2
Paper F6
Chapter 3
Trading Profit deduction for traders

Where a trader has paid a premium for a short lease he may deduct the following annual amount against his Trading profit in each
of the years of the lease in which the property is used in the trade. This is in addition to any rent paid:
=
Property Income assessment on landlord

p.a.
Life of lease
E XAMPLE 5
Using example 4 above, show the relief available to Richard for the premium paid.
New Individual Savings Accounts (NISAs)
6.1
Individual Savings Accounts (ISAs) have for many years been the most common form of tax efficient investment. NISAs have now
replaced and simplified the ISA system by introducing just one overall annual investment limit for the NISA and only this new
system is now examinable at F6. The main advantages of NISAs are:
(a)
Income is free of income tax
(b) Disposals of investments within an ISA are free from capital gains tax
(c)
No minimum holding period - withdrawals can be made at any time
6.2
Components of an ISA
(a)
Cash - for example in a bank account
(b) Stocks and shares listed anywhere in the world
6.3
Subscription limits
The annual subscription limit is 15,000 per tax year and NISAs now permit the taxpayer complete flexibility over the mix of
investments in either cash or stocks and shares. This limit will be provided in the tax rates and allowances section of the exam paper.
National savings
These offer a variety of products some of which are tax free, namely:
National Savings Certificates
However, some National Savings & Investments (NS&I) products are taxable, namely:
t
t
NS&I Easy Access account / NS&I Direct Saver Account

NS&I Investments accounts
The income is received gross without deduction of tax at source.

The nature of the investments are historically risk free.
23
24
Paper F6
Chapter 3
Paper F6
Chapter 4
TAX ADJUSTED TRADING PROFIT INDIVIDUALS
Badges of trade
The following tests are used to establish if a series of transactions should be treated as a trade and taxed under tax adjusted trading
profit.
1.1
Subject matter
Whether a person is trading or not may sometimes be decided by looking at the subject matter of the transaction.
1.2
Frequency of transactions
Transactions of a capital nature will be interpreted as trading transactions where their frequency indicates the carrying on of a
trade.
1.3
Length of ownership
Where items purchased are sold soon afterwards, the transactions are likely to be treated as a trade.
1.4
Profit motive
The presence of a profit motive will be a strong indication that a person is trading.
1.5
Supplementary work and marketing

When work is done to make an item more marketable, or attempts are made to find purchasers, the transactions are more likely
to be treated as a trade.
1.6
Manner in which assets were acquired

If acquired unintentionally (e.g. by inheritance) and then sold, it is unlikely that trading has taken place.
Adjusting the accounting profit
2.1
Introduction
(a)
The tax adjusted trading profit for inclusion within the income tax computation is not the same as the profit shown in the
individuals statement of profit or loss. Accounting profits before tax are adjusted to arrive at tax adjusted trading profit. The
main adjustments are to disallow for tax certain non-allowable expenses and to exclude from the assessment any nontrading income
(b)
Net profit per accounts
ADD BACK: Expenditure not deductible for tax
X
X
Deduct items not assessed under tax adjusted trading profit

- Income assessable elsewhere
- Non-taxable income
X
(X)
Adjusted profits
LESS: Capital allowances
(X)
Tax adjusted trading profit
Note:
When preparing this calculation, be careful to start with the NET profit per accounts.
25
26
Paper F6

2.2
Chapter 4
Typical expenditure by a business

(a)
Capital expenditure including depreciation is not allowable
Note:
(b)
(c)
(d)
repair to an asset is revenue expenditure and is allowable
improvement to an asset is capital expenditure and is not allowable
Reliefs, such as qualifying loan interest payments are not allowable as they are dealt with as a deduction from total income
Patent royalties payable are an allowable deduction for adjusted trading profit.
Irrecoverable Debts (Trade debt write offs & allowances)
These are allowable; the tax treatment follows the accounting treatment
(e)
However non trade write offs are not allowable and so the expense is added back.
Entertaining and gifts
entertaining is disallowed, unless entertaining employees
gifts to employees are allowable
(f)
(g)
gifts to customers are only allowable if

t
they cost less than 50 per person per year, and
t
the gift is not food, drink, tobacco or vouchers exchangeable for goods and services
t
the gift carries a conspicuous advertisement for the business.
Subscriptions and donations
trade or professional association subscriptions are allowable
charitable donation (Not made under Gift Aid)

t
if it is wholly and exclusively for trading purposes (e.g promoting business name), and it is to a local charity
then it is allowable
t
National charity donations are not allowable
charitable donations (made under Gift Aid) these are not allowable.
Political donations - these are not allowable

Legal and professional charges
allowable if connected with the trade and are not related to capital items
(h)
specifically allowed by statute:

t
costs of obtaining loan finance
t
costs of renewing a short lease (50 years or less)
Interest payable
interest paid on borrowings for trading purposes is allowable on an accruals basis therefore no adjustment is
needed.
(i)
Lease rentals on cars with CO2 emissions exceeding 130g/km
the disallowed amount is 15% of the leasing charges p.a..
(j)
Premium paid for the grant of a lease (see chapter 3).
the premium itself is disallowed as is any amortisation of the premium
the allowable amount is:

51 n
50
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
Premium
n
where n is the number of years of the lease.
Fines and penalties - Disallowed unless the fine is paid on behalf of an employee and incurred whilst on business
The accounting profit must be adjusted for the private expenditure of the business owner. If the owner uses a car in the
business and 20% of his mileages private, then only 80% of motor expenses are allowable.
However if the owner provides an employee with a car, and 20% of the mileage is for private use by the employee, then the
full amount of motor expenses is allowable. (The employee is taxed on the private use under Employment Income).
Any deduction described as the owners salary, or drawings or interest on capital invested in the business is disallowed.
Interest paid on overdue tax is not deductible and interest received on overpaid tax is not taxable
Any salary paid to the family of the owner of the business must not be excessive.
Only salary at the commercial rate for the work done is allowable.

(p)
(q)
(r)
Paper F6
Chapter 4
If an owner removes goods from the business for his own use he must add back the item as a sale at market value, unless the
owner accounts for the cost of the goods in the business accounts then they need only add back the lost profit on the item.
Pre-trading expenditure allowable if it is expenditure incurred in the seven years before a business commences to trade
then it is treated as an expense incurred on the day the business starts trading and follows the above rules.
The general rule is that expenditure not wholly and exclusively for the purpose of the trade is not allowable
E XAMPLE 1
On 1 June 2014 Jeremy commenced in self-employment running a retail shop. Jeremys statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31
May 2015 is as follows:
Gross Profit
140,880
Expenses:
Depreciation
4,760
Light and heat (Note 1)
1,525
Motor expenses (Note 2)
4,720
Professional fees (Note 3)
2,300
Rent and rates (Note 1)
3,900
Repairs and renewals (Note 4)
5,660
Sundry expenses (Note 5)
2,990
84,825
Wages and salaries (Note 6)
110,680
Net profit
30,200
Notes
Note 1: Private accommodation
Jeremy and his wife live in a flat that is situated above the clothing shop. Of the expenditure included in the statement of profit or loss for
light, heat, rent and rates, 40% relates to the flat.
Note 2: Motor expenses
During the year ended 31 May 2015, Jeremy drove a total of 12.000 miles, of which 9,000 were for private journeys.
Note 3: Professional fees
Professional fees are as follows:
Accountancy
700
Legal fees in connection with the purchase of the clothing shop
1,200
400
Debt collection
2,300
Included in the figure for accountancy is 250 in respect of a capital gains tax computation.
Note 4: Repairs and renewals
The figure of 5,660 for repairs and renewals includes 2,200 for decorating the clothing shop during July 2014, and 1,050 for decorating
the private flat during August 2014. The building was in a usable state when it was purchased.
Note 5: Sundry expenses
The figure of 2,990 for sundry expenses, includes 640 for gifts to customers of food hampers costing 40 each, 320 for gifts to
customers of pens carrying an advertisement for the clothing shop costing 1.60 each, 100 for a donation to a national charity, and 40
for a donation to a local charitys fete. The fetes programme carried a free advertisement for the clothing shop.
Note 6: Wages and salaries
The figure of 84,825 for wages and salaries includes the annual salary of 15,500 paid to Jeremys wife. She works in the clothing shop as
a sales assistant. The other sales assistants doing the same job are paid an annual salary of 11 ,000.
Note 7: Goods for own use
During the year ended 31 May 2015, Jeremy took clothes out of the shop for his personal use without paying or accounting for them. The
cost of these clothes was 460, and they had a selling price of 650.
Note 8: Plant and machinery
The capital allowances available for the year ended 31 May 2015 are 13,060.
(In the actual examination you will be required to do a capital allowances computation and work out this figure.)
Calculate Jeremys tax adjusted trading profit for the year ended 31 May 2015.
27
28
Paper F6
Chapter 4
Paper F6
Chapter 5
CAPITAL ALLOWANCES
Capital allowances
1.1
Capital Allowances replace the disallowed depreciation charge in the adjustment of profits, giving tax relief against trading profits
in respect of expenditure incurred on qualifying plant and machinery.
Plant is generally defined as assets that perform an active function in the business something with which the trade is carried on
and will include office furniture and equipment including moveable office partitioning. Machinery will include motor vehicles and
computers, including building alterations necessary for the installation of plant and machinery.
Capital allowances are now also available on integral features of a building including lifts and escalators, electrical systems, heating
and air cooling systems
1.2
If a business is VAT registered and the input VAT is recoverable on the purchase of an asset then the VAT exclusive net cost will be
available for capital allowances. If the VAT is not recoverable as on the purchase of a car or if the business is not VAT registered then
the VAT inclusive price will attract capital allowances.
Capital Allowance Computations
2.1
Capital allowance computations will be prepared for the accounting period of the business not the tax year and will be deducted
from the adjusted trading profit of that accounting period.
2.2
There are 3 types of capital allowance available on the qualifying cost of qualifying plant and machinery.
(1)
Annual Investment Allowance (AIA)
The AIA gives an allowance of 100% for the first 500,000 of qualifying expenditure incurred in a 12 month accounting
period. If the accounting period of the business is other than 12 months then the AIA will be time apportioned accordingly,
for example a business that has prepared its accounts for a 6 month period would be entitled to AIA of 250,000 (6/12 x
500,000). The 500,000 limit applies for expenditure incurred from 6 April (1 April for companies), 2014 and your exam will
not include for this purpose any periods that span this date.
AIA is available on the purchase of all plant and machinery except motor cars.
Any expenditure in excess of the AIA limit or on the majority of motor cars will qualify instead for a writing down allowance
(WDA)
(2)
Writing Down Allowance (WDA)

The cost of most plant and machinery that has not qualified for AIA will be allocated to a pool of expenditure that will then
be eligible for a WDA of either 18% per annum if expenditure qualifies for the main pool, or 8% per annum if allocated to
the special rate pool, available on a reducing balance basis.
As with AIA the WDA will be time apportioned where the accounting period is other than 12 months.
29
30
Paper F6
Capital Allowances
Chapter 5
Illustration 1
Richard commenced to trade on 1 July 2014 and prepared accounts to 31 December 2014 and to 31 December thereafter. Richard
made the following acquisitions of main pool assets:
Accounting Period to 31 December 2014
1 July 2014
Plant
20 October 2014
Computer equipment
220,000
80,000
Accounting Year ended 31 December 2015

19 October 2015
Machinery
Capital Allowance Computations
6 month period to 31 December 2014
Additions (AIA)
1 July 2014
Plant
20 October 2014
Computers
AIA (max 6/12 x 500,000)
WDA (max 6/12 x 18% x 50,000)
Total Allowances
Tax Written Down Value (TWDV) c/f
Year Ended 31 December 2015
TWDV b/f
Additions (AIA)
19 October 2015
AIA
WDA (18%)
Total Allowances
TWDV c/f
(3)
30,000
Main Pool
220,000
80,000
300,000
(250,000)
50,000
(4,500)
Allowances
250,000
4,500
254,500
45,500
45,500
30,000
(30,000)
(8,190)
30,000
8,190
38,190
37,310
First Year Allowance (FYA)

New cars with CO2 emissions up to 95 grams per kilometre attract a 100% FYA. The FYA is never time apportioned.
Capital Allowance Rates
3.1
The capital allowances information that will be given in the tax rates and allowances section of the examination paper for the June
and December 2015 exam sittings is as follows:
Rates of allowance
%
Plant and machinery
Main pool
Special Rate Pool
18
8
Motor Cars
New cars with CO2 emissions up to 95 grams per Km
CO2 emissions between 96 and 130 grams per Km
CO2 emissions over 130 grams per Km
100
18
8
Annual Investment Allowance

Rate of allowance
100
Expenditure limit
500,000
Capital Allowances
Paper F6
Chapter 5
As can be seen from this information it is therefore essential for students to know what type of allowances are available for each
asset acquired during the accounting period of the business:
As stated in section 3 above new cars with low CO2 emissions qualify for a 100% FYA.
As stated in section 2 above all plant and machinery with the exception of cars will qualify for AIA with any excess expenditure over
500,000 per annum and cars then qualifying for WDA at either 18% per annum if qualifying for the main pool or 8% per annum
if allocated to the special rate pool.
If expenditure exceeds the AIA limit the AIA should therefore be allocated firstly to special rate expenditure before main pool
expenditure, as any excess expenditure will only attract 8% WDA in the special rate pool, whereas 18% is available in the main pool.
It is therefore necessary to know what expenditure is excluded from the main pool and allocated instead to the special rate pool.
Special Rate Pool

The following asset acquisitions should be allocated to the special rate pool:
(1)
(2)
Integral features of a building
Lifts and escalators
Electrical and general lighting systems
Cold water systems
Space or water heating systems
Systems of ventilation, air cooling or purification
Long life assets

Assets, when new, with an expected economic working life of 25 years or more when total expenditure based on a 12
month accounting period exceeds 100,000
(3)
Thermal insulation of a building, and
(4)
Motor cars with CO2 emissions over 130 grams per Km

Note however that this expenditure being on cars does NOT qualify for AIA and only the 8% WDA is available
31
32
Paper F6
Capital Allowances
Chapter 5
Illustration 2
Steven prepares accounts to 5 April
The WDV of the main pool at 6 April 2014 is 40,000. The following transactions took place during the year ended 5 April 2015:
4 May 2014
Purchased plant for 50,000
30 June 2014
Purchased a motor car for 11,200 CO2 of 120g/km
6 July 2014
15 March 2015
Calculate the capital allowances for the year ended 5 April 2015.
Accounting period to 5 April 2015
WDV b/f
Additions qualifying for AIA
Plant
AIA
Other additions
Motor car (120g/km)
Motor car (170 g/km)
WDA @ 18%
WDA @ 8%
Additions qualifying for 100% FYA
Motor car (85g/km)
FYA @ 100%
WDV c/f
Main Pool
40,000
Special Rate Pool
50,000
(50,000)
Allowances
50,000
11,200
51,200
(9,216)
14,100
14,100
(1,128)
14,400
(14,400)
9,216
1,128
14,400
74,744
41,984
12,972
Paper F6
Capital Allowances
Chapter 5
Illustration 3
Kenny prepares accounts to 5 April. As at 6 April 2014 the WDV brought forward on the main pool was 22,000.
The following transactions occurred in the year ended 5 April 2015.
22 July 2014
Purchased machinery
45,000
13 November 2014
Purchased a long life asset
530,000
25 February 2015
Purchased a motor car CO2 emissions of 125g/km
8,000
Calculate Kennys capital allowances for year ended 5 April 2015
WDV b/f
Long life asset
AIA (Maximum)
Main Pool Special Rate Pool Allowances
22,000
530,000
(500,000)
500,000
30,000

Machinery
AIA
45,000
()
45,000
Other additions
Motor car (emissions 125g/km)
WDA @ 18%
WDA @ 8%
WDV c/f
8,000
75,000
(13,500)
30,000
(2,400)
61,500
13,500
2.400
515,900
27,600
Sale of plant and machinery

When plant and machinery is sold in the accounting period the sale proceeds, up to a maximum of the original cost of the asset, is
deducted from the balance of the unrelieved expenditure of the relevant pool.
The Small Pools WDA

Where the tax wdv of either the main pool or special rate pool prior to calculating the WDA is less than 1,000, the entire balance
may be taken as a WDA in that period. The 1,000 is prorated if the accounting period is other than 12 months.
E XAMPLE 1
Beth prepares accounts to 5 April. The WDV as at 6 April 2014 of her main pool is 1,250. She purchases machinery for 10,000 in the year
and sells an item of plant for 500 (cost 3,000).
Calculate her capital allowances for the year ended 5 April 2015
33
34
Capital Allowances
Paper F6
Chapter 5
Non Pool Assets

In the following circumstances assets will not go to either the main or special rate pools but will instead have their own separate
column on the capital allowance computation:
(1) Assets with private use by the business owner, or
(2) Short life assets on which the taxpayer has made a depooling election.
7.1
Private use of an asset by the owner of the business

Where an asset is used by the owner of the business (this can be either a sole trader or a partner in a partnership) partly for business
and partly for private purposes (typically a motor car), only the business proportion of the available capital allowances is given. This
proportion is computed by reference to the percentage of business use to total use. The following rules must be followed when
computing capital allowances:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The cost is not brought into the main or special rate pool, but must be the subject of a separate column on the computation
The WDA (or AIA or FYA) of the asset is based on its full cost but only the business proportion of any allowance is actually
given.
On disposal of the asset, a balancing adjustment is computed by deducting sale proceeds from the tax wdv (there is
a balancing charge if sale proceeds exceed tax wdv, and a balancing allowance if sale proceeds are less than tax wdv).
Having computed the balancing adjustment, the amount assessed or allowed is then reduced to the business proportion.
A balancing allowance is then added in to the capital allowances of the period whereas a balancing charge will reduce the
capital allowances.
Private use by an employee of an asset owned by the business has no effect on the businesss entitlement to capital
allowances. This is why the private use of an asset is irrelevant for companies, as directors are treated as employees for
this purpose. Instead, there will normally be an employment income assessment as a benefit charge on the employee or
director (see chapter 9).
Paper F6
Capital Allowances
Chapter 5
E XAMPLE 2
Jane prepares accounts to 5 April. At 6 April 2014 the WDVs brought forward are as follows:
Main Pool
Motor car (115g/km) (used 30% for private purposes by Jane)
21,200
13,600
The following transactions took place during the year ended 31 December 2014:
10 May 2014
Purchased plant for 6,600
25 June 2014
Purchased a motor car for 10,600 CO2 emissions of 100g/km to be used by an employee who will use it 80% for
business purposes
15 October 2014
Sold the motor car used privately by Jane for 9,400
16 October 2014
Purchased a motor car for 16,000 CO2 emissions of 180g/km (used 30% for private purposes by Jane)
Calculate Janes capital allowances for the year ended 5 April 2015.
7.2
Short-life assets
(a)
An election can be made to omit short life assets from the main pool and include them in their own individual column. This
is known as a depooling election
(b) This allows the acceleration of capital allowances on short-life plant and machinery where they are sold at a low residual
value or scrapped within 8 years following the end of the accounting period in which it was acquired.
(c)
Any plant and machinery that would normally go to the main pool, except cars, can be treated as a short-life asset.
(d) Capital allowances on each short-life asset are calculated separately
(e)
On disposal within 8 years of the end of the accounting period in which the acquisition took place a balancing allowance or
charge arises, which would not occur if the item was pooled. Clearly the election would only be worthwhile if a balancing
allowance was anticipated.
(f)
If no disposal takes place within 8 years of the end of the accounting period in which the acquisition took place the
unrelieved balance is transferred to the pool.
The transfer is immediately after the 8th anniversary of the end of the accounting period in which it was acquired.
35
36
Capital Allowances
(g)
(h)
(i)
Paper F6
Chapter 5
The AIA is available against expenditure on short life assets. If expenditure is outside this limit then expenditure on main
pool items will qualify for a WDA of 18%.
The AIA could be matched with short life assets. However if total expenditure on plant and machinery is above 500,000
the AIA would be allocated to the main pool additions first, as no balancing allowance occurs on sale. If the AIA is allocated
to main pool items first then a short life asset election could be made on any short-life assets, with balancing allowances
hopefully crystalising on disposal.
Given the increase in AIA to 500,000 it is very unlikely that the election would now be worthwhile for most unincorporated
traders. An exam question may still be set of course for an unincorporated trader selling a short life asset where the election
had beeen made when AIA was previously at a much lower level. Example 3 below, however shows both the election being
made and the resultant effect on the disposal of the asset.
E XAMPLE 3
John prepares accounts to 5 April in each year.
At 6 April 2014 the WDV of the main pool was 16,000.
On 1 July 2014 John purchased machinery for 520,000
On 1 September 2014 John purchased a photocopier for 4,000 and made a short life asset election.
On 1 July 2015 the photocopier was sold for 1,500.
Calculate the capital allowances for years ended 5 April 2015 and 2016
7.3
Balancing adjustments on the Main or Special Rate Pools

(a)
A Balancing charge can arise at any time on the main pool or special rate pool if disposal proceeds exceed the balance
on the pool. If a net balancing charge arises on the capital allowances computation this would be added to the adjusted
trading profit of the accounting period.
Capital Allowances
E XAMPLE 4
Peter prepares accounts to 5 April. In the year ended 5 April 2015 the following transactions took place:
10 April 2014
Plant sold (originally purchased for 10,200) for 8,600
1 October 2014
Second hand motor car (emissions 125g/km) purchased for 2,000
The WDV on the main pool as at 6 April 2014 was 4,000.
Calculate the balancing adjustment for the year ended 5 April 2015
(b)
(c)
A Balancing allowance can only occur on the main pool and special rate pool on cessation of the trade
No AIA, WDA or FYA are available in the final accounting period of the business
E XAMPLE 5
Kris prepares accounts to 31 December.
Kris ceased to trade on 31 March 2015 on which date all plant and machinery was sold for 5,000.
The WDV on the main pool as at 1 January 2015 was 12,000.
Machinery was purchased on 1 February 2015 for 4,000
Calculate the balancing allowance for the accounting period ended 31 March 2015
Paper F6
Chapter 5
37
38
Capital Allowances
Paper F6
Chapter 5
Preparing the Capital Allowance Computation

It is essential to follow a set format in dealing with the additions and disposals of assets in the accounting period in the preparation
of the capital allowance computation:
(1)
List any tax written down values (unrelieved expenditure) on the pools and any non-pool assets at the start of the accounting
period as given within the question.
(2)
List expenditure qualifying for AIA, in order, firstly special rate pool and then main pool
(3)
Add any expenditure in excess of the AIA limit to the relevant pool
(4)
Add to relevant pool the cost of any cars qualifying for WDA ie cars with CO2 emissions in excess of 95 grams per Km
(5)
Deduct sale proceeds, to a maximum of original cost, of assets sold during the accounting period from the relevant pool
balance
(6)
Deduct sale proceeds, to a maximum of original cost from the tax WDV of any non-pool assets and compute the relevant
balancing adjustment
(7)
Compute available WDAs on the Tax WDVs computed and deduct therefrom
(8)
List any new low emission cars purchased during the accounting period and claim the available 100% FYA
Paper F6
Capital Allowances
Chapter 5
Full Pro forma Capital Allowances Computation

Main pool
WDV b/f
- long life assets
- integral features of a building
- thermal insulation
AIA (Note a)
- machinery
- plant
AIA (Note a)
Special Rate Short life asset (Business %) Allowances

Pool
(1)
Private use Asset
X
X
X
(X)
X
X
X
X
(X)
X
X
Other Additions
Motor cars
emissions 96-130g/km
emissions >130 g/km
Disposals
X
X
(X)
X
(Note b)
WDA 18%
WDA 18%/8%
(X)
X
(X)
(X)
X
X
( Business use)
WDA 8%
Balancing allowance
(X)
X
X
(X)
Additions qualifying for FYA
Motor car emissions 95g/km

FYA @ 100%
Allowances for period
WDV c/fwd
(X)
X
X
X
Notes
(a)
(b)
The AIA is allocated to assets included in the special rate pool in priority to those included in the main pool,
If the balance on the main pool and /or special rate pool is 1,000 for a 12 month accounting period, the small pool WDA
could be claimed
39
40
Paper F6
Capital Allowances
Chapter 5
E XAMPLE 6 (C OMPREHENSIVE )
Ling prepares accounts to 5 April. The WDV of the main pool at 6 April 2014 was 30,000, and on a car (120g/km) 14,000.
The car was used by Ling 20% for private use. The following transactions took place during the year ended 5 April 2015.
6 May 2014
10 June 2014
25 June 2014
7 September 2014
10 November 2014
3 December 2014
9 December 2014
Purchased a motor car (emissions 90g/km)

Purchased computer equipment
Purchased a machine
Purchased plant
Purchased a motor car (emissions 115g/km)
Purchased thermal insulation for the business building
Disposed of the car used privately by Ling
17,000
60,000
184,000
260,000
11,200
28,000
8,000
Calculate the capital allowances for year ended 5 April 2015. No short life asset election has been made in respect of the
computer equipment.
Paper F6
Chapter 6
TRADING PROFIT BASIS PERIODS
Basis periods
Having adjusted the trading profit of the accounting period and computed and deducted the capital allowances for this period the
trading profit must now be included in the Income Tax Computation for the relevant Tax Year of assessment.
Traders are assessed on their trading profit using a current year basis (CYB), this is the accounting year ending in the year of
assessment (i.e. the tax year).
If a trader makes accounts to 31 October each year, his 2014/15 assessment will be based on the trading profit for the accounting
year ending 31 October 2014.
E XAMPLE 1
(a)
Andrew has been trading for many years preparing accounts to 31 March
Which tax year will the trading profits for the year ended 31 March 2014 be assessed in?
(b)
Eric has been trading for many years preparing accounts to 31 August.
Which tax year will the trading profits for the year ended 31 August 2014 be assessed in?
(c)
Cathy has been trading for many years preparing accounts to 30 April.
Which tax year will the trading profits for the year ended 30 April 2014 be assessed in?
41
42
Paper F6

1.1
Chapter 6
Opening year rules

(a)
There are special rules for the opening tax years of trading until a CYB assessment is available:
(b) For a new business:
Tax year
Basis of assessment
Year 1
Actual profits from commencement of trade

to the following 5 April
Year 2
Is there an accounting period

which ends in tax year 2?
yes
How long is this accounting
period?
< 12 months long

Assess profits for the first 12
months of trading
Year 3
(c)
no
Assess the actual profits in tax
year 2 i.e 6 April to 5 April
12 months long
Assess profits for the 12 months
to the accounting period end date
ending in year 2
Assess profits for the 12 months
to the accounting period end date
ending in year 3
Some profits may fall into more than one basis period in the opening years and are known as overlap profits. Where there
has been an overlap, overlap relief will be available on cessation of trading in the final tax year of assessment - see section
1.2.
E XAMPLE 2
Andrew started to trade on 1 January 2012 and makes up his first accounts to 30 June 2012 and then 30 June annually thereafter. His
trading profits are as follows:
6 months
to 30 June 2012
30,000
Year
to 30 June 2013
70,000
Year
to 30 June 2014
82,000
What are the assessments for 2011/12 to 2014/15?
How much overlap relief is available?
Paper F6
Chapter 6
E XAMPLE 3
Chris started to trade on 1 May 2013 and makes up his first accounts to 31 October 2014 and then 31 October annually thereafter.
He made 36,000 trading profits in the 18 months to 31 October 2014 and 30,000 in the year ended 31 October 2015.
Compute the assessments for the relevant tax years so far as the above information will allow.
How much overlap profit arises?
1.2
Closing year rules

The basis of assessment for the final tax year of a business is as follows:
(a)
(b)
Closing year: the actual trading profits from the end of the basis period for the previous year of assessment until the date of
cessation (anything not yet taxed). The previous tax year should be assessed on a CYB
Any overlap profits / relief is then deducted in deriving the assessment for the final tax year.
E XAMPLE 4
Boris, who has been trading for many years making up his accounts to 31 January, ceases to trade on 31 May 2014 with trading profits as
follows:
Trading Profit
Year to 31 January 2014

47,000
4 months to 31 May 2014
8,000
The overlap profits from the opening years of his trade were 6,000.
What are the assessments for 2013/14 and 2014/15?
43
44
Paper F6
Chapter 6
Basis periods for capital allowances

Capital allowances are calculated for a period of account. They are then treated as an expense, and deducted from profits. This
adjusted profit figure is then what is used to determine the assessment for a relevant Tax Year.
2.1
Opening years
Capital allowances are deducted from profits before the opening year rules are applied. For an accounting period longer or shorter
than 12 months the AIA and WDAs are scaled up or down as appropriate. The FYA at 100% on cars with emissions of 95g/km, is
never time apportioned.
E XAMPLE 5
Until 30 June 2014 Wendy was employed as a management consultant at an annual salary of 40,000.
On 1 July 2014 Wendy commenced in self-employment running a music-recording studio. The following information relates to the period
of self-employment from 1 July 2014 to 5 April 2015:
1
2
The Adjusted profit for the period 1 July 2014 to 5 April 2015 is 89,000. This figure is before taking account of capital allowances.
Wendy purchased the following assets:
1 July 2014
Recording equipment
30,000
15 August 2014
Motor car (CO2 emissions are 170 g/km) used by Wendy - 60% business use
14,800
20 October 2014
Motor car (CO2 emissions are 125 g/km) used privately by employee - 20% private use)
10,400
4 March 2015
Computer
2,600
Compute Wendys income tax liability for 2014/15
Paper F6
Chapter 6
2.2
Cessation of trade
(a)
No allowances (WDA, AIA or FYA) are available in the final period of trading.
(b) If there are additions in the final period, these are added to the relevant pool, then disposal proceeds (limited to cost) are
deducted to find a balance.
(c)
If the net balance is still positive then a balancing allowance will arise whereas if the net balance is a negative figure then a
balancing charge arises.
Cash Basis for Small Businesses

From 6 April 2014 certain small unincorporated businesses (sole traders and partnerships) may elect to use a cash basis to determine
their tax adjusted trading profits instead of the normal accruals basis.
The election is available to those businesses with receipts for a 12 month accounting period assessable in the tax year that do not
exceed the VAT registration limit of 81,000.
A trader must leave the scheme if receipts assessable in the previous tax year exceed twice the VAT registration limit (162,000).
The cash basis will assess a business on its cash receipts less cash payments of allowable business expenses. Payables, receivables
and inventory are ignored.
The accounting profit must be adjusted for taxation purposes mostly as for accruals accounting with the main difference being in
relation to capital expenditure.
Expenditure on plant and machinery which would normally attract capital allowances will now attract tax relief with capital
payments for plant and machinery (except cars) being deductible and capital receipts from sale of plant and machinery (except
cars) being included in the calculation of the adjusted trading profit.
In respect of cars instead of claiming capital allowances the trader may instead use a fixed (or flat) rate deduction for tax purposes.
The actual capital cost of acquiring a car for use in the business, the running costs and the sale proceeds are excluded from the
profit calculation. The trader can instead claim as a deduction against the trading profit a mileage allowance for the business
mileage. The allowance is at a rate of 45p per mile for the first 10,000 business miles and 25p thereafter.
Taxable trading profits for an accounting period under the cash basis are computed as:
Receipts (inc. sale of plant & machinery)
Expense payments (inc. purchase of plant & machinery)
Tax adjusted trading profit / (loss)
xxx
(xxx)
xx
E XAMPLE 6
Adam commenced trading as a sole trader selling fresh fruit on June 1, 2014 and prepared his first set of accounts to May 31, 2015, for
which the following information is available:
Sales for the period were 61,000 of which 4,000 was still owed by business customers at the end of the period.
Inventory at May 31, 2015 amounted to 1.800.
Purchases and expenses of the period (all allowable) amounted to 29,000 of which 2,000 was still owed to suppliers at the end of the
period.
On June 1, 2014 Adam purchased equipment for use within the trade costing 8,000 and on 1 October, 2014 a motor car costing 12,000
with CO2 emissions of 122 grams per kilometre. Adam uses the car 40% for private use and incurred motor expenses during the period
of 3,600 in driving a total of 10,000 miles.
Calculate Adams adjusted trading profit for the accounting period ended May 31, 2015 using the normal basis and using
the cash basis.
45
46
Paper F6
Chapter 6
If a trading loss arises under the cash basis then the only relief available to the trader is to carry forward the loss to set off against
future trading profits of the same trade.
This compares unfavourably with the normal loss reliefs available to a trader which are detailed in Chapter 7 and may be a critical
issue especially for new businesses in making the decision as to whether to elect for the cash basis to apply and may also be a
reason for a business in the future to withdraw the election.
Premises used as both home and business premises such as a small hotel, guest house, bed and breakfast or public house can elect
for a flat rate private use adjustment to apply under the cash basis in respect of private use of the property for such expenses as
food and heat and light. Note this is an add back not a deduction.
The relevant flat rates will be provided in an examination question and are based on the number of occupants. For example if the
property had one occupant the add back would be 350 per month or part thereof (4,200 per annum) and for two occupants it
would be 500 per month (6,000 per annum).
The flat rate add back does not include other property expenses such as rent or loan interest payments.
E XAMPLE 7
Eve, a single lady, runs a small guest house in which she lives and prepares accounts to April 5 each year. For the year ended April 5, 2015
she has a trading profit before any private use adjustment of 23,000. The total cost for food, heating and lighting charged for this period
amounted to 14,000.
State how the total cost of food and heat and light may be dealt with for tax puroses and calculate Eves adjusted trading
profit assuming the election for the flat rate private use adjustment has been made.
Paper F6
Chapter 7
TAX ADJUSTED TRADING LOSSES INDIVIDUALS
Trading losses
1.1
Trading Profit assessment

(a)
If the basis period has a trading loss, the trading profit assessment to include in the income tax computation is nil.
(b) The trading profit figure in an income tax computation can never be negative
1.2
Relieving the loss

The loss may be relieved according to the following rules. A repayment of income tax may result in some circumstances.
The reliefs available

The main reliefs available for a trading loss, are as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Carry forward against future trading profits of the same trade

Relief against total income of current and/or preceding tax year.
Opening years loss relief against total income of preceding 3 tax years
Terminal loss relief against previous 3 years trading profits
Carry forward of trading losses

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
A trading loss may be carried forward and set against the first trading profits arising from the same trade.
The trading loss must be set off in full against the next available trading profit if this option is chosen.
Any loss remaining is carried forward until further profits arise.
The loss may be carried forward indefinitely
E XAMPLE 1
Albert has had the following recent trading results as adjusted for tax:
Year to 31 December 2012

Loss
(5,000)
Profit
3,000
Profit
10,000
Assume that Albert chose to carry forward the loss.
Calculate his assessable amounts for all relevant tax years.
47
48
Paper F6
Chapter 7
Loss relief against total income

(a)
A trading loss may be relieved against total income (after any qualifying loan interest payments) of the tax year of the loss
and/or the preceding tax year.
the loss is calculated on an accounting period basis.
(b)
a loss for the year ended 30 June 2014 maybe relieved against total income of 2014/15 (the tax year of loss) and/or
2013/14 (the preceding tax year)
If relief against total income is taken,
the loss must be set off to the maximum possible extent subject to a newly introduced cap on income tax reliefs - see
section (c) below
personal allowances may therefore be lost as total income is before the deduction of the personal allowance and
partial claims are not allowed.
a claim against total income may be made for either the tax year of the loss or the previous year or both. The two
years are treated separately and thus a claim is required for each year.
E XAMPLE 2
Charles has the following trading profit/ (loss) results:
Year ended 31 December 2012
32,000
25,000
(84,000)
Charles also has property income in each year of 6,000.

Calculate Charles taxable income, assuming that the trading loss is used in the most beneficial way and trading losses will
continue for the next few years. Assume the personal allowance for 2014/15 applies in all tax years.
Paper F6
(c)
Chapter 7
A cap was introduced in FA 2013 limiting the amount of loss relief available against a persons total income. The cap is the
higher of:
50,000, or
-
25% of persons adjusted total income
Adjusted total income is after deducting the gross amount of any personal pension contributions.
Importantly the cap does not apply to any trading profits within the total income figure ( this would be relevant to a claim
made in respect of the preceding tax year).
The cap will only be tested at F6 within this section of relief against total income of current and / or the preceding tax year.
Illustration
Louise Serr has always prepared accounts to April 5 in each year in respect of her trade while also receiving employment income of
60,000 each tax year. For the year ended April 5, 2015 she made a trading loss of 125,000 having made a trading profit of 20,000
in the year ended April 5, 2014.
Assume the personal allowance for 2014/15 also applied in 2013/14 and compute the taxable income for each of these tax years
assuming that loss relief claims against total income are made in both tax years.
2013/14
2014/15
Trading Profit
20,000
Nil
Employment Income
60,000
60,000
80,000
60,000
(70,000)
(50,000)
10,000
10,000
(10,000)
(10,000)
Loss Relief
Personal Allowance
Taxable Income
Loss relief claim in 2014/15 is capped at 50,000 as this is higher than 15,000 (25% x 60,000).
In 2013/14 the loss relief claim is made in full against the trading profit but the cap of 50,000 then applies against the remaining total
income (employment income).
The cap can here be seen in fact to be of advantage to Louise as it leaves sufficient total income in both years to absorb the available
personal allowance.
The remaining trading loss of the year of 5,000 (125,000 50,000 70,000) will be carried forward to set off against the next available
trading profit of the business.
(d)
Relief of trading losses against capital gains

(i)
This relief is an extension to current year and carryback relief against total income and may only be claimed after such
a claim has been made against the total income of the tax year of claim.
(ii)
A trading loss may be relieved against capital gains, but only after the total income of the year in question has been
reduced to zero by the trading loss under a normal claim, and an unrelieved loss still remains.
(iii) The remaining unrelieved trading loss may be set off as a deemed capital loss against the taxpayers gains for the
year; after setting off current year capital losses against current year capital gains. It takes precedence over both the
annual exemption (a level of tax free gains and currently 11,000) and any capital losses brought forward (see details
in chapter 12).
49
50
Paper F6
Chapter 7
E XAMPLE 3
For 2014/15 Kathy has a capital gain of 44,000. She has trading loss relief available of 24,000 after a claim against the total income of
the tax year has been made.
Calculate Kathys chargeable gain for 2014/15, assuming that Kathy makes the election.
Losses in opening years

In the first tax year of the trade the assessable profit (or loss) is measured from the day trade commences to the following 5 April.
t
Unless the trader prepares accounts to 5 April, this requires the profit (or loss) to be apportioned.
A loss may only be relieved once. If, in the opening years, a loss has been taken into account in computing the assessment
of one tax year, it is treated as nil when calculating the next assessment.
E XAMPLE 4
Matthew starts trading on 1 August 2013. His trading results, as adjusted for tax purposes are:
10 months to 31 May 2014

Loss (20,000)
Year ended 31 May 2015
Profit
48,000
Calculate Matthews trading profit assessments and the losses available for relief in respect of all relevant tax years.
Paper F6
5.1
Chapter 7
Opening years loss relief

(a)
The relief is available for losses incurred in the first four tax years of trading.
(b) Relief is available against total income of the three tax years preceding the tax year of loss.
There is no need for the trade to have been carried on in these preceding tax years
(c)
(d)
(e)
The relief operates against all three preceding tax years on a FIFO basis. As with current and preceding year relief partial
claims are not available and hence personal allowances may again be lost
The loss available for this relief is computed in the same way as profits.
In the early years of the trade it is possible to claim the following reliefs:
Relief against total income of the current and/or previous tax year, including possible extended claim against gains
Carry forward against future trading profit
E XAMPLE 5
Fiona started trading on 1 July 2013. Her results, as adjusted for tax purposes, for the first two years are as follows:
Year ended 30 June 2014

Loss
(12,000)
Profit
2,500
Fiona had previously been employed.
Her remuneration from this employment, which ceased on 30 September 2012, for recent years was:
2012/13
2011/12
2010/11
Fiona has other income of 4,500 (gross) p.a.
5,868
11,050
12,800
Calculate the taxable income for all years after claiming opening years loss relief.
Assume the personal allowance for 2014/15 applies throughout.
51
52
Paper F6
Chapter 7
Paper F6
Chapter 7
Terminal loss relief

(a)
(b)
The terminal loss is set against trading profit for the tax year of cessation (if any - note this is usually a nil assessment given
the loss arising) and then the previous three tax years on a LIFO basis.
The terminal loss is the loss of the final 12 months of trading computed in 2 parts dividing the last 12 months of trading
between the final and penultimate tax years, calculated as follows:
(i)
The actual trade loss for the tax year of cessation (from 6 April to the date of cessation) including any overlap relief
arising from opening years.
(ii)
The actual trade loss for the period 12 months before cessation until the end of the penultimate tax year
If the result in i) or ii) is a profit it is treated as zero for purposes of the terminal loss computation.
E XAMPLE 6
David has the following trading results before ceasing to trade on 31 May 2015
Year ended
31 July 2013
18,000
Year ended
31 July 2014
6,000
10 months
31 May 2015
(20,000)
Show the loss available for relief under terminal loss relief, assuming overlap profits on commencement were 500 and state
how this loss would then be relieved
53
54
Paper F6
Chapter 7
Paper F6
Chapter 8
PARTNERSHIPS
Introduction
A partnership is a single trading entity. Each individual partner is effectively treated as trading in his own right and is assessed on
his/her share of the adjusted trading profit of the partnership.
Trading income
(a)
(b)
Allocation of the trading profit or trading loss

(a)
(b)
The partnerships tax adjusted profits or loss for an accounting period is computed in the same way as for a sole trader
Partners salaries and interest on capital are not deductible as expenses as these are simply an allocation of trading profit.
The trading income or trading loss is divided between the partners according to their profit sharing arrangements in force
during the accounting period.
Partners may firstly be entitled to salaries and interest on capital. The balance of any trading profit (or loss) will then be
allocated in the profit sharing ratio (PSR).
A change in the profit sharing agreement

If the profit sharing agreement is changed during a period of account, the profit must be time apportioned before allocation under
the different agreements.
E XAMPLE 1
Doug and Rob are in partnership. The trading income for the year ended 30 September 2014 was 18,000
Up to 30 June 2014 profits were shared between Doug and Rob 3:2, after paying salaries of 3,000 and 2,000 per annum.
From 1 July 2014 profits were shared 2:1 after paying salaries of 6,000 and 4,000 per annum.
Show the allocation of trading profits for the Accounting Period ended 30 September 2014.
55
56
PARTNERSHIPS
Capital allowances are deducted as an expense in calculating trading profit.

If assets are used privately, the business proportion is included in the partnerships capital allowances computation.
Commencement and cessation

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Chapter 8
Partnership capital allowances

(a)
(b)
Paper F6
The rules for commencement and cessation are the same as for a sole trader.
The profit is allocated between the partners for accounting periods and then the assessment rules are applied.
Each partner is effectively taxed as a sole trader on his/her share of the adjusted trading profit
Continuing partners will be assessed using CYB
When a new partner joins a partnership, he is treated as commencing a new trade and hence the opening years rules apply
When an old partner leaves a partnership he is treated as ceasing a trade and hence the closing years rules apply
Each partner has his own overlap profit available for relief.
A change in the membership of a partnership

(a)
(b)
As long as there is at least one partner common to the business before and after the change, the partnership continues.
The commencement or cessation rules apply only to the individual joining or leaving the partnership.
E XAMPLE 2
Ann and Beryl have been in partnership since 1 July 2012 making up their accounts to 30 June each year. On 1 July 2014 Clair joins the
partnership.
The partnerships trading profit is as follows:

12,000
14,000
24,000
Profits are shared equally.
Show the amounts assessed on the individual partners for all relevant tax years of assessment.
PARTNERSHIPS
Paper F6
Chapter 8
Partnership losses
(a)
(b)
(c)
Losses are allocated between partners in the same way as profits.

Loss relief claims available are the same as for sole traders.
A partner joining the partnership may claim under opening years loss relief, for losses in the first four tax years of his
membership of the partnership.
This relief is not available to existing partners.
(d)
A partner leaving a partnership may claim under terminal loss relief.

This relief is not available to partners remaining in the partnership.
E XAMPLE 3
John, James and Paul are in partnership making up their accounts to 5 April. During 2014/15 Paul left the partnership and George joined
in his place.
For the year ended 5 April 2015 the partnership made a trading loss of 40,000.
State the loss relief claims that will be available to the partners. No calculation of the loss reliefs available is required
57
58
PARTNERSHIPS
Paper F6
Chapter 8
Paper F6
Chapter 9
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
The scope of employment income

An employee is taxable under Employment Income rules
A self employed person is taxable under Trading Income rules
Employment or self-employment?
2.1
The following principles should be taken into account in deciding if a person is employed or self employed.
The main test of an employment as opposed to self-employment is the existence of a contract of service (employee) compared
with a contract for services (self employed).
2.2
If there is no contract of service, the following suggest employment.

An obligation by the employer to offer work and an obligation by the employee to undertake the work offered. An employee
would not normally be in a position to decline work when offered.
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
The employer controls the manner and method of the work.

The employee is entitled to benefits normally provided to employees such as sick pay and holiday pay.
The employee is committed to work a specified number of hours at certain fixed times, and is paid by the hour, week or
month.
The engagement is for a long period of time.
The employee does not provide his own equipment.
The employee is obliged to work personally and exclusively for the employer, and cannot hire his own helpers.
The work performed by the employee is an integral part of the business of the employer and not merely an accessory to it.
The economic reality of self-employment is missing - namely the financial risk arising from not being paid an agreed,
regular, remuneration.
The employee cannot profit from sound management.
Assessable emoluments
3.1
Individuals are assessed on the amount of emoluments received in the tax year. The date received is taken as the earlier of the date
when the employee became entitled to the payment or the date when it was actually received by the employee.
3.2
Emoluments includes:
(a)
wages
(b) salary
(c)
bonus
(d) commission
(e)
benefits
59
60
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
Deductibility of expenses from employment income
4.1
The following expenditure is deductible:

Contributions to approved occupational pension schemes (within certain limits see chapter 10)
t
t
t
t
t
t
Fees and subscriptions to relevant professional bodies

Payments to charity made under a payroll deduction scheme
Travel expenses incurred necessarily in the performance of the duties of employment
Expenses incurred wholly, exclusively and necessarily in the performance of the duties of employment
Capital allowances are available for plant and machinery provided by an employee for use in his duties
Approved mileage allowances

(a)
(b)
(c)
For 2014/15 the approved mileage allowance is 45p per mile for the first 10,000 business miles, and then 25p per mile
thereafter.
Employees who use their own motor car for business mileage must use the approved mileage allowances in order to
calculate any taxable benefit arising from mileage allowances received from their employer.
Employees who use their motor cars for business mileage without being reimbursed by their employer (or where the
reimbursement is less than the approved mileage allowances), can use the approved mileage allowances as a basis for an
allowable deduction.
E XAMPLE 1
Kerry uses her own 1800cc motor car for business travel. During 2014/15 she drove 12,000 miles in the performance of her duties. Her
employer pays her 30p per mile.
Compute the allowable deduction that the Kerry can claim against her employment income.
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
Exempt benefits
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
Canteen available to all staff.

Qualifying removal expenses up to 8,000.
Car parking spaces at or near place of work.
Workplace nurseries (crches).
Childcare voucher up to 55 per week for basic rate taxpayers, 28 per week for higher rate and 25 per week for additional
rate taxpayers.
Contributions by an employer to an approved pension scheme.
Workplace parking for bicycles plus a tax free cycling allowance of 20p per business mile.
Provision of a mobile telephone for private use (one per employee)
Christmas parties etc for staff (up to 150 per person per year)
Sport and recreational facilities available generally for the staff.
Outplacement counselling services to employees made redundant. The services can include counselling to help adjust to
the loss of the job and to help in finding other work, ie retraining courses up to 2 years
Contributions towards additional household costs (such as light and heat) incurred by an employee who works at home up
to 4 per week or if higher evidence must be provided by the employee to justify the expense.
Long service awards up to 50 per each year of service (maximum 20 years)
Use of Employer bicycles if used by employees to and from work.
Provision of eye care tests and/or corrective glasses for employees using VDUs (if paid directly, by reimbursement to the
employee or by providing vouchers)
Incidental overnight expenses provide by the employer for overnight stays from home. Up to 5 per night (UK) and up to
10 per night (overseas)
Taxable benefits
7.1
Benefits assessable on all employees

(a)
Vouchers exchangeable for goods and services unless specifically exempt.
(b) Living accommodation
(i)
There is no taxable benefit if the accommodation is job-related
t
where it is necessary for the proper performance of the employees duties (e.g. a caretaker); or
t
for better performance of the employees duties and (for that type of employment) it is customary for
employers to provide living accommodation (e.g. hotel-worker); or
t
where there is a special threat to the employees security and he resides in the accommodation as part of
special security arrangements.
(ii)
If the accommodation is not job related then the benefit is the higher of
t
the accommodations annual value, and
t
the rent actually paid for it by the employer (if the property is rented)
t
The benefit is reduced by any rent or contribution paid by the employee
(iii) There is an additional benefit where the cost of providing the accommodation is greater than 75,000;
t
(cost of providing accommodation 75,000) the official rate of interest)
t
The cost of providing the accommodation is the purchase price of the property plus expenditure on
improvements incurred before the start of the tax year.
(iv) If the employer bought the accommodation more than six years before first providing it to the employee, the
propertys market value when first occupied by the employee is used in the calculation instead of purchase price.
E XAMPLE 2
Jones, a sales manager, occupies a flat owned by his employer. Its annual value is 4,000 and Jones pays his employer 500 p.a. for use of
the flat. The flat was purchased in 2011 for 120,000.
Calculate the total benefit assessable on Jones for 2014/15 assuming an official rate of interest of 3.25%
61
62
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
7.2
Benefits assessable on employees earning 8,500 or more and directors

(a)
Principles
The amount assessed is generally the cost of providing the benefit.
Where in-house benefits are provided (free air travel for employees of a airline company) the amount assessed is the
marginal cost incurred by the employer
(b)
(c)
(d)
Expenses connected with living accommodation

(i)
Expenses such as lighting and heating are taxable on the employee if they are paid by the employer.
(ii)
When the accommodation is job related, the taxable limit is 10% of other employment income. In addition the
payment of council tax by the employer is an exempt benefit if the accommodation is job related.
Use of assets
Amount assessed is the higher of
20% market value of the asset when first provided
rental paid by employer (if asset is rented)
Gifts of assets
(i)
If an employee is gifted a new asset, he is taxed on the cost of the asset.
(ii)
If an employee is gifted an asset that has previously been used he is taxed on the higher of:
the market value of the asset when given to him
(iii)
the market value of the asset when first made available to the employee less the benefit assessed on the
employee during the time he had the use of it.
The above rule does not apply to the gift of a motor car or van, where the benefit is simply the market value of the asset
when gifted.
E XAMPLE 3
Geralds employer purchased a dishwasher for Geralds use on 1 June 2013, costing 900. On 6 April 2014 Gerald was given the dishwasher
by his employer (its market value then being 150).
Calculate the benefit assessable on Gerald on the basis of:
(a)
if Gerald made no payment for the dishwasher
(b) if Gerald paid his employer 150 for the dishwasher
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
(e)
Motor cars
(i)
If there is no private use of the car there is no taxable benefit
(ii)
The benefit is a percentage of the cars list price
the list price includes the list price of any accessories fitted to the motor car.
(iii)
the list price is reduced by any capital contribution from the employee subject to a maximum of 5,000.
Percentage
CO2 emissions
Percentage
Petrol
75 g/km
5%
76 - 94 g/km
11%
95 g/km
12%
> 95g/km
Maximum percentage
Add an additional 1% for every complete 5g/km above 95 g/km

35%
The percentage rates are increased by 3% for diesel cars but not beyond the maximum 35%
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Reductions
The car benefit is proportionately reduced if
a motor car is unavailable for periods of at least 30 days of the tax year, and
where the employee makes a contribution to the employer for the use of the motor car.
Second motor cars
Where more than one motor car is made available to an employee, the benefit of each motor car is simply based
on its list price and CO2 emissions.
Pool cars
The use of a pool car does not result in a company car benefit A pool car is one provided for the use of any
employee to use for business purposes and is kept at the business place of work..
E XAMPLE 4
During 2014/15 Speed Merchants plc provided the following employees with company motor cars:
Lewis was provided with a new diesel powered company car on 6 August 2014. The motor car has a list price of 13,500 and an official
CO2 emission rate of 122 grams per kilometre.
Nico was provided with a new petrol powered company car throughout 2014/15. The motor car has a list price of 16,400 and an official
CO2 emission rate of 187 grams per kilometre.
Fernando was provided with a new petrol powered company car throughout 2014/15. The motor car has a list price of 22,600 and an
official CO2 emission rate of 249 grams per kilometre. Fernando paid Speed Merchants plc 1,200 during 2014/15 for the use of the motor
car.
Jenson was provided with a new petrol powered company car throughout 2014/15. The motor car had a list price of 16,000 and an
official CO2 emission rate of 90 grams per kilometre.
Sebastian was provided with a new diesel car throughout 2014/15. The motor car had a list price of 11,000 and an official CO2 emission
rate of 60 grams per kilomtre.
63
64
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
Calculate the taxable benefit for 2014/15 for Lewis, Nico, Fernando, Jenson and Sebastian.
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
(f)
Fuel provided for private use

(i)
The car benefit also covers the running costs of the car BUT does not take account of fuel provided for private use.
(ii)
The amount of fuel benefit is computed on a base figure of 21,700 multiplied by the percentage used for calculating
the car benefit.
The fuel scale charge is reduced proportionately where private use fuel is withdrawn (and not reintroduced during
the year) or the car is only given part way through the tax year.
(iii) No reduction is made if the employee contributes towards the cost of petrol for private use.
If he pays for all fuel used for private motoring the charge is cancelled.
E XAMPLE 5
Using example 4 calculate the fuel benefit for Lewis, Nico, Fernando, Jenson and Sebastian assuming also that Fernando
pays Speed Merchants plc 600 during 2014/15 towards the cost of private fuel, although the actual cost of this fuel was
1,000.
65
66
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
(g)
(h)
Vans and heavier commercial vehicles

(i)
Where an employee uses an employers van for journeys between home and work and other private use is insignificant
there is no benefit.
(ii)
Where private use is not insignificant the tax charge is 3,090 p.a.
(iii) An additional charge is made for fuel provided for unrestricted private use equal to 581p.a.
(iv) Both benefits are time apportioned if the van is unavailable to the employee for 30 days or more during any part of
the tax year.
Beneficial loans
(i)
A beneficial loan is one made to an employee below the official rate of interest (assumed to be 3.25% for 2014/15)
(ii)
The benefit is the interest on the loan at the official rate, less any interest actually paid by the employee.
(iii) There is no benefit if the loans do not exceed 10,000 in total at any time in the tax year
(iv) The benefit is calculated using the average method or the accurate method
Average method.
This uses the loan outstanding at the beginning and the end of the tax year.
If the loan is taken out or paid back during the tax year, that date is used instead of the beginning or end the tax
year.
Accurate method
This calculates benefit day by day on the balance actually outstanding.
Either the taxpayer or HMRC can decide to use the accurate method.
E XAMPLE 6
Jack was given a loan of 35,000 by his employer on 31 March 2014. Interest is payable on the loan at 1% p.a. On 1 June 2014 Jack repaid
5,000 and on 1 December 2014 a further 15,000. The remaining 15,000 was still outstanding on 5 April 2015. Jack earns 30,000 p.a.
Calculate the taxable benefit for 2014/15 under
(a)
the average method and
(b) the accurate method
You should assume that the official rate of interest is 3.25% p.a.
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
PAYE system
8.1
Pay As You Earn

The purpose of the PAYE system is to deduct the correct amount of income tax and National Insurance Contributions over the year.
8.2
Employers duties
The employer has a duty to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
8.3
Application of PAYE
The following count as pay:
(a)
(b)
8.4
deduct income tax from the pay of his employees

calculate the amount of NIC that should be deducted
keep a record of each employees pay and deduction
Employers must send income tax and NIC information to HMRC electronically every time employees are paid (weekly or
monthly) and make their monthly PAYE payments electronically on the 22nd of the month under the Real Time Information
reporting system.
For the tax year 2014/15 there are no penalties if submissions made during the tax year are made late.
send appropriate returns in addition to the to the employee when required.
salaries, wages, overtime, bonuses

pensions
PAYE codes
(a)
An employees PAYE code indicates the amount of tax free pay he is entitled to.
(b) The PAYE code will include the employees personal allowance and any allowable deductions and be restricted by various
taxable amounts.
It is calculated as follows:
Allowances:
Personal allowances
Personal pension contributions - higher rate relief
Expense deductions
Less Deductions,
Benefits
Untaxed income
Tax under payments b/f (grossed up) 10020 10040 10045 for basichigher
additional rate taxpayers
Allowance to set against pay

(c)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(X)
X
To obtain the code number the last figure is removed and replaced with a letter
L
- code for PA
K
- increases taxable pay instead of reducing it (benefits exceed allowances) with no tax free allowances
BR
- tax will be deducted at the basic rate
NT
- no tax is to be deducted
E XAMPLE 7
Annabel earns 20,000 pa and is single, She has annual benefits of 440 and her unpaid employment income tax for 2013/14 was 132.
Annabel pays income tax at the marginal rate of 20%
Calculate Annabels tax code for 2014/15.
67
68
Paper F6
EMPLOYMENT INCOME
Chapter 9
8.5
Changes to coding
An employer must use the last code notified to him for existing employees until new written instructions are sent from HMRC.
8.6
Year end returns

The employer must send to HMRC the following:
By 6 July:
P11D
Benefits for directors and employees earning in excess of 8,500 for the year
P9D
Benefits of other employees.
The employer must give to the employee

By 31 May:
P60
Permanent record of pay and tax deducted as well as NICs made in the tax year.
P11D
Benefits for directors and employees earning in excess of 8,500 for the year
P9D
Benefits of other employees.
By 6 July:
8.7
Employees leaving or joining

(a)
Employees leaving
The employer should complete form P45 and send part 1 to Tax Office and give parts 2, 3 and 4 to the employee.
(b)
Employees joining
(i)
When an employee joins and has a P45 the employer can operate PAYE
(ii)
The employer uses the tax code on the P45 if it relates to the current year; otherwise he uses the emergency code.
(iii) If the employee does not have a P45, the new employee must complete form P46.
Paper F6
Chapter 10
PENSION SCHEMES
Types of Pension Scheme

Employees may join an occupational scheme set up by their employers and/or a personal pension scheme arranged by the
individual directly with a pension provider. Self employed individuals may simply join a personal pension scheme. To encourage
individuals to join a pension scheme generous tax reliefs have been provided by HMRC.
Occupational schemes will always have contributions made into them by employers and may also have contributions made by the
employee. There are no limits on the amount of contribution that may be made by the employer but they will count towards the
employees annual allowance and the value of the fund for the lifetime allowance (see later notes). These contributions will be tax
deductible for the employer attracting tax relief in the accounting period in which they are paid.
Contributions made by the employer are exempt benefits for the employee and are not subject to any NIC payments (see chapter
11).
Contributions made each tax year by an individual into a pension scheme that will attract tax relief are limited to the higher of:
t
t
the relevant earnings of the taxpayer, being mainly employment income and/or trading profits plus any profits from
furnished holiday lettings, and
3,600 of gross contribution
This amount will also contribute towards the annual allowance permitted each year.
When an employee makes a contribution into an occupational scheme tax relief is given at source under the net pay arrangement.
The employer will deduct the gross contribution from the individuals employment income before computing the tax to be
deducted under PAYE.
Illustration 1
If an employee has a gross annual salary of 25,000 and wants to contribute 1,000 into his occupational pension scheme, the
employer over the tax year will pay 1,000 into the pension scheme and put a salary of 24,000 through PAYE.
This would be presented on the Income Tax Computation as a salary of 25,000 less a pension contribution of 1,000.
When an individual contributes into a personal pension scheme no such deductions are made from income on the computation,
instead tax relief is given as follows:
t
t
basic rate tax relief is given at source this means that if the taxpayer pays 800 into his pension fund, this is deemed to
be net of basic rate tax at 20%. HMRC will then pay the pension provider an amount equivalent to the basic rate deduction
(20/80 x 800 = 200). Thus the individuals pension fund is increased by 1,000 in total.
Higher rate and additional rate taxpayers achieve higher and additional rate relief by extending the basic and higher rate
bands by the gross amount of the personal pension contribution. Hence in this example the higher rate and additional
rate tax bands will increase by 1,000 so that higher and additional rate tax will only arise above taxable income figures of
32,865 and 151,000 respectively.
69
70
PENSION SCHEMES
Paper F6
Chapter 10
Annual Allowance (AA)

The AA determining the total pension input allowed for tax relief each year is now limited to 40,000 in the tax year 2014/15 having
been set at 50,000 for the tax years 2011/12 to 2013/14 (this information will be provided in the tax rates and allowances section
of the exam paper).
If the AA for a year is not fully utilised and the taxpayer was a member of a pension scheme in that year it is possible to carry forward
any unused amount for 3 years.
Although tax relief is given on pension contributions up to the level of relevant earnings of the taxpayer for a tax year, if the tax
relieved contributions exceed the AA (including any unused allowances brought forward) there will be an AA charge chargeable
to income tax at the taxpayers marginal rate (see note 3 below)
E XAMPLE 1
Aston made the following gross amount of contributions into his pension scheme:
2011/12
2012/13
2013/14
62,000
30,000
25,000
Aston has an annual salary of 120,000.

Compute the total pension input allowed for Aston for the 2014/15 tax year.
Paper F6
PENSION SCHEMES
Chapter 10
Annual Allowance Charge

If the total pension input for the year exceeds the maximum gross contribution, the excess is subject to an AA Charge by treating
it as additional non-savings income of the year.
Illustration 2
Villa has a trading profit assessment for the 2014/15 tax year of 250,000 and made his first contribution into a personal pension
scheme during this year of 70,000 (gross).
Compute the annual allowance charge that will arise in 2014/15 and prepare an Income tax computation for Villa showing his Income
Tax liability for the tax year
Villa has relevant earnings of 250,000 so the gross contribution of 70,000 will all attract tax relief. However as Villa was not previously
a member of a pension scheme he will have no unused AA brought forward and therefore an AA charge of 30,000 will arise (70,000
40,000).
As Villa has contributed to a personal pension scheme not an occupational scheme his basic and higher rate band limits will be
increased by the gross contribution of 70,000, to 101,865 and 220,000 respectively. As personal pension scheme contributions are
made net of basic rate tax relief, Villa will actually have made a payment of 56,000 (70,000 x 80%) into the pension scheme.
Villas Income Tax computation for 2014/15 will therefore be as follows:
Trading Profit
AA Charge
Net Income
Less: PA (note 1)
250,000
30,000
280,000
(NIL)
Taxable Income
280,000
Basic rate
Higher rate
Additional rate
Income Tax Liability
Note 1
101,865 @ 20%
118,135 @ 40%
60,000 @45%
=
=
=
20,373
47,254
27,000
94,627
Villas Adjusted Net Income for purposes of computing his personal allowance is 210,000 (280,000 70,000). As this
exceeds 120,000, his personal allowance will be reduced to zero.
Lifetime Allowance
In addition to the AA limiting the tax relief available on yearly contributions a Lifetime Allowance of 1.25M applies to the value of
the pension fund built up at the date the taxpayer takes their pension. If the fund value exceeds this limit an Income Tax charge will
arise on the excess dependent upon how the excess is used. This may be in the form of either a higher annuity or lump sum. These
calculations however are not within the syllabus!
71
72
PENSION SCHEMES
Paper F6
Chapter 10
Paper F6
Chapter 11
NATIONAL INSURANCE CONTRIBUTIONS (NIC)
Employed earners
1.1
Class 1 contributions
(a)
Class 1 NIC is paid by employees and employers
(b) Employees
The contributions begin when the employee is aged 16 or over. For 2014/15 the rate of employee Class 1 NIC is at 12%. It
is paid where cash earnings exceed a threshold of 7,956 per annum, but only up to an upper limit of 41,865 per annum,
however for earnings above 41,865 per annum there is a rate of 2% payable with no limit. The contributions cease when
the employee reaches pensionable age.
(c)
1.2
Employers
The rate of employer Class 1 NIC is 13.8%. It is paid on cash earnings that exceed a threshold of 7,956 per annum. These
are payable from the employees 16th birthday - but there is no upper age limit.
Class 1A Contributions
The rate of Class 1A NIC is payable only by employers on taxable benefits provided to employees. The rate is 13.8% multiplied by
the assessable value of the benefits.
E XAMPLE 1
An employee of Riga Ltd is paid 50,000 per annum, and was provided with the following taxable benefits during 2014/15:
Company motor car

6,400
Fuel
4,320
Living accommodation
1,800
Calculate the Class 1 and Class 1A NIC liability in respect of this employee.
Employment Allowance
From 2014/15 HMRC have introduced an annual employment allowance of 2,000 per EMPLOYER to reduce the Employers Class 1
NIC payable. For example if the employers Class 1 NIC for the tax year is 5,000 the amount payable will be reduced by the 2,000
employment allowance to 3,000. If the total employers Class 1 NIC was say 1,500 then this would be reduced to nil.
The employment allowance does not reduce the amount of employer Class 1A NIC payable nor will it serve to reduce the amount
of Class 1 employees NIC.
73
74
NATIONAL INSURANCE CONTRIBUTIONS (NIC)
Paper F6
Chapter 11
Self-employed earners
3.1
Class 2 contribution
(a)
Self-employed earners pay a flat rate contribution of 2.75 per week from their 16th birthday until they reach pensionable
age.
3.2
Class 4 contribution
(a)
The self employed also pay Class 4 contributions which are based on the assessable trading profits of the tax year.
(b) The rate of Class 4 is 9% and is payable on trading income between 7,956 and 41,865.
(c)
For trading income in excess of 41,865, a rate of 2% is payable
(d) Contributions begin if the employee is 16 at the start of the relevant tax year but contributions cease, when the tax payer
reaches pensionable age at the start of the relevant tax year
E XAMPLE 2
Jerome, a trader, has trading profit of 50,000 for 2014/15.
Calculate his Class 4 NIC and Class 2 NIC for 2014/15
Paper F6
Chapter 12
CAPITAL GAINS TAX INDIVIDUALS
Individuals and Companies

Individuals pay Capital Gains Tax (CGT) on their chargeable gains of the tax year, whereas the chargeable gains of a company are
included on the companys Corporation Tax Computation along with its other taxable income and the companys overall taxable
total profits are then subjected to Corporation Tax, as you will see later in these course notes.
A chargeable gain or allowable loss arises on a chargeable disposal of a chargeable asset by a chargeable person.
The basic calculation of the chargeable gain is a simple one, deducting the allowable costs of an asset from its net proceeds upon
its sale. A company NOT an individual may then further reduce any gain for the effects of inflation by the deduction of Indexation
Allowance.
Qualifying gains may then be eligible for certain reliefs that will allow such gains or parts thereof to be either exempted from tax
or and more commonly, deferred from immediate chargeability to tax.
1.1
Chargeable Disposal
A chargeable disposal will usually occur by the sale of an asset but will also arise when an asset is gifted, lost or destroyed. There is
no chargeable disposal upon the death of the taxpayer, however, and assets will pass free of CGT to the beneficiaries at their market
(probate) value. Sadly, although no CGT arises upon death, a chargeability to Inheritance Tax (IHT) may arise (see chapter 23).
1.2
Chargeable Assets
All assets are chargeable unless specifically exempted.
Exempt assets include:
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
1.3
Motor vehicles suitable for private use

National Savings & Investment certificates
Foreign currency for private use
Decorations awarded for bravery
Damages for personal injury
Life insurance policies
Works of art given for national use
Gilt edged securities (Government Securities such as Exchequer Stock)
Qualifying Corporate Bonds (Corporate loan stock)
Certain Chattels (tangible moveable property)
Investments held in an ISA
Chargeable Person
An individual who is resident in the UK is a Chargeable Person and is therefore liable on their worldwide assets.
75
76
Paper F6

1.4
Chapter 12
CGT computation
(a)
Capital gains and losses are aggregated for each tax year.
(b) Basic capital gains computation
Capital Gains in tax year
Less: Capital losses in tax year
Net Capital Gains in tax year
Less: Capital losses brought forward
Net Capital Gains
Less Annual exemption
Taxable Gains
CGT 10%, 18% or 28%
Due (for 2014/15)
X
(X)
X
(X)
X
(11,000)
X
X
31/1/16
A chargeable gain or allowable loss of an individual is computed as follows:

Disposal proceeds
Less: Incidental cost of disposal
Net proceeds
Less: Costs
Capital Gain / (Capital loss)
X
(X)
X
(X)
X / (X)
Individuals do not get indexation allowance on disposals as companies do, but they do benefit from an Annual Exemption
which is not available to companies.
1.5
Annual exemption
(a)
Every individual has an exempt amount for each tax year. For 2014/15 it is 11,000
(b) If the annual exemption is not used it is wasted.
1.6
Payment of CGT
CGT is due in one amount on 31 January following the tax year (2014/15 by 31 January 2016)
No payments on account of the CGT liability are required.
1.7
Rates of CGT
(a)
The capital gains tax rates are determined by either the taxable level of a persons income or the availability of entrepreneurs
relief. If entrepreneurs relief is available, then on those gains qualifying a CGT rate of 10% is applied.
(b) The taxpayers Taxable Income from his Income tax Computation is then used as the basis for applying the relevant CGT
rates to his figure of Taxable Gains. After considering a persons taxable income from their Income Tax Computation a CGT
rate of 18% is applied on those taxable gains that fall into any remaining basic rate band (or extended basic rate band if the
person makes gift aid donations or pays personal pension contributions).
(c)
After considering a persons taxable income, a CGT rate of 28% is then applied on those gains in excess of the basic rate
band (or extended).
For example if the taxpayer had taxable gains of 15,000 (none qualifying for entrepreneurs relief ) and taxable income of
21,865, then the first 10,000 of his taxable gains would use up his remaining basic rate band (31,865 - 21,865) and be
taxed at 18% leaving 5,000 of his taxable gains to be taxed at 28%
E XAMPLE 1
Tina sold a painting on 1 July 2014 for 500,000. She purchased the painting in February 1997 for 350,000.
She also disposed of an investment property for 310,000 on 1 December 2014 and incurred agency fees of 15,000 on the disposal. She
had purchased the property in August 1998 for 200,000.
In addition she sold an antique vase for 10,000 in January 2015 which had cost her 15,000 in September 2012.
Tina had capital losses brought forward from previous tax years of 12,000. Tinas taxable income for 2014/15 is 50,000.
Calculate Tinas Capital Gains Tax for 2014/15
Paper F6
Chapter 12
E XAMPLE 2
Matthew has trading profit of 20,000 assessed in 2014/15 and sold an antique vase giving rise to a capital gain of 18,000.
Calculate Matthews capital gains tax for 2014/15
E XAMPLE 3
Katie has trading profit of 40,000 assessed in 2014/15. In addition she sold an investment property giving rise to a capital gain of 30,000.
Calculate Katies capital gains tax for 2014/15
77
78
Paper F6
Chapter 12
E XAMPLE 4
Elliot has trading profit of 44,000 assessed in 2014/15. In addition he sold a painting giving rise to a capital gain of 26,000.
He made a gift aid payment of 2,400 in 2014/15.
Calculate Elliots capital gains tax for 2014/15
1.8
Disposal proceeds
Actual consideration is used when the bargain is made at arms length.
Market value is used in other cases for example when the disposal is a gift
When quoted shares are gifted the value may not be given in the exam and needs to be calculated using the lower of
(a)
(b)
the quarter up rule, [lowest price + (highest price lowest price)] or

mid bargain price [Average of highest and lowest marked bargains]
E XAMPLE 5
Jenny gifted 1,000 shares in M plc when they were quoted at 400 - 408p and the marked bargain prices were 399, 400, 403, 407, 408
Calculate the value to be used for capital gains disposal proceeds

1.9
Paper F6
Chapter 12
Incidental costs would include:

(a)
legal fees
(b) advertising fees
(c)
auctioneers fees
(d) agency fees
1.10 Costs
Costs include:
(a)
the cost of acquisition and any incidental costs of acquisition
(b) expenditure on enhancing the value of the asset (improvement expenditure)
The exception is when an individual acquires an asset where the previous owner had to use the assets market value for his disposal
proceeds, then the current owner must use the same market value as his cost of acquisition.
Losses
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Where capital losses arise they are set against capital gains in the same tax year.
The set off is made to the maximum possible extent it cannot be restricted to avoid wasting the annual exemption
If there are insufficient gains to set off the capital losses in the year they arise, the unrelieved capital losses may be carried
forward.
Current year capital losses are deducted in priority to capital losses brought forward. The capital losses brought forward,
however only reduce capital gains to the level of the annual exemption, and therefore do not waste the annual exemption
Any unrelieved capital losses brought forward are carried forward to the next tax year.
E XAMPLE 6
Fiona and Jane made capital gains and capital losses for the years 2013/14 and 2014/15 as set out below:
Fiona
Jane
2013/14
Capital gains
15,000
7,000
Capital losses
10,000
10,000
2014/15
Capital gains
17,000
13,700
Capital losses
5,200
2,000
Calculate the taxable gains for Fiona and Jane for both 2013/14 and 2014/15 and the amount of any losses carried forward
at the end of 2014/15
79
80
Paper F6
Chapter 12
Transfer of assets between a husband and wife or between civil partners

The transfer of assets between spouses and civil partners is for CGT purposes deemed to take place at a value that would give rise to
neither a gain nor a loss. The transfer is said to be a nil gain/ nil loss or no gain / no loss transfer. Essentially the transferor is deemed
to make the disposal at cost and the transferee acquires the asset at the original cost of the transferor.
The Nil gain / Nil loss transfer rules may be used by these taxpayers to utilize both parties annual exemptions, and to take advantage
of capital losses and lower capital gains tax rates. For example it would be better for each spouse to yield gains of 10,000 each
rather than one spouse make gains of 20,000. It would also be better for a basic rate taxpayer to yield taxable gains, taxed at 18%
instead of a higher rate taxpayer who would be taxed at 28% on the same gains.
E XAMPLE 7
Mike bought a ring in July 1993 for 12,000. He transferred it to his wife Barbara in December 2014. Barbara sold the ring in January 2015
for 20,000.
Calculate Barbaras capital gain in 2014/15
Paper F6
Chapter 12
Part Disposals
(a)
(b)
A chargeable asset may be only partly disposed of, for example a taxpayer acquires 100 hectares of land and subsequently
goes on to sell 40 of those hectares. This will give rise to a chargeable gain computed in the normal way, but a specific
problem arises however regarding what figure of cost should be used in the gains calculation. It may seem appropriate to
use 40/100 of the original cost, given the quantity of land purchased and then sold. This, however is not the basis used and
a value based apportionement of the total cost should instead be used
The cost of the whole asset is apportioned using the formula:
A
A+B
where:
A Gross proceeds of part disposed
B Market value of the remainder of the asset (this will be given in the question)
E XAMPLE 8
ST owned 10 hectares of land which originally cost 26,000 in March 2012. ST sold 2 hectares of the land in December 2014 for 16,000.
The remaining 8 hectares were valued at 34,000 in December 2014.
Calculate the chargeable gain on the disposal of the 2 hectares of land in December 2014
81
82
Paper F6
Chapter 12
Chattels
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
A chattel is a tangible moveable asset

A wasting chattel is one with an estimated remaining life of 50 years or less. These are exempt from chargeable gains &
losses. Examples include racehorses, greyhounds (dogs) and yachts (boats).
There is an exception for plant & machinery on which capital allowances have been claimed, these assets are treated as non
wasting chattels. If plant and machinery is not covered by the non wasting chattel exemption in note (d) below, then a gain
would need to be computed upon its disposal. Such a calculation is seldom required however as it would normally be sold
for less than cost. A capital loss will not however arise in this situation as capital allowances will already have given tax relief
for the net cost of ownership of the asset.
A non wasting chattel is one with an estimated remaining life of more than 50 years. Examples include antiques and
paintings. There are special rules to determine the chargeable gain or capital loss.
Cost
Proceeds
Treatment
6,000
6,000
Exempt
6,000
> 6,000
Normal calculation but the gain is restricted to a

maximum 5/3 x [Gross proceeds 6,000]
> 6,000
<6,000
Deemed Gross Proceeds = 6,000
> 6,000
> 6,000
Normal calculation
E XAMPLE 9
JM sold the following assets in December 2014
(a)
an antique table which had cost 3,000 in February 2009 and sold for 5,000
(b) a painting which had cost 2,000 in January 2012 and sold for 10,000
(c)
an antique vase which had cost 8,000 in August 2002 and sold for 3,000
(d) a vintage car which had cost 7,000 in July 1999 and sold for 9,000
Calculate the net chargeable gains or losses arising for JM in December 2014
Paper F6
Chapter 12
Other wasting assets (that are not chattels)

An example of a wasting asset which are not chattels are copyrights.
The allowable expenditure is deemed to waste away over the life of the asset.
When a disposal is made, the allowable expenditure is restricted to take account of the assets natural fall in value. This fall in value
is deemed to occur on a straight line basis over its predictable useful life.
The original cost is therefore reduced BY
P
L
( C S)
where
P = Period of ownership of seller
L = Predictable Life of asset on acquisition
C = Cost of the asset
S = Scrap / residual value at the end of the assets predictable life
E XAMPLE 10
On 1 December 2002 Z bought a copyright at a cost of 25,000. It had an estimated useful life of 30 years, and an estimated residual value
of 1,000.
Z sold the asset for 38,000 on 1 December 2014.
Calculate the chargeable gain arising on the sale of the copyright in December 2014.
83
84
Paper F6
Chapter 12
Paper F6
Chapter 13
CAPITAL GAINS TAX INDIVIDUALS SHARES
Shares and securities
1.1
Gift edged securities and Qualifying Corporate Bonds

Disposal of these investments by an individual are exempt.
1.2
Disposal of shares
Where shares are disposed of a problem arises in computing the allowable cost as shares may have been acquired over several
acquisitions at different costs at different dates. Therefore HMRC have deemed that when shares are disposed of, they are matched
against acquisitions in the following order:
t
t
t
Shares acquired on the same day (as the sale)

Shares acquired within the 30 days following the sale
Shares from the share pool
Note: The matching rules for individuals are different from those that apply to companies
1.3
The share pool

This keeps a record of the following details of all shares acquired
(a)
(b)
(c)
number of shares
actual cost
the number of shares will include all acquisitions including bonus issue and rights issues. Bonus issues are where a company
issues free shares on a proportionate basis to its existing shareholders. Rights Issues are where a company seeks to raise
new share capital and offers its existing shareholders the right to acquire on a proportionate basis additional shares in the
company at an advantageous share price.
(d) the shares disposed of from the share pool will be disposed of at their average costs.
The share pool is easier to produce for individuals rather than companies as no indexation allowance applies the only information
recorded is number of shares and cost of shares
E XAMPLE 1
Jane owns shares in ABC Ltd. She acquired 1,500 shares in the company on 31 May 2012 for 20,000, and 500 shares on 30 June 2013 for
10,000. On 7 March 2015 Jane bought a further 200 shares in ABC Ltd for 4,000.
Jane sold 1,000 shares in ABC Ltd on 28 February 2015 for 25,000. She is not an employee of ABC Ltd.
Calculate Janes capital gain on the disposal of the shares in February 2015.
85
86
Bonus issues
(a)
Bonus shares increase the number of shares held with no corresponding increase in cost
E XAMPLE 2
Graham had the following transactions in Alderholt Ltd shares:
February 2013
June 2013
July 2013
October 2014
Purchased 7,000 shares for 15,000

Bonus issue of one for five
Sold 5,000 shares for 20,000
Calculate the capital gain arising on the disposal in October 2014.
Paper F6
Chapter 13
Paper F6
Chapter 13
Rights issue
The share pool is increased by the number and cost of the shares acquired via the rights issue.
E XAMPLE 3
Mark in an employee of Romsey Ltd. He had the following transactions in the company shares:
February 2013
June 2013
July 2013
September 2014

Purchased 900 shares for 2,700
Took up 1 for 3 rights issue for 3.00 per share
Calculate the capital gain on the disposal in September 2014.
Takeovers
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Where a takeover is a share for share exchange, known as a paper for paper transaction, shareholders of the company taken
over acquire shares in the acquiring company. This normally does not constitute a disposal for CGT purposes.
The new shares are deemed to have been acquired at the same time and at the same cost as the original shares.
If more than one type of share, for example ordinary and preference shares, are acquired in the takeover company then the
cost of the original holding is attributed to the different components of the new holding on a basis of the market values of
the new holding. Thus if a shareholder acquired on takeover 300,000 of ordinary shares and 100,000 of preference shares
in the takeover company they would acquire respectively 3/4 and 1/4 of the original shareholdings cost. These costs may
then be used to compute any subsequent gain arising on the sale of either those ordinary or preference shares. See example
4 below.
This treatment is automatic, however the shareholders can elect for the event to be treated as a disposal for CGT purposes
such that the entrepreneurs relief tax rate of 10% (see later note) may be available on the gain.
If at takeover, some cash is also received, a capital gain needs to be calculated at takeover for the cash element received.
(see example 5 below)
87
88
Paper F6
Chapter 13
E XAMPLE 4
In May 2011 Mark purchased 4,000 ordinary shares in Silver Ltd for 12,000. In June 2014 Silver Ltd was taken over by Gold Ltd and Mark
received 2 ordinary shares and 1 preference share in Gold Ltd for each ordinary share in Silver Ltd.
Immediately after the takeover the ordinary shares in Gold Ltd were valued at 5 and the preference shares in Gold Ltd were valued at 2.
In January 2015 Mark sold all his holding ordinary shares in Gold Ltd for 35,000.
Mark was not an employee of Silver Ltd or Gold Ltd.
Calculate the capital gain arising on the disposal in January 2015.
E XAMPLE 5
Using example 4 what difference would it make if Mark received at takeover
2 Gold Ltd ordinary shares valued at 5.00 each and 2 cash for each share in Silver Ltd
Calculate the capital gain arising in June 2014
Paper F6
Chapter 14
CAPITAL GAINS TAX INDIVIDUALS RELIEFS
Entrepreneurs relief
1.1
t
t
1.2
1.3
Introduction
5IJTSFMJFGJTBWBJMBCMFGPSJOEJWJEVBMTEJTQPTJOHPGBCVTJOFTTPSQBSUPGBCVTJOFTT
5IFSFMJFGDPWFSTUIFSTUbNPGRVBMJGZJOHHBJOTUIBUBOJOEJWJEVBMNBLFTEVSJOHtheir lifetime. 5IJTHBJORVBMJGZJOHJT
UBYFEBUBMPXFSDBQJUBMHBJOTUBYSBUFPGSFHBSEMFTTPGBQFSTPOTUBYBCMFJODPNF
Conditions
(a)
5IFBTTFUTNVTUIBWFCFFOPXOFEGPSPOFZFBSQSJPSUPUIFEBUFPGEJTQPTBM
(b) 5IFSFMJFGJTBWBJMBCMFPO

"EJTQPTBMPGUIFXIPMFPSQBSUPGBCVTJOFTTSVOBTBOVOJODPSQPSBUFECVTJOFTT TPMFUSBEFSPSQBSUOFSTIJQ
5IFSFMJFG
JTOPUUIFSFGPSFBWBJMBCMFJGBUSBEFSTJNQMZEJTQPTFTPGBOBTTFUUIBUJTVTFEJOUIFUSBEF5IFBTTFUTNVTUCFVTFEGPS
UIFQVSQPTFPGUIFCVTJOFTT TPUIFSFMJFGJTOPUBWBJMBCMFPOJOWFTUNFOUT
*OEJWJEVBMCVTJOFTTBTTFUTPGUIFJOEJWJEVBMTPSQBSUOFSTIJQTUSBEJOHCVTJOFTTUIBUIBTOPXDFBTFE/PUFUIFEJTQPTBM
PGBTTFUTNVTUUBLFQMBDFXJUIJOUISFFZFBSTPGUIFDFTTBUJPOPGUSBEF
5IFEJTQPTBMPGTIBSFTJOBUSBEJOHDPNQBOZXIFSFUIFJOEJWJEVBMIBTBUMFBTUBTIBSFIPMEJOHJOUIFDPNQBOZ
"/%JTBMTPBOFNQMPZFF QBSUUJNFPSGVMMUJNF
PGUIFDPNQBOZGPSUIFNPOUITQSJPSUPEJTQPTBM5IFSFJTOP
SFTUSJDUJPOPGUIFSFMJFGJGUIFDPNQBOZPXOTJOWFTUNFOUT5IFDPNQBOZJTFJUIFSBUSBEJOHDPNQBOZPSJUJTOPU UIFSF
JTOPBQQPSUJPONFOUPGUIFHBJOFMJHJCMFGPSSFMJFG
Time limit for claim

5IFSFMJFGNVTUCFDMBJNFEXJUIJONPOUITPGUIF+BOVBSZGPMMPXJOHUIFFOEPGUIFUBYZFBSJOXIJDIUIFEJTQPTBMJTNBEFGPS
CZ+BOVBSZ
E XAMPLE 1
%BJTZEJTQPTFEPGUIFGPMMPXJOHBTTFUTJO
0O4FQUFNCFS%BJTZTPMEBCVTJOFTTUIBUTIFSBOBTBTPMFUSBEFSTJODF'FCSVBSZ5IFTBMFSFTVMUFEJOUIFGPMMPXJOHDBQJUBM
HBJOTBOEDBQJUBMMPTTFT
(PPEXJMM
'BDUPSZ
8BSFIPVTF

*O%FDFNCFS%BJTZBMTPTPMEBTIBSFIPMEJOHJO#FE-UE BOVORVPUFEDPNQBOZ%BJTZIBECFFOBOFNQMPZFFPG#FE-UEGSPN
UIFEBUFTIFBDRVJSFEUIFTIBSFTJO+VMZ5IFHBJOBSJTJOHXBTb
Calculate Daisys Capital Gains Tax in 2014/15
89
90
1.4
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
Further points
5IFHBJOTRVBMJGZJOHGPSFOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFGNVTUCFUBLFOJOUPBDDPVOUXIFOFTUBCMJTIJOHXIJDIUBYSBUFBQQMJFTUPPUIFS
DBQJUBMHBJOTJOUIFUBYZFBS JOUIBUUIFZBSFEFFNFEUPSTUMZVTFBOZBNPVOUPGVOVTFECBTJDSBUFCBOE
t
t
t
5IF BOOVBM FYFNQUJPO BOE BOZ DBQJUBM MPTTFT TIPVME IPXFWFS CF EFEVDUFE STUMZ GSPN HBJOT UIBU EP OPU RVBMJGZ GPS
FOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFGBTUIFZBSFUBYFEBUBIJHIFSDBQJUBMUBYHBJOTSBUF BOEPS
5IFFBTJFTUBQQSPBDIJOEFBMJOHXJUIRVFTUJPOTUIBUJODMVEFHBJOTRVBMJGZJOHGPSFOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFGBOEHBJOTUIBUEPOPU
RVBMJGZJTUPLFFQUIFHBJOTTFQBSBUF
E XAMPLE 2
"OOFTPMEIFSTIBSFIPMEJOHJO"OOJFMJNJUFEGPSb JO5IFTIBSFTIBEDPTUIFSb JO+VMZ4IFPXOFE
PGUIFTIBSFTJO"OOJF-JNJUFEBOEIBECFFOBGVMMUJNFEJSFDUPSTJODFUIFEBUFPGBDRVJTJUJPO4IFIBTOPUNBEFBOZEJTQPTBMTRVBMJGZJOH
GPSFOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFGJOUIFQBTU
*OBEEJUJPOTIFTPMEBOBOUJRVFQBJOUJOHSFBMJTJOHBDBQJUBMHBJOPGb
"OOFIBEDBQJUBMMPTTFTCSPVHIUGPSXBSEPGb GSPNBOEIFSUBYBCMFJODPNFGPSXBTb
Calculate Annes capital gains tax for 2014/15 and state the due date for payment.
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
Replacement of business assets (Rollover Relief)
2.1
Definition
"HBJONBZCFASPMMFEPWFS EFGFSSFE
XIFSFJUBSJTFTPOUIFEJTQPTBMPGBCVTJOFTTBTTFUXIPTFTBMFQSPDFFETBSFSFJOWFTUFEJO
BOPUIFSRVBMJGZJOHCVTJOFTTBTTFU
2.2
Qualifying assets
#PUIUIFPMEBOEOFXBTTFUTNVTUGBMMJOUPPOFPGUIFGPMMPXJOHDBUFHPSJFT
(a)
-BOEBOECVJMEJOHT
(b) 'JYFEQMBOUBOENBDIJOFSZ
#PUIUIFPMEBOEOFXBTTFUTNVTUCFVTFEJOUIFCVTJOFTT
2.3
The relief
(a)
5IFHBJOJTOPUUBYFEJNNFEJBUFMZCVUJTQPTUQPOFEVOUJMUIFUSBEFSNBLFTBEJTQPTBMPGUIFSFQMBDFNFOUBTTFUXJUIPVU
GVSUIFSSFQMBDFNFOU
(b) 5IFQPTUQPOFNFOUJTBDIJFWFECZEFEVDUJOHUIFHBJONBEFPOUIFPMEBTTFUGSPNUIFDPTUPGUIFOFXPOF
(c)
8IFSFUIFEJTQPTBMQSPDFFETPGUIFPMEBTTFUBSFOPUGVMMZSFJOWFTUFE UIFTVSQMVTSFUBJOFESFEVDFTUIFBNPVOUPGDBQJUBM
HBJOUIBUDBOCFSPMMFEPWFS
(d) 5IFSFQMBDFNFOUBTTFUNVTUCFCPVHIUJOUIFQFSJPENPOUITCFGPSFUPNPOUITBGUFSUIFEJTQPTBMPGUIFPMEBTTFU
(e)
3PMMPWFSSFMJFGJTBWBJMBCMFPOUIFTBMFPGBOJOEJWJEVBMBTTFUTPFOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFGXPVMEOPUOPSNBMMZCFBWBJMBCMF
)PXFWFS JGUIFXIPMFCVTJOFTTJTTPMEBOESPMMPWFSSFMJFGJTDMBJNFEPOQBSUPGUIFHBJOTBOZSFNBJOJOHHBJOTDPVMECF
FMJHJCMFGPSFOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFG
(f)
"DMBJNNVTUCFNBEFXJUIJOZFBSTGSPNUIFFOEPGUIFUBYZFBSJOXIJDIUIFEJTQPTBMPDDVSSFE'PSEJTQPTBMTJO
CZ"QSJM
E XAMPLE 3
+POFTQVSDIBTFEBQSPQFSUZGPSVTFJOIJTCVTJOFTTJO.BSDIGPSb *O"VHVTUIFTPMEUIFQSPQFSUZGPSb BOETQFOU
b JO+VMZPOBOFXCVTJOFTTQSPQFSUZ
Calculate the gain to be deferred and the base cost of new asset.
91
92
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
E XAMPLE 4
+FSPNFCPVHIUBGBDUPSZJO+VOFGPSb *O"VHVTUXJTIJOHUPNPWFUPBNPSFDPOWFOJFOUMPDBUJPO IFTPMEUIFGBDUPSZ
GPSb )FNPWFEJOUPBSFOUFEGBDUPSZVOUJM+BOVBSZXIFOIFQVSDIBTFEBOENPWFEUPBOFXGBDUPSZ
Calculate the base cost of the new factory if it was purchased for
(a)
750,000
(b)
600,000
2.4
Non-business use
(a)
'VMMSPMMPWFSSFMJFGJTPOMZBWBJMBCMFXIFSFUIFBTTFUCFJOHSFQMBDFE UIFPMEBTTFU
XBTVTFEFOUJSFMZGPSCVTJOFTTQVSQPTFT
UISPVHIPVUUIFUSBEFSTQFSJPEPGPXOFSTIJQ
(b) 8IFSFUIJTDPOEJUJPOJTOPUNFUSPMMPWFSSFMJFGJTMJNJUFEJOQSPQPSUJPOUPUIFCVTJOFTTVTF
(c)
5IFBTTFUJTUSFBUFEBTUXPTFQBSBUFBTTFUT POFUIBURVBMJFTGPSSFMJFG UIFQBSUXIPMMZVTFEJOUIFUSBEF
BOEBOPUIFSUIBU
EPFTOPU
E XAMPLE 5
+BLFQVSDIBTFEGBDUPSZJO.BZGPSb )FMFUPVUPGUIFGBDUPSZ*O+VMZIFTPMEUIFGBDUPSZGPSb BOECPVHIU
BOPUIFSGBDUPSZJO"VHVTUGPSb DMBJNJOHSPMMPWFSSFMJFG
(a)
what is the chargeable gain arising on the disposal in July 2014?
(b)
what is the base cost of a new factory?
2.5
Reinvestment in depreciating asset
2.6
Definition
(a)
"OBTTFUXJUIBOFYQFDUFEMJGFPGBNBYJNVNZFBSTPS
(b) 'JYFEQMBOUBOENBDIJOFSZ
Note::PVXJMMPOMZCFFYBNJOFEPOYFEQMBOUBOENBDIJOFSZBOEMFBTFIPMEQSPQFSUZXJUIBMJGFPGZFBSTPSMFTT
2.7
Effect
*GUIFOFXBTTFUJTBEFQSFDJBUJOHBTTFU
(a)
(b)
(c)
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
5IFHBJOEFGFSSFEJTOPUEFEVDUFEGSPNUIFDPTUPGUIFOFXBTTFU
*OTUFBEJUJTQPTUQPOFEVOUJMUIFFBSMJFTUPG
J

EJTQPTBMPGUIFOFXBTTFU
JJ
UIFEBUFUIFOFXBTTFUDFBTFTUPCFVTFEJOUIFUSBEF
JJJ
ZFBSTBGUFSUIFOFXBTTFUXBTBDRVJSFE
EOUSFQSFOFVST SFMJFG JT POMZ BWBJMBCMF JG BOZ SFNBJOJOH HBJOT BGUFS UIF SFMJFG BSF JO SFMBUJPO UP UIF EJTQPTBM PG UIF XIPMF
CVTJOFTT
E XAMPLE 6
$IBSMFTQVSDIBTFEBGSFFIPMEGBDUPSZJO.BZGPSb *O+VOFIFTPMEJUGPSb BOEJO+VMZCPVHIUBZFBS
MFBTFIPMEGBDUPSZCVJMEJOHGPSb *O'FCSVBSZ$IBSMFTTPMEUIFMFBTFIPMEGBDUPSZGPSb BOENPWFEJOUPSFOUFEQSFNJTFT
Calculate the chargeable gains arising in 2014/15 assuming Charles claims to defer gains where possible.
93
94
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
2.8
Acquisition of a new non-depreciating asset

(a)
*GBOFXOPOEFQSFDJBUJOHBTTFUJTBDRVJSFECFGPSFUIFEFGFSSFEHBJOCFDPNFTUBYBCMF SPMMPWFSSFMJFGDBOCFDMBJNFEJOTUFBE
(b) 5IFDBQJUBMHBJOPOUIFPSJHJOBMBTTFUJTUIFOSPMMFEPWFSJOUPUIFOFXOPOEFQSFDJBUJOHBTTFUBOEUIFEFQSFDJBUJOHBTTFUJT
FFDUJWFMZ JHOPSFE
Relief for the gift of business assets
3.1
Nature of relief
(a)
"HJGUJTTVCKFDUUPDBQJUBMHBJOTUBY
(b) 5IFEPOPS UIFQFSTPONBLJOHUIFHJGU
JTUSFBUFEBTNBLJOHBEJTQPTBMPGUIFBTTFUBUNBSLFUWBMVF
5IFEPOFF UIFQFSTPOSFDFJWJOHUIFHJGU
JTUSFBUFEBTJGIFIBEBDRVJSFEUIFBTTFUBUNBSLFUWBMVF
(c)
8IFOHJGUSFMJFGJTDMBJNFE UIFEPOPSTHBJOJTEFGFSSFE5IFHBJOJTEFEVDUFEGSPNUIFEPOFFTDPTU NBSLFUWBMVF
5IJTDBOCFJMMVTUSBUFEBTGPMMPXT
HJGU
EPOFF
EPOPS
QSPDFFET
.7
DPTU
.7
MFTTDPTU
MFTTHBJOEFGFSSFE
HBJO
Y
HJGUSFMJFGDMBJNFE
E XAMPLE 7
%BWJECPVHIUBOBTTFUGPSb JO+VOF*O4FQUFNCFSIFHJGUFEJUUP5PNNZ XIFOJUTNBSLFUWBMVFXBTb 5IFBTTFU
RVBMJFEGPSHJGUSFMJFG
Assuming David and Tommy make a claim for gift relief calculate Tommys base cost of the asset.
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
3.2
Interaction with entrepreneurs relief

(a)
8IFOBDMBJNGPSHJGUSFMJFGJTNBEF UIFEPOPSNBZMPTFFOUJUMFNFOUUPFOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFG
(b) *GUIFBTTFURVBMJFT HJGUSFMJFGJGDMBJNFEJTBQQMJFECFGPSFFOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFG
3.3
Availability of the relief

(a)
5IFSFMJFGJTPOMZBWBJMBCMFUPJOEJWJEVBMTOPUDPNQBOJFT
(b) 5IFDMBJNNVTUCFNBEFCZCPUIUIFEPOPSBOEEPOFFBOENVTUCFNBEFZFBSTGSPNUIFFOEPGUIFUBYZFBSJOXIJDIUIF
EJTQPTBMPDDVSSFE'PSBHJGUNBEFJOUIFDMBJNNVTUCFNBEFCZ"QSJM
3.4
Qualifying assets
(JGUSFMJFGNBZCFDMBJNFEPOUIFHJGUPGUIFGPMMPXJOHBTTFUT
(a)
"TTFUTVTFEJOUIFUSBEFPG

UIFEPOPS JFXIFSFIFJTBTPMFUSBEFS
(b)
UIFEPOPSTQFSTPOBMDPNQBOZ UIJTFYUFOETUIFSFMJFGUPBTTFUTPXOFECZUIFJOEJWJEVBMCVUOPUVTFECZIJNEJSFDUMZ
GPSUSBEJOHQVSQPTFT

4IBSFTBOETFDVSJUJFTPGUSBEJOHDPNQBOJFTQSPWJEFEUIBUPOFPGUIFGPMMPXJOHDPOEJUJPOTBQQMZ

UIFTIBSFTPSTFDVSJUJFTBSFOPURVPUFEPOBSFDPHOJTFETUPDLFYDIBOHFPS
UIFTIBSFTPSTFDVSJUJFTHJGUFEBSFUIPTFPGUIFJOEJWJEVBMTQFSTPOBMDPNQBOZ
"DPNQBOZRVBMJFTBTBOJOEJWJEVBMTQFSTPOBMDPNQBOZJGBUMFBTUPGUIFWPUJOHSJHIUTBSFPXOFECZUIFJOEJWJEVBM
3.5
Sale at undervalue
(a)
(JGUSFMJFGJTBMTPBWBJMBCMFGPSTBMFTNBEFCFMPXNBSLFUWBMVF XIFSFUIFSFJTBOFMFNFOUPGHJGU
(b) "OZQSPDFFETSFDFJWFEJOFYDFTTPGUIFPSJHJOBMDPTUBSFDIBSHFBCMFUP$(5JNNFEJBUFMZ
(c)
5IFHBJOEFGFSSFE UIFHJGUSFMJFG JTSFEVDFECZUIJTBNPVOU
E XAMPLE 8
3JDIBSEBDRVJSFEBIPMEJOHJOBOVORVPUFEUSBEJOHDPNQBOZJO.BSDIGPSb )FJNNFEJBUFMZCFDBNFBOFNQMPZFFPG
UIFDPNQBOZ
*O.BSDIIFTPMEUIFTIBSFTUPIJTTPOGPSb XIFOUIFJSWBMVFXBTb 3JDIBSEBOEIJTTPODMBJNFESFMJFGGPSBHJGUPGB
CVTJOFTTBTTFU
(a)
What is the chargeable gain, if any, incurred by Richard?
(b)
What is the base cost of the shares for Richards son?
95
96
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
3.6
Assets not wholly used for trading purposes

(a)
8IFSFPOMZQBSUPGBOBTTFUJTVTFEGPSUSBEJOHQVSQPTFT PSXIFSFBOBTTFUIBTCFFOVTFEGPSPOMZQBSUPGUIFEPOPSTQFSJPE
PGPXOFSTIJQ UIFOHJGUSFMJFGJTSFTUSJDUFE
(b) 8IFSFUIFHJGUJTTIBSFTBOEUIFJOEJWJEVBMPXOTBUMFBTUPGUIFWPUJOHSJHIUT UIFOUIFDBQJUBMHBJOPOUIFTIBSFTFMJHJCMF
GPSSFMJFGJTSFTUSJDUFECZUIFGPMMPXJOHGSBDUJPO
.BSLFUWBMVFPGDPNQBOZTDIBSHFBCMFCVTJOFTTBTTFUT $#"
.BSLFUWBMVFPGDPNQBOZTDIBSHFBCMFBTTFUT$"
Note UIBU UIJT USFBUNFOU JT DPNQMFUFMZ EJFSFOU UP UIBU XIJDI BQQMJFT GPS FOUSFQSFOFVST SFMJFG 3FNFNCFS UIBU GPS
FOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFGQVSQPTFTUIFSFJTOPRVFTUJPOPGBQQPSUJPONFOU"DPNQBOZJTFJUIFSBUSBEJOHDPNQBOZ BOEUIFSFGPSF
RVBMJFTGPSUIFFOUSFQSFOFVSTSFMJFG
PSJUJTOPU
3.7
Chargeable assets (CA) and chargeable business assets (CBA)

(a)
"OBTTFUDBOOPUCFBDIBSHFBCMFBTTFUXIFSFBOZHBJOUIBUNJHIUBSJTFPOJUTEJTQPTBMXPVMEOPUCFBDIBSHFBCMFHBJO5IJT
QSPWJTJPOSVMFTPVUFYFNQUBTTFUTTVDIBTNPUPSDBST CVUOPUUIPTFUIBUDPVMEQSPEVDFBHBJOPOEJTQPTBMCVUDVSSFOUMZ
TUBOEBUBMPTT5IJTXJMMJODMVEFBMMDIBSHFBCMFBTTFUTIFMECZUIFDPNQBOZ CPUIUIPTFVTFEJOUIFCVTJOFTTBOEUIPTFIFME
BTJOWFTUNFOUT
(b) $IBSHFBCMFCVTJOFTTBTTFUTBSFUIPTFVTFEGPSUIFQVSQPTFTPGBDPNQBOZTUSBEF JODMVEJOHHPPEXJMMQVSDIBTFECFGPSF
CVUFYDMVEJOHTIBSFT TFDVSJUJFTBOEPUIFSBTTFUTIFMEBTJOWFTUNFOUT

E XAMPLE 9
+PIOPXOTPGUIFTIBSFTJO+PIO-UEPGXIJDIIFJTUIFNBOBHJOHEJSFDUPS0O%FDFNCFSIFNBEFBHJGUPGUIFTIBSFTUPIJT
TPO XIFOUIFNBSLFUWBMVFPGUIFTIBSFTXBTb 5IFTIBSFTDPTUb JO'FCSVBSZ"UUIFUJNFPGUIFHJGU+PIO-UEPXOFE
UIFGPMMPXJOHBTTFUT
'SFFIPMEUSBEJOHQSFNJTFT

(PPEXJMM

*OWFTUNFOUT

4UPDLBOEXPSLJOQSPHSFTT

%FCUPST

$BTI

Calculate Johns Capital Gains Tax on disposal of the shares in John Ltd and base cost of the shares for his son.
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
Principal Private Residence Relief
4.1
The sale of an individuals only or main private residence is covered by Principal Private Residence Relief (PPR). The
relief also covers grounds up to half a hectare.
5IFSFMJFGJTBWBJMBCMFJOGVMMJGUIFUBYQBZFSPDDVQJFEUIFQSPQFSUZUISPVHIPVUUIFFOUJSFQFSJPEPGPXOFSTIJQ8IFSFPDDVQBUJPO
IBTCFFOGPSPOMZQBSUPGUIFQFSJPE BQSPQPSUJPOPGUIFHBJOJTDPWFSFECZUIFSFMJFG
(BJO
4.2
1FSJPEPGPDDVQBUJPO
1FSJPEPGPXOFSTIJQ
There are however periods of absence which are deemed to be full occupation
(a)
-BTUNPOUITJGUIFQSPQFSUZXBTUIFJOEJWJEVBMTNBJOSFTJEFODFBUTPNFQPJOUJOUJNF
(b) "OZQFSJPETEVSJOHXIJDIUIFJOEJWJEVBMXBTSFRVJSFECZIJTFNQMPZNFOUUPMJWFBCSPBE
(c)
"OZQFSJPEVQUPGPVSZFBSTEVSJOHXIJDIUIFJOEJWJEVBMJTSFRVJSFEUPMJWFFMTFXIFSFJOUIF6,EVFUPFNQMPZNFOU
(d) 6QUPUISFFZFBSTGPSBOZSFBTPO
1PJOUT CoE
NVTUCFQSFDFEFEBOEGPMMPXFECZQFSJPETPGBDUVBMPDDVQBUJPO CVUGPSQPJOUT CoD
JGUIFJOEJWJEVBMDPVMEOPU
SFPDDVQZEVFUPUIFUFSNTPGFNQMPZNFOUSFRVJSJOHUIFNUPXPSLFMTFXIFSF CZDPODFTTJPO UIFDPOEJUJPOPGBDUVBMPDDVQBUJPO
GPMMPXJOHUIFQFSJPEPGBCTFODFJTOPUBQQMJFE
E XAMPLE 10
%BWJECPVHIUBIPVTFPO"QSJMGPSb IFMJWFEJOJUVOUJM+VOF)FXPSLFEBCSPBEGPSZFBSTBOEUIFONPWFECBDL
JOUPUIFIPVTFPOIJTSFUVSOPO+VMZ)FMJWFEJOUIFIPVTFVOUJM%FDFNCFSCFGPSFMFBWJOHUPMJWFBOEXPSLFMTFXIFSFJO6,
%BWJEEJEOPUSFUVSOUPUIFIPVTFBOEUIFIPVTFXBTTPMEPO%FDFNCFSGPSb
Calculate the chargeable gain arising.
97
98
4.3
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
Business use
8IFSFQBSUPGBSFTJEFODFJTVTFEFYDMVTJWFMZGPSCVTJOFTTQVSQPTFTUISPVHIPVUUIFQFSJPEPGPXOFSTIJQ UIFHBJOJOSFMBUJPOUPUIBU
QBSUJTOPUDPWFSFECZSFMJFG
5IFMBTUNPOUITSVMFEPFTOPUBQQMZUPUIBUQBSUVOMFTTUIFCVTJOFTTQBSUXBTBUTPNFUJNFVTFEBTQBSUPGUIFPOMZPSNBJO
SFTJEFODF
4.4
Letting relief
-FUUJOHSFMJFGJTBWBJMBCMFUPDPWFSBOZHBJOOPUDPWFSFECZ113JG
(a)
(b)
PXOFSJTBCTFOU OPUDPWFSFECZEFFNFEPDDVQBUJPOSVMFT
BOEUIFQSPQFSUZJTSFOUFEPVU
QBSUPGUIFQSPQFSUZJTSFOUFEPVU UIFSFNBJOJOHQBSUCFJOHPDDVQJFECZUIFUBYQBZFS
-FUUJOHSFMJFGJTUIFMPXFSPG

113SFMJFGHJWFO
b
HBJOBUUSJCVUBCMFUPMFUUJOH
E XAMPLE 11
,FOCPVHIUBIPVTFPO"QSJMGPSb BOEPDDVQJFEBTGPMMPXT
o
MJWFEJOJU
o
USBWFMTUIFXPSMEBOEMFUTUIFIPVTF
o MJWFEJOJU
o
.PWFEPVUPGUIFIPVTFUPMJWFXJUIIJTHJSMGSJFOEBOEUIFQSPQFSUZXBTFNQUZ
,FOTPMEUIFIPVTFPO.BSDIGPSb
Calculate the chargeable gain arising.
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
99
100
Paper F6
$IBQUFS
Paper F6
Chapter 15
CORPORATION TAX
Introduction
1.1
Scope of corporation tax

Companies resident in the UK are chargeable to corporation tax on worldwide income and gains.
A company is UK resident if it is either,
(1)
Incorporated in UK eg A Ltd or V plc, or
(2)
Centrally managed and controlled from UK eg A Inc., which is incorporated overseas, but the majority of its directors are
resident in UK and board meetings are held in UK.
1.2
Definitions
A period of account is the period for which a company prepares its accounts. Usually a company will prepare accounts
for a period of 12 months, but a period of account may be for a shorter or longer period than this. This may occur when a
company either commences or ceases trading, or whenever it changes its accounting date.
t
t
t
Corporation tax is charged in respect of chargeable accounting periods. Normally a companys chargeable accounting
period (CAP) will be the same as its period of account but it cannot exceed 12 months. This is the period for which the
Corporation Tax computation is prepared and for which the Taxable Total Profit (TTP) is computed. If the period of account
exceeds 12 months then 2 corporation tax computations will be required, the first for 12 months and the second for the
remainder of the period (see chapter 17)
The tax rates to be used however, are set for Financial Years. (FY)
FY 2014 = 1 April 2014 to 31 March 2015.
Therefore if the CAP spans 2 FYs where the tax rates have changed the TTP will need to be apportioned between the FYs
and the respective tax rates then charged (see chapter 16).
1.3
Chargeable Accounting periods

A CAP will normally start immediately after the end of the preceding CAP.
t
t
t
t
A CAP will also start when a company commences to trade, or when its profits otherwise become liable to corporation tax.
A CAP will normally finish twelve months after the beginning of the period or at the end of a companys period of account.
A CAP will also finish when a company ceases to trade, or when its profits otherwise cease being liable to corporation tax.
Taxable Total Profits (TTP)

A companys corporation tax liability for an accounting period is calculated by computing profits (income + gains) from all sources
and deducting qualifying charitable donations. This figure is known as Taxable Total Profits and is then charged to tax at the
relevant rate(s) of corporation tax for the company.
101
102
Paper F6
CORPORATION TAX
Chapter 15
Pro forma corporation tax computation

Corporation Tax Computation for the year ended 31 March 2015
Trading income
Adjusted profit
Less: Capital allowances
Tax Adjusted Trading Profit
Other income & gains
Interest receivable
Property Income
Net chargeable gains
Total Profits
Less: Qualifying Charitable Donations
Taxable Total Profits
X
(X)
X
X
X
X
X
(X)
X
2.1
Notes
(a)
Dividends received from other UK and overseas companies are not taxable, dividends paid are not deductible.
(b) Companies pay corporation tax (not capital gains tax) on chargeable gains (see chapters 19 - 21)
Royalties payable
Relief for royalties payable is given in line with the accounting treatment, and therefore royalties payable are allowed as a deduction
when calculating the adjusted trading profit. No adjustment is therefore required.
Royalties receivable
The taxation of royalties receivable will follow the accounting treatment on an accruals basis. Royalties receivable will therefore be
included in the adjusted trading profit, with no adjustment being required.
Tax Adjusted Trading Profit
5.1
This calculation is similar to unincorporated business:

Adjusted profit
less
Capital Allowances
5.2
X
(X)
X
Adjusted profit
The rules discussed in chapter 4 for unincorporated business are similar for incorporated businesses but with some notable
exceptions:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
No private element of expenses added back

Drawings (cash or goods) is not relevant for companies. Any distributions are out of post tax profit
Family salaries are not relevant for companies
Legal fees regarding the issue of share capital are an expense only for companies and as they are of a capital nature, the
expense is disallowed and added back in the adjustment of trading profit
Legal fees with regard to registering patents and trademarks are allowable by statute
Interest payable on a non-trading loans are added back, but the expense is deductible instead against interest income
Interest payable to HMRC is treated as non-trading so is also tax relievable against interest income (interest receivable from
HMRC is taxable as interest income)
5.3
Capital allowances
As per unincorporated business, (see chapter 5) but, there are no private use assets and note only one AIA is allowable to a group
of companies.
5.4
Basis periods
The complicated rules for unincorporated traders are not relevant for companies. Tax adjusted trading profit is calculated for a CAP
and included with other income and gains to arrive at Taxable Total Profits. The tax is then calculated for the CAP.
CORPORATION TAX
Paper F6
Chapter 15
Property Income
6.1
As per individuals (see chapter 3) with some notable exceptions

(a)
The property income is calculated on an accruals basis for the CAP
(b) Interest payable on a loan to buy a rental property is deductible against interest income not property income
(c)
There is no rent a room relief for companies
(d) If a company makes a property loss on its properties it must be offset against total profits before deduction of qualifying
charitable donations of the current period and any excess is carried forward against total profits before qualifying charitable
donations of future periods.
Interest income
(a)
(b)
(c)
All interest receivable is assessed as interest income on an accruals basis

Companies receive all interest GROSS
Interest payable is deductible against tax adjusted trading profit if loan used for trading purposes eg to acquire property or
plant & machinery to use in the trade, or to increase working capital. If the loan is used for non trading purposes then it is
deductible against interest income. It is relievable on an accruals basis. The main examples of non trading loans are those
taken out to acquire a rental / investment property, as stated above, or to acquire shares
Qualifying Charitable Donations

For companies to ensure tax relief is achieved on their charitable donations they should make such payments under the qualifying
charitable donations system. The payment is GROSS and deductible on a paid basis. Thus in the adjustment of trading profit any
such payments should be added back and instead included as a separate deduction on the Corporation Tax computation
Dividends
Dividends received from UK and overseas companies are never included as part of Taxable Total Profits.
E XAMPLE 1
Westmorland Ltd has the following income and outgoings for the year ending 31 March 2015.
Tax-adjusted trading profit

1,456,500
Property Income
25,000
Interest receivable
10,000
Chargeable gains
37,500
Capital losses
(2,500)
Dividends from UK companies
14,400
Qualifying charitable donations
(10,000)
Compute the Taxable Total Profits for the year ending 31 March 2015.
103
104
CORPORATION TAX
Paper F6
Chapter 15
Paper F6
Chapter 16
CALCULATION OF CORPORATION TAX LIABILITY
Calculation
1.1
Corporation tax payable

(a)
(b)
(c)
1.2
Corporation tax payable is calculated as:

Taxable Total Profits corporation tax rate for the financial year(s)
The rate of corporation tax depends on the level of Augmented profits
Augmented profits = Taxable Total Profits + Franked Investment Income (FII)
Franked investment income is dividends received from UK and overseas companies plus the associated 10% tax credit
UK and overseas dividends received 10090 (from non associated (non subsidiary) companies)
Corporation tax rates

The corporation tax rates for the Financial Year (FY) 2014 are as follows:
Small profits rate
20%
Main rate
21%
For FY 2013
Small profits rate
Main rate
1.3
20%
23%
Main Rate
If Augmented profits are equal to or above the upper limit of 1,500,000, then Taxable Total Profits are taxed at the main rate.
Small profits rate
If Augmented profits are equal to or below the lower limit of 300,000, then Taxable Total Profits are taxed at the small profits rate.
If Augmented profits fall between 300,000 and 1,500,000 the company is marginal and is taxed as follows:
Taxable Total Profits Main Rate
Less Marginal Relief (see section 1.5 below)
=
=
x
(x)
x
See section 1.4 below for detail

1.4
Changes in the rates

(a)
When a companys CAP falls into two financial years in which the rates have changed, the tax must be calculated for each
financial year separately.
(b) The rates and marginal relief fractions for FY 2012, FY 2013 and FY 2014 are as follows:
Financial year
Small profits rate
Main rate
Lower limit
Upper limit
(c)
2012
20%
24%
2013
20%
23%
2014
20%
21%
300,000
1,500,000
300,000
1,500,000
300,000
1,500,000
Marginal relief fraction

1100
00
00
If a companys CAP falls into 2 FYs, then if the rates have changed there is a need to apportion the results in to the respective
FYs.
105
106
Paper F6
Chapter 16
E XAMPLE 1
A Ltd had the following results for the year ended 31 March 2015
Dividend from UK company (amount received)
1,800,000
9,000
Calculate the corporation tax payable for the year ended 31 March 2015 and then show a revised computation of corporation tax payable if the accounting year had ended 31 December 2014.
E XAMPLE 2
Dividend from a UK company (amount received)
60,000
1,800
Paper F6

1.5
Chapter 16
Marginal companies
(a)
If the companys Augmented profits lie between the lower and upper limits for the financial year then marginal relief applies.
(b) Corporation tax payable is calculated as follows:
Taxable Total Profits Main rate
Less: FRACTION (UPPER LIMIT AUGMENTED PROFITS)
X
TAXABLE TOTAL PROFITS
AUGMENTED PROFITS
Corporation Tax Payable

(c)
(d)
(X)
X
The fraction for FY 2013 is 3/400 and for FY 2014 is 1/400

The upper limit will be 1,500,000 (scaled down if there are associated companies and/or if CAP is less than 12 months). The
marginal relief fractions and lower and upper limits are given on the tax rates and allowances page within the exam paper.
E XAMPLE 3
Dividend from UK company (amount received)
430,000
18,000
107
108
Paper F6

1.6
Chapter 16
Short chargeable accounting periods

(a)
the upper and lower limits are limits for a 12 month period.
(b) if the accounting period is less than 12 months then the limits need to be time apportioned accordingly
E XAMPLE 4
A Ltd had the following results for the 4 months ended 31 March 2015:
Dividend from a UK company (amount received)
300,000
9,000
Calculate the corporation tax payable for the 4 months ended 31 March 2015
1.7
Associated companies
(a)
The Upper and Lower limits are restricted when there are associated companies. Companies are associated where either
one company controls another or two or more companies are under common control. This is usually found within a group
structure.
(b) Associated companies are dealt with in detail in chapter 22.
Paper F6
Chapter 17
LONG PERIOD OF ACCOUNT
Apportioning income and expenditure

(a)
If a company has a period of account longer than 12 months it must be split into two Chargeable Accounting Periods (CAP)
the first 12 months
(b)
the remaining months
The income and expenditure is divided between the CAPs as follows:

Adjusted profit
Time apportioned
Capital allowances
Two calculations
Property Income
Accruals basis
Interest receivable
Accruals basis

Chargeable gains
Dividends
(WDA and AIA will be restricted in the second

short period, but note that FYAs on motor cars
with emissions 95 g/km are never restricted
for short accounting periods)
Date of disposal/payment
Date received
109
110
LONG PERIOD OF ACCOUNT
Paper F6
Chapter 17
E XAMPLE 1
A plc prepared accounts for a 15 month period to 30 June 2015. The results for the period are as follows:
Adjusted profit
4,000,000
Chargeable gain (sale of asset on 6 May 2015)
80,000
Qualifying charitable donations (paid annually on 31 July)
20,000
The tax written down value of plant and machinery qualifying for capital allowances at 1 April 2014 was nil. The capital transactions during
the 15 month period was the purchase of new vans for 68,000 on 12 May 2014 and plant and macinery costing 152,500 on April14,
2015.
Calculate the corporation tax liabilities for the relevant CAPs
Paper F6
Chapter 18
TAX ADJUSTED LOSSES COMPANIES
Trading and Non-Trading losses
1.1
Trading losses
If a company makes a trading loss, its trading income assessment for that period is nil. The loss may then be relieved in the current
period followed by carry back to an earlier period(s) and / or by carry forward to relieve in future periods
1.2
Non-Trading losses
(a)
Capital losses
Capital losses are relieved against:
(i)
Current year capital gains, then
(ii)
Net capital gains in future accounting periods.
(b) Property Business losses
Property Business losses are relieved by
(iii) Setting them off against total profits before deduction of qualifying charitable donations of the current period, then
(iv) By carrying them forward against total profits before qualifying charitable donations of future periods.
Trading losses
2.1
Current period relief

The loss may be relieved against total profits before deduction of qualifying charitable donations in the period that the loss arose.
E XAMPLE 1
Trading loss
Interest receivable
Chargeable gain
(45,000)
20,000
50,000
15,000
Show how current year relief would be obtained in the year ended 31 March 2015
111
112
Paper F6

2.2
Chapter 18
Carryback relief
(a)
Having first relieved the trading loss in the accounting period of loss, only then may any remaining trading losses be carried
back against total profits before deduction of qualifying charitable donations of the preceding 12 months. The loss must
be applied fully against the available profits. Partial claims, for example to leave sufficient profit to cover the qualifying
charitable donation, are not allowed. These claims may therefore result in no tax relief being achieved for the qualifying
charitable donations.
E XAMPLE 2
A Ltd has produced the following results over recent years.
Trading profit / (loss)

Interest receivable
Year ended 31 March

2013
2014
2015
30,000
60,000
(90,000)
10,000
10,000
10,000
Show how loss relief would be claimed assuming that relief is taken as soon as possible.
Paper F6
Chapter 18
E XAMPLE 3
A Ltd has the following results:

Bank interest
Chargeable gains / (losses)
y/e
9 months
to
y/e
31/3/13
31/12/13
31/12/2014
25,000
3,000
(1,000)
(500)
20,000
1,000
6,000
(500)
(40,000)
1,000
(500)
Show the Taxable Total Profits for all accounting periods, assuming loss relief is taken as soon as possible.
113
114
Paper F6

2.3
Chapter 18
Losses in the final twelve months of trading

The carryback period is extended to 36 months for losses incurred in the twelve months prior to the cessation of trading. Losses
can be carried back against total profits before deduction of qualifying charitable donations of the 36 months preceding the loss
making period on a LIFO basis.
E XAMPLE 4
A Ltd ceased trading on 31 March 2015. It had the following results for the five accounting periods to 31 March 2015.
6 months to
y/e 30/9/11
y/e 31/3/13 y/e 31/3/14 y/e 31/3/15
31/3/12

10,000
16,000
20,000
32,000
(97,000)
Bank interest
2,000
2,000
2,000
2,000
Chargeable gains
6,000
8,000
500
500
500
Show the Taxable Total Profits for all accounting periods.
Paper F6

2.4
Chapter 18
Carry forward relief

(a)
If any loss remains unrelieved after current year and carryback claims have been made or no such claims were made, then
the loss is automatically carried forward.
(b) Under carry forward relief any remaining losses are carried forward for relief against the first available trading profit from the
same trade. There is no time limit on the carry forward period and losses must be relieved as soon as possible.
E XAMPLE 5
A plc had the following results since it started trading on 1 April 2011
y/e 31/3/12 y/e 31/3/13 y/e 31/3/14 y/e 31/3/15

40,000
20,000
(43,000)
20,000
Property Income
Interest receivable
3,000
4,000
3,000
3,000
3,000
5,000
3,000
3,000
(1,000)
(1,000)
(1,000)
(1,000)
Show how losses will be relieved on the assumption that any relief is to be taken as soon as possible.
115
116
Paper F6
Chapter 18
Paper F6
Chapter 19
CHARGEABLE GAINS COMPANIES
General
As seen in Chapter 15 companies pay corporation tax on their chargeable gains.
A chargeable gain arises on a chargeable disposal of a chargeable asset by a chargeable person as seen in Chapter 12 for individuals.
A UK resident company is chargeable on its worldwide gains and may dispose of a chargeable asset not only by sale but also on
the loss or destruction of an asset.
As you will see in note 1.2 below the calculation of the gain contains one new component not applicable to individuals. Companies
are given a deduction from the gain to remove the effect of inflation from when the asset was purchased to when it is sold, this
deduction is known as indexation allowance.
All assets are chareable assets unless they are specifically exempt.
1.1
Exempt assets
A more complete list of the main exempt assets may be found in Chapter 12 dealing with individuals but the main exempt assets
that a company may dispose of would be motor vehicles, qualifying corporate bonds (corporate loan stock) and certain chattels.
The main chargeable assets that a company will dispose of will be shares, land and buildings and plant and machinery.
This and subsequent chapters will deal with these main assets.
1.2
Calculation of gains and losses for companies
X
(X)
X
(X)
X
(X)
X
Disposal proceeds (or market value)

Less incidental costs of disposal
Net proceeds
Less allowable costs
Unindexed gain
Less indexation allowance
Chargeable gain
1.3
The indexation allowance

(a)
For companies only, NOT individuals, the increase in value of an asset due to inflation is not taxable - this increase is removed
from the gain by way of indexation allowance.
(b) Companies are entitled to an indexation allowance from the month of acquisition until the month of disposal of an asset
and is computed by reference to the movement in the Retail Prices Index (RPI)
(c)
It is calculated as:
RPI for month of disposal - RPI for month of acquisition
RPI for month of acquisition
(d)
(e)
(f)
cost of the asset
The increase in the RPI is expressed as a decimal and is rounded to three decimal places.
The indexation allowance cannot increase or create a loss.
If the RPI has fallen from the month of acquisition to the month of the disposal, the indexation allowance will be nil.
E XAMPLE 1
A company bought an asset on 6 June 1986 (RPI = 97.85) at a cost of 20,000.
Enhancement expenditure of 6,000 is incurred on 16 August 1990 (RPI = 128.1).
The asset is sold for 100,000 on 2 October 2014 (RPI assume = 257.7).
Incidental costs of sale are 1,000.
Calculate the chargeable gain arising on the disposal of the asset
117
118
Paper F6
Chapter 19
Gains and losses

(a)
(b)
(c)
Capital gains are chargeable to corporation tax.

Capital losses only arise when net proceeds are less than allowable cost. Indexation allowance may not be used to either
create or increase a loss.
If capital gains and losses arise in the same accounting period, they are netted off.
If the resultant figure is a gain, it is charged to corporation tax.
If the resultant figure is a loss, it is carried forward and set against future capital gains.
(d)
(e)
Capital losses brought forward may only be relieved against capital gains, not any other type of income.
The terms capital gains and chargeable gains are interchangeable.
Share matching rules for companies

Disposal of shares gives rise to a chargeable gain or allowable loss. It is difficult however to identify which shares are being sold,
and therefore establish the cost of those shares sold where it is only some of the shareholding being sold and the shares had been
acquired over a period of time at different costs. We need to identify the shares sold by using matching rules as laid down by HMRC
which, as you may expect, are not exactly the same as the matching rules that we used when dealing with the same problem for
individuals disposing of shares as we saw back in Chapter 13. Thus the shares sold are deemed disposed of in the following order::
t
t
t
shares acquired on same day

shares acquired in previous 9 days
shares contained within the share pool which is made up of any shares acquired more than 9 days previous.
The share pool records the number and cost of shares for each acquisition and disposal as it did for individuals but also has to deal
with the fact that companies are entitled to indexation allowance. Thus whenever shares are purchased or sold a reindexation of
the indexed cost of the shares in the pool is added to the indexed cost total which is recorded in a separate Indexed Cost column
of the share pool. Follow the answer to example 2 below to see how the share pool is constructed.
E XAMPLE 2
A Ltd bought the following shares in B Ltd:
20 August 1989 (RPI 115.8) 1,000 shares at a cost of 5,000
16 November 1996 (RPI 153.9) 2,000 shares at a cost of 12,000
7 October 2014 (RPI 257.7) 500 shares at a cost of 5,000
A Ltd sold 3,000 shares on 10 October 2014 (RPI 257.7) for 36,000
The company has a 31 March year end.
Calculate the gain to include in the Corporation Tax Computation for year ended 31 March 2015.
Chapter 19
Bonus issues
(a)
(b)
(c)
Paper F6
A bonus issue increases the number of shares held with no corresponding increase in cost.
The bonus shares are simply added to the number of shares column in the pool.
Do not however index the cost of the original shares to the date of the bonus as no new cost is incurred.
Rights issues
(a)
(b)
A rights issue again increases the number of shares held, but this time there is also a cost associated with the shares. It is
therefore dealt with in the same way as any other acquisition
The indexed cost in the pool is indexed to the date of the rights issue. The rights shares are added to the number of shares
column and the cost is then added to both the cost and indexed cost columns in the pool. The only problem you face is
computing how many shares are acquired under the rights issue
E XAMPLE 3
Y Ltd acquired 3,000 shares in X Ltd on 20 July 1993 for 10,000. In February 1995 X Ltd made a 1:3 bonus issue.
Y Ltd sold 2,000 shares in October 2014 for 12,000.
Calculate the gain on the disposal of the shares in October 2014
RPI are as follows:
October 2014
February 1995
July 1993
257.7
146.9
140.7
119
120
Paper F6
Chapter 19
Takeovers
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Where a takeover is a share for share deal or paper for paper transaction, shareholders of the company taken over acquire
shares in the acquiring company. This normally does not constitute a chargeable disposal.
The new shares are deemed to have been acquired at the same time and for the same cost as the original shares.
A takeover may involve attributing the cost of the original holding to the different component parts of the new holding, if a
mix of consideration is received e.g. a combination of ordinary and preference shares. This is done by allocating the cost of
the original holding to the new shares according to their market value at the time of the takeover. See example 4
If at takeover, cash is received, a chargeable gain needs to be calculated at takeover for the cash element received. See
example 5
E XAMPLE 4
Z Ltd acquired 10,000 A Ltd shares in July 1989 for 10,000. In July 2014 B plc takes over A Ltd and for each share in A Ltd, Z Ltd receives:
2 B plc ordinary shares valued at 1.50 each and, 1 B plc preference shares valued at 1 each.
The preference shares are sold in October 2014 for 15,000 and the indexed rise from July 1989 to October 2014 is 1.231
Calculate the Gain arising as a result of the takeover in July 2014, and the sale of the B plc preference shares in October
2014
E XAMPLE 5
Using example 4 what difference would it make if Z Ltd receives at takeover
2 B plc ordinary shares valued at 1.50 each and 1 cash for each share in A Ltd.
The indexed rise between July 1989 and July 2014 is 1.216.
Paper F6
Chapter 20

FURTHER ASPECTS
Part Disposals, Chattels, Non chattel wasting assets
1.1
When a company disposes of a part but not all of an asset the allowable cost is computed as we saw for individuals in Chapter 12.
This same calculation will be performed for a company but in addition the allowable cost computed will then be available for
indexation allowance in the normal way.
E XAMPLE 1
ST Ltd owned 10 hectares of land which originally cost 26,000 in March 2010 (RPI 220.7). ST sold 2 hectares of the land in October 2014
(RPI 257.7) for 16,000.
The remaining 8 hectares were valued at 34,000 in October 2014.
Calculate the chargeable gain on the disposal of the 2 hectares of land in October 2014.
1.2
A chattel disposal is also dealt with in the same way as for an individual but again with the availability in a normal gains calculation
of indexation allowance
E XAMPLE 2
JM Ltd sold the following assets in October 2014
(a)
an antique table which had cost 3,000 in February 2008 and sold for 5,000
(b) a painting which had cost 2,000 in January 2011 and sold for 10,000
(c)
an antique vase which had cost 8,000 in August 2002 and sold for 3,000
(d) a vintage car which had cost 7,000 in July 1999 and sold for 9,000
RPIs
February 2008
January 2010
August 2002
July 1999
October 2014
211.4
217.9
176.4
165.1
257.7
Calculate the net chargeable gains or losses arising for JM Ltd in October 2014
121
122
1.3
Paper F6
Chapter 20
A non chattel wasting asset disposed of by a company will again be dealt with as for individuals but again with indexation
allowance available on the allowable cost
E XAMPLE 3
On 1 December 2002 Z Ltd bought a copyright at a cost of 25,000. It had an estimated useful life of 30 years, and an estimated residual
value of 1,000.
Z Ltd sold the asset for 38,000 on 1 October 2014.
Assume an indexation factor of 0.486.
Calculate the chargeable gain arising on the sale of the copyright in October 2014.
Assets damaged, lost or destroyed
2.1
Damaged assets
(a)
If an asset is damaged and compensation or insurance money is received as a result, then this will normally be treated as a
part disposal of the asset. The cost is calculated using the normal part disposal formula:
A
A+B
where
A = value of part disposal
B = market value (MV) of the remainder at the time of part disposal
(b)
If insurance money is received then:

(i)
if the insurance money is not used in restoring the asset a normal part disposal arises, with the MV of the part
retained equating to the value of the asset in its damaged condition.
(ii)
if the insurance money is fully used in restoring the asset the tax payer can elect to have the proceeds deducted from
the cost of the asset for a future calculation thereby deferring any gain when the insurance is received.
Paper F6
Chapter 20
E XAMPLE 4
Ml Ltd bought a painting on 1 April 2000 for 10,000. The painting was damaged on 1 May 2014 when it was worth 50,000. After the
damage it was only worth 25,000. On 1 July 2014 insurance proceeds of 30,000 were received and were not used to restore the painting.
Assume an indexation factor from April 2000 to July 2014 = 0.505.
Calculate the chargeable gain arising on the receipt of the insurance proceeds
E XAMPLE 5
Daisy Ltd purchased a painting on 1 April 2000 for 10,000. The painting was damaged on 1 May 2014 when it was worth 50,000. After
the damage it was worth 40,000.
On 1 July 2014 insurance proceeds of 8,000 were received. All of the insurance proceeds were used to restore the painting.
Assuming Daisy Ltd elects for the proceeds to be rolled over against the cost of the painting, calculate the base cost of the
painting on a future disposal.
123
124
2.2
Paper F6
Chapter 20
Destroyed or lost assets

(a)
If an asset is destroyed or lost and no compensation or insurance money is received there is a disposal which will result in
a capital loss.
If there is any compensation or insurance monies received this will normally be brought into an ordinary gains computation
as proceeds.
(b)
(c)
The date of disposal is the date the insurance money is received. If the insurance money is used to buy a replacement asset
within 12 months, the gain can be deferred until the new asset is sold.
If only part or the insurance money is used to buy a replacement asset then some of the gain will be taxed immediately and
some of the gain will be deferred.
E XAMPLE 6
SC Ltd bought an asset for 23,000 in June 2008, It was destroyed in March 2014. Insurance proceeds of 34,000 were received in October
2014. SC Ltd spent 30,000 on a replacement asset.
Calculate the chargeable gain and the base cost of the new asset.
RPI is
October 2014
257.7
June 2008
216.8
Paper F6
Chapter 21
CHARGEABLE GAINS COMPANIES RELIEFS
Replacement of business assets (Rollover Relief)
1.1
Definition
A gain may be rolled over (deferred) where it arises on the disposal of a qualifying business asset whose sale proceeds are reinvested
in another qualifying business asset.
1.2
Qualifying assets
Both the old and new assets must fall into one of the following categories:
(a)
Land and buildings
(b) Fixed plant and machinery
Both the old and new assets must be used in the business.
1.3
The relief
(a)
The gain is not taxed immediately but is postponed until the company makes a disposal of the replacement asset without
further replacement.
(b) The postponement is achieved by deducting the gain made on the old asset from the cost of the new one.
(c)
Where the disposal proceeds of the old asset are not fully reinvested, the surplus retained reduces the amount of capital
gain that can be rolled over.
(d) The replacement asset must be bought in the period 12 months before to 36 months after the disposal of the old asset.
(e)
A claim must be made within 4 years from the end of the accounting period in which the disposal occurred.
E XAMPLE 1
JM Ltd bought a building for use in the business in October 1994 RPI (145.2) for 150,000. The building was sold in October 2014
RPI (257.7) for 400,000. In December 2014 JM Ltd bought some land for use in the business for 500,000. (JM Ltd has a 31 December
year end)
125
126
Paper F6
Chapter 21
E XAMPLE 2
A Ltd bought land for use in the business in May 2003 (RPI 181.5) for 200,000. The land was sold in October 2014 (RPI 257.7) for 350,000..
In September 2014 A Ltd bought a factory for use in the business for 335,000 (A Ltd has a 31 December year end)
Depreciating assets
2.1
Definition
(a)
An asset with an expected life of a maximum 60 years or
(b) Fixed plant and machinery
Note: You will only be examined on fixed plant and machinery and leasehold property with a life of 60 years or less.
2.2
Effect
If the new asset is a depreciating asset.
(a)
(b)
Paper F6
Chapter 21
The gain deferred is not deducted from the cost of the new asset
Instead it is postponed until the earliest of:
(i)
disposal of the new asset
(ii)
the date the new asset ceases to be used in the trade
(iii) 10 years after the new asset was acquired
E XAMPLE 3
YR Ltd bought land for use in the business in April 1997 (RPI 156.3) for 200,000. The land was sold for 350,000 in May 2009 (RPI 212.8).
In March 2010 YR Ltd bought fixed plant for use in the business, costing 390,000.
YR Ltd sold the plant in February 2015. (YR Ltd has a 31 March year end)
Calculate the chargeable gains as far as the above information allows for y/e 31/3/2010 and y/e 31/3/2015
(c)
When the replacement asset is a depreciating asset, the gain is deferred as in (b) above. However, if a non-depreciating
asset is purchased before the deferred gain crystallises, the original gain may be rolled over against the cost of the new,
non-depreciating asset and will only crystallise on sale of the non-depreciating asset..
127
128
Paper F6
Chapter 21
Paper F6
Chapter 22
CORPORATION TAX GROUPS
Introduction
A group exists for taxation purposes where one company is a subsidiary of another. The various reliefs are only available to members
of certain group structures.
There are two types of group structure, based on the level of share ownership that are relevant for tax purposes, 51% groups and
75% groups
(1)
51% groups issues

- associated companies
- Group VAT registration (see Chapter 24)
- Availability of AIA
(2) 75% groups issues

- group relief of losses
- gains group membership
Associated companies
2.1
Definition
Companies are associated with each other if:
(a)
One controls the other or
(b) Both are under control of another person
Associated companies are usually found within a group structure, for example a parent company is associated with its subsidiaries
so that if A plc had 3 subsidiaries, V Ltd, F Ltd and C Ltd, there would be 4 associated companies. If, however the shares in V, F and
C were owned by Mr A rather than A plc then although there would be no group as no parent company exists, there would still be
3 associated companies as they would all be under the control of the same person Mr A.
2.2
Control
Control is established by holding:
(a)
(b)
(c)
2.3
Over 50% of the share capital, or

Over 50% of the voting rights, or
Being entitled to over 50% of the distributable profits or net assets on a winding up
The tax implications

(a)
The upper and lower limits to determine the size of the company are divided by the number of associated companies in
the group.
overseas companies are included
(b)
companies associated for only part of an accounting period are included
dormant companies are excluded
In calculating augmented profits dividends received from associated companies are excluded.
129
130
Paper F6
Chapter 22
E XAMPLE 1
A Ltd prepares accounts for the year ended 31 March 2015. The company acquired a subsidiary on 1 July 2014 that is resident overseas,
and a further subsidiary on 1 November 2014 that is resident in the UK.
A Ltd has Taxable Total Profits of 140,000 for the year ended 31 March 2015, and also received franked investment income from non
associated companies of 10,000 during the year.
Calculate A Ltds corporation tax payable for the year ended 31March 2015
The Annual Investment (AIA)

Only one AIA is available to a group of companies and the group members can allocate the AIA in any way across the group.
A group for AIA purposes is where a parent company holds more than 50% in another UK company or UK companies at the end
of the accounting period
E XAMPLE 2
Using example 1
Advise on which companies in the A Ltd group would be eligible to claim AIA and how it may best be allocated between them.
Group relief
4.1
Introduction
The relief allows companies in a 75% group to transfer any part of current year trading losses to set off against any part of a claimant
companys taxable total profit of a corresponding accounting period.
4.2
Definition of a 75% group

(a)
One company is the 75% subsidiary of another, or
(b) Both companies are 75% subsidiaries of a third company.
The holding company must :
(c)
(d)
(e)
own at least 75% of share capital, and

be entitled to at least 75% of the subsidiarys assets on winding up, and
be entitled to at least 75% of the subsidiarys income on a distribution.
Paper F6

4.3
Chapter 22
Sub-subsidiaries
The holding company must have an effective interest in the sub-subsidiary of at least 75%
E XAMPLE 3
Z plc is the holding company for a group of companies. The group structure is as follows:
Z plc
|
100%
|
A Ltd
|
80%
|
B Ltd
|
80%
|
C Ltd
For the year ended 31 March 2015 Z plc has a trading loss.
State the companies Z plc may surrender its trading loss to in y/e 31/3/15.
4.4
Group loss relief

(a)
Trading losses may be surrendered to other companies in the group, which may then relieve the losses against their own
taxable total profits.
(b) Any member company may surrender its loss to any other member of the group:
a holding company may surrender a loss to its subsidiary company
(c)
(d)
4.5
a subsidiary company may surrender a loss to its holding company
a subsidiary company may surrender a loss to a fellow subsidiary company.
The surrendering company is the company that surrenders its loss.

The claimant company is the company to which the loss is surrendered.
The surrendering company

(a)
The surrendering company may surrender as much of the loss as it wants to
(b) It is not necessary to relieve a trading loss against its own income and gains first.
(c)
The losses which may be surrendered are:
any amount of trade losses
unrelieved qualifying charitable donations
unrelieved Property Business losses
Note that capital losses are not eligible for group relief but are dealt with separately under gains group membership.
4.6
The claimant company

The relief is taken against Taxable Total Profits of the same period as the surrendering companys loss making period
131
132

4.7
Paper F6
Chapter 22
Group relief
(a)
There are two important points to remember as regards group relief:
Losses can be group relieved against 100% of a 75% subsidiarys Taxable Total Profits, or conversely 100% of a 75%
subsidiarys loss can be group relieved.
(b)
The relief is not restricted to the percentage shareholding.
Only current year losses can be group relieved. No relief is available for trading losses brought forward from previous
years or trading losses carried back.
Where the accounting periods of two group companies are different, then group relief will be restricted to the corresponding
or coterminous period.
E XAMPLE 4
Continuing with Example 3 suppose that B Ltd had commenced trading on 1 October 2014 preparing accounts for the six-month period
to 31 March 2015
Discuss the group relief available in respect of Z plc trading loss for y/e 31/3/15 if it were to consider surrendering the trading
loss to B Ltd.
E XAMPLE 5
Beyonce Ltd prepares its accounts to 31 March in each year and has two wholly owned subsidiaries J Ltd and Z Ltd. J Ltd has been owned
for several years but prepares its accounts to 30 June, while Z Ltd started trading on 1 January 2015 and made a trading profit of 50,000
in its 3 month period to 31 March 2015. Beyonce made a trading loss of 240,000 in its year ended 31 March 2015 while J Ltd has Taxable
Total Profits of 160,000 for the year ended 30 June 2014 and 280,000 for the year ended 30 June 2015.
Compute the maximum group relief claims available to J Ltd and Z Ltd in respect of Beyonces loss of 240,000.
Paper F6
4.8
Chapter 22
Marginal rates of tax

(a)
The most important factor to be taken into account when considering group relief claims is the rate of corporation tax
payable by the claimant companies. Group relief should be surrendered as follows:
Initially to companies subject to corporation tax in the higher marginal relief band (effective rate of 21.25%% for FY
2014) to bring augmented profits down to the small profits rate limit (300,000 divided by the number of associated
companies).
Surrender should then be to those companies subject to the main rate of corporation tax of 21% (FY 2014), (again to
bring their augmented profits down to the small profits rate limit)
Finally surrender to those companies subject to the small profits rate of 20% (FY 2014)
Given that there is now only a very small difference between the tax rates applicable to marginal, large and small
profits, companies may well now place more emphasis on cash flow and relieving the loss at the earliest opportunity
especially as a carry back claim to the previous FY may well also save tax at a higher rate, for example last years full
rate at 23% is higher than this years marginal rate!
E XAMPLE 6
S Ltd has two 100% subsidiaries, E Ltd and F Ltd. The results of each company for the year ended 31 March 2015 are as follows:
S Ltd
E Ltd
F Ltd
Trading profit/(loss)
(125,000)
Property Income
120,000
650,000
130,000
As at 31 March 2014 S Ltd had unused trading losses of 7,500.

Calculate the corporation tax payable of each of the group companies, assuming that the loss is relieved in the most beneficial
way.
4.9
Payment for group relief

The claimant company may make payments to the surrendering company for group relief. Any payment up to the amount of the
loss surrendered is ignored for corporation tax purposes.
Groups Chargeable gains
5.1
Definition of a 75 % group
(a)
A group consists of a parent company and its 75% subsidiaries, and also the 75% subsidiaries of the first subsidiaries.
(b) The parent company must have an effective interest of over 50% in all group companies.
(c)
Groups may be established through companies resident anywhere in the world.
5.2
The Tax Implications
133
134
Paper F6

(a)
(b)
(c)
Chapter 22
Group companies will transfer assets between themselves without incurring a chargeable gain or allowable loss. This will
be a no gain / no loss transfer and will be deemed to take place at a value equal to the cost of the asset to the transferor
company plus the available Indexation Allowance.
Group companies can make an election such that any part of a capital gain or loss incurred by one company may be treated
as arising in another company.
Members of a 75% group are treated as one for the purposes of roll over relief.
Where:
one company sells a qualifying asset, and
another company buys a qualifying asset within the rollover relief qualifying time period.
the gain can be rolled over
5.3
Advantages of Gains Group membership

(a)
The groups capital losses can be better utilised
(b) Gains can be taxed at the lowest available tax rate in the group
(c)
Rollover relief is available on a group wide basis
5.4
Capital losses
(a)
An asset does not have to be moved between group companies in order to match capital losses and gains.
(b) Companies in a capital gains group can make an election to deem any part of a gain or loss made by one group member to
have been made by any other gains group member..
(c)
The election has to be made within two years of the end of the accounting period in which the asset is disposed of outside
the group.
(d) The advantages of the election
The two-year time limit for making an election means that tax planning regarding the set-off of capital losses and
gains can be done retrospectively.
The two-year time limit also means that it is possible for capital gains to be treated as being made by the company
in the group with the lowest rate of corporation tax.
By not having to actually transfer assets within a group means a saving in legal and administrative costs
The election can be made in respect of any part of a capital gain or capital loss.
E XAMPLE 7
During the year ended 31 March 2015 Large Ltd disposed of an asset that resulted in a capital loss of 75,000. Small Ltd, the 100%
subsidiary of Large Ltd, disposed of an asset that resulted in a capital gain of 100,000.
Large Ltd has Taxable Total Profits of 1M and Small Ltd has Taxable Total Profits of 100,000 excluding the chargeable gain. Large Ltd holds
no other shareholdings.
Discuss the elections available to minimize the groups corporation tax liability.
Paper F6
Chapter 23
INHERITANCE TAX
Introduction
The majority of UK taxpayers will only experience chargeability to Inheritance Tax (IHT) on one occasion when they die! If their
Chargeable Estate exceeds the nil rate band, currently 325,000, the excess will be taxed at 40%.
If only the assets still owned at the time of death were to be taxable, deathbed gifting, giving assets away just prior to death, would
effectively avoid this tax. This means that certain lifetime gifts, those made within 7 years of death, will also become chargeable
on the death of the taxpayer. In addition there are also some transfers made in lifetime, transfers into trusts that will generate
immediate chargeability to IHT as well as chargeability on death.
Transfer of Value
IHT is a cumulative donor based tax and for it to arise an individual must make a transfer of value i.e. a gift, computed as the loss to
the estate of the donor. This is calculated as the difference in estate value before and after the gift of the asset.
The amount of tax that may be payable on a transfer of value is based on the cumulative amount of transfers made by the donor
over a 7 year period.
For most assets the transfer of value will be the same as the open market value of the asset e.g. gifting a property worth 250,000
or cash of 100,000, but for some assets, notably shares in unquoted companies the transfer of value may be considerably higher
than the market value of the asset being gifted.
Illustration 1
A owns 60% of the shares in A Ltd. A Ltd has 100,000 1 ordinary shares in issue.
Share valuations have been agreed as follows:
20%
10 per share
40%
15 per share
60%
25 per share
80%
40 per share
Compute the transfer of value if A were to die leaving his shares to his daughter, or alternatively if he were to make a
lifetime gift of 20,000 shares to his daughter.
If A died owning his 60,000 shares, a 60% shareholding, they would be valued at 25 per share i.e. 60,000 @ 25 = 1,500,000.
If, however, he were to give 20,000 shares in lifetime the transfer of value would not be based on the value of a 20% interest i.e. 10
per share, but would be computed as the difference between the value of his estate before and after the transfer:
Before
After
Transfer of Value
60,000 shares (60%) @ 25 =

40,000 shares (40%) @ 15 =
1,500,000
600,000
900,000
A transfer of value will arise by the gift of an asset either in lifetime and / or on death. For most taxpayers, as stated above, their
only transfers of value will arise as a result of their death.
135
136
Paper F6
Chapter 23
INHERITANCE TAX
The Death Estate

On death the assets owned by the deceased are valued and included in the death estate. If the deceased was UK domiciled, all
assets owned are included in the death estate. If non UK domiciled, only assets situated in the UK are included.
If a property held in the estate is mortgaged, the mortgage will reduce the property value if it is a repayment or interest only
mortgage. Endowment mortgages are not deducted as they are repaid on death by the life assurance part of that mortgage. The
estate should also include the proceeds of any separate life assurance policy on the deceaseds life, not the market value of the
policy at the date of death.
The value of the estate will be reduced by any legally enforceable debts due at that date e.g. credit card bills, plus funeral expenses
and by exempt bequests.
Bequests are exempt IHT if made to:
t
Spouse / Civil Partner
The available nil rate band is deducted from the value of the chargeable estate. The nil rate band is 325,000 in 2014/15.
The available nil rate band is the 325,000 reduced by the value of any lifetime chargeable transfers made by the deceased in the
7 years before death. The balance of the estate is then taxed at 40%.
This IHT liability has to be paid by the Personal Representatives before they get letters of probate allowing the estate to be distributed,
but is anyway due 6 months after the end of the month in which the taxpayer died. The IHT is suffered by the beneficiaries, usually
the residuary legatee of the estate the person receiving the balance of the estate after any specific legacies have been paid out.
Illustration 2
Dee Parted, a spinster (never married), died on 1st February, 2015 leaving an estate valued at 0..75M. She had made no chargeable
transfers of value in her lifetime and now bequeathed her estate to be split equally between her nieces and nephews.
Compute the IHT liability arising as a result of Dees death and state the date by which the liability should be paid.
Dee Parted
Chargeable Estate at Death February 1, 2015
Net Assets
Chargeable Estate
IHT
325,000 @ Nil
425,000 @ 40%
750,000
000
750
750
= Nil
= 170,000
The Personal Representatives will be required to pay the IHT liability of 170,000 by 31 August 2015. The tax will come out of the
estate and hence is borne by the nieces and nephews.
Illustration 3
As in Illustration 2 but Dee had made a lifetime chargeable transfer of value of 200,000 in June 2012.
Compute the IHT liability arising as a result of Dees death
As the chargeable transfer made in lifetime falls within the 7 years before the date of death it will become chargeable as a result of
Dees death. It will however fall within the nil rate band of 325,000 in force at the date of death so no IHT will be payable thereon.
This will however mean that only 125,000 of nil rate band will now be available in taxing the estate at death. The IHT payable on
the Chargeable Estate at Death will now be computed as follows:
IHT
125,000 @ Nil
= Nil
625,000 @ 40%
= 250,000
750,000
Paper F6
Chapter 23
INHERITANCE TAX
Illustration 4
If in the above Illustration 2, Dee was a widow and had received all of her husbands estate on his earlier death the husband would
have made no chargeable transfers as transfers between spouses are exempt. This would mean that 100% of his nil rate band would
have been unused. As Dee has then died, a claim may be made for the unused proportion (100%) of the husbands nil rate band to
transfer to Dee. Thus Dees nil rate band will now be:
325,000 + (100% x 325,000) = 650,000
This will therefore allow an additionalamount of tax of 130,000 (40% x 325,000) to be saved.
Note that irrespective of the level of nil rate band that existed at the date of her husbands death, Dee will now benefit from an extra
100% of the available nil rate band when she dies.
Lifetime transfers are either Exempt Transfers (as noted above), Potentially Exempt Transfers (PET) or Chargeable Lifetime Transfers
(CLT).
Potentially Exempt Transfers (PET)

A PET is a lifetime gift made by an individual to another individual.
With a PET, the original assumption is that the gift will be exempt IHT. There is therefore no IHT liability at the date of the gift.
If the donor survives more than 7 years from making the gift, the PET becomes fully exempt and is ignored for IHT purposes
(though it may still use up annual exemptions (see later note)).
If the donor dies within 7 years of making the gift, it becomes chargeable on the death of the donor. IHT is then payable at 40% on
the value of the gift (less any available nil rate band). If the taxpayer did survive for at least 3 years, however from the date of the
gift, any IHT charge is reduced by the available taper relief (see note 5 below). Any IHT payable on the PET is paid by the donee.
Where more than one PET has occurred within the 7 years before death the nil rate band is applied strictly on a chronological basis
the earlier transfers benefit first from the nil rate band!
Illustration 5
As in Illustration 3 but Dee had made 2 chargeable transfers in lifetime of 200,000 each, the first in June 2012 and the second in
August 2012.
Compute the IHT liabilities arising as a result of Dees death.
As Dee has made PETs within 7 years of the date of death these now become chargeable along with the Chargeable Estate and the
IHT may be computed as follows:
Lifetime Transfers Chargeable on Death
June 2012
PET
August 2012
125,000 @ Nil
75,000 @ 40%
200,000
PET
= Nil
= 30,000
Gross Transfers
200,000
200,000
400,000
IHT
nil
30,000
The 30,000 liability will be paid by the donee of the gift.

As the Nil rate band has been fully used on the lifetime transfers the entire chargeable estate of 750,000 will be taxed at 40% giving
a further liability of 300,000 to be paid by the Personal Representatives.
It can be seen therefore that if the taxpayer survives for more than 7 years from the date of the PET it will be both exempt in its
own right and in addition will have no effect on the chargeability of either those lifetime transfers falling within the 7 years before
death or on the chargeable estate itself.
Illustration 6
If in Illustration 3 and 5 there had been an earlier PET of 200,000 8 years before the date of death, this would be exempt and would
have no effect on the amount of IHT payable.
137
138
Paper F6
Chapter 23
INHERITANCE TAX
Taper Relief
If a taxpayer does not survive for 7 years following the PET but does survive for at least 3 years any IHT payable on the transfer is
reduced by taper relief. The relief is applied to the tax charge as follows:
Time from transfer to date of death
Relief
3 4 years
20%
4 5 years
40%
5 6 years
60%
6 7 years
80%
(This table is provided in the examination)

Illustration 7
As in Illustration 5 but the 2 lifetime transfers of 200,000 occurred in January 2009 and June 2011 respectively.
Compute the amount of IHT payable as a result of Dees death.
January 2009
PET
June 2011
125,000 @ Nil
75,000 @ 40%
PET
= Nil
= 30,000
As the PET falls between 3-4 years from the date of death
The tax charge may be reduced by taper relief of 20%
Less; Taper Relief (20%)
Gross Transfers
200,000
200,000
400,000
IHT
nil
30,000
(6,000)
24,000
As in Illustration 5 the nil rate band has been fully utilised on the lifetime transfers made in the 7 years before death so the entire
chargeable estate of 750,000 is taxed at 40% giving an IHT liability of 300,000.
It can now be seen that the amount of tax that arises on either transfers made in lifetime or on death cannot be computed in
isolation and is nothing to do with the circumstances of the donee. IHT is a cumulative donor based tax.
Chargeable Lifetime Transfers (CLT)

A CLT is a transfer made in lifetime into a trust.
With a CLT, IHT is chargeable at the date of the gift using the nil rate band in force at that date. For transfers made before 2014/15
the relevant nil rate band limit will be provided by the examiner. If IHT is payable it should be paid 6 months after the end of the
month in which the transfer was made, but earliest the 30th April following the end of the tax year in which the transfer took place.
For example tax payable on a CLT made in December 2014 will be payable by June 30, 2015, whereas if the CLT was made in June
2014 then the IHT would not be payable until April 30, 2015.
The gross rate of IHT on transfers above the nil rate band is 20% and is applied if the tax is being paid by the donee (i.e. the trustees
of the trust).
If the tax is paid by the donor the transfer is said to be a net transfer and the gift has to be grossed up as the IHT payable by the
donor effectively becomes part of the gift. The simple solution to this problem is to apply a net IHT rate of 25% to any part of the net
gift in excess of the available nil rate band at that date. The gross amount of this transfer is then computed by adding the amount
of IHT to the net transfer.
Paper F6
Chapter 23
INHERITANCE TAX
Illustration 8
Kay Babb made a chargeable transfer into a trust of 400,000 in June 2010. She has made no previous lifetime transfers. The nil rate
band in the 2010/11 tax year was 325,000.
Compute the amount of IHT payable, assuming firstly the trustees paid any IHT due, and then that Kay paid any IHT due.
Lifetime Transfers Chargeable When Made
CLT
325,000 @ Nil
75,000 @ 20%
Gross Transfers
400,000
400,000
IHT
15,000
= Nil
= 15,000
If Kay paid the tax the first 325,000 is still within the nil rate band but the excess 75,000 is now taxed at 25%. This tax is then added
to the 400,000 to establish the gross amount of the gift:
400,000
418,750
18,750
CLT
As a CLT is immediately chargeable to IHT, it goes into the donors IHT cumulation, using up his nil band for the next 7 years.
If the donor dies within 7 years of a CLT, additional death tax may be due to top up the lifetime tax paid. The IHT liability is calculated
in the same way as the tax on a PET, with credit given for taper relief and then any lifetime tax paid.
Illustration 9
Having made the chargeable transfer of 400,000 into the trust in June 2010 Kay then died in December 2014 leaving a chargeable
estate of 1M.
Compute the IHT payable as a result of Kays death. Assume that the trustees paid the tax payable in lifetime as shown
in Illustration 8.
Gross Transfers
IHT
June 2010
CLT
400,000
30,000
325,000 @ Nil
= Nil
75,000 @ 40%
= 30,000
(The tax charge is now reduced by any available taper relief as with PETs but also by any lifetime tax that was paid)
Less:
Taper Relief (40%) (4-5 years)
Less:
Lifetime Tax Paid
Additional Tax Due on Death
(12,000)
18,000
(15,000)
3,000
If the lifetime tax paid exceeded the amount of tax now due, no additional tax would be payable, but equally there would be no
repayment of lifetime tax paid.
139
140
Paper F6
Chapter 23
INHERITANCE TAX
Lifetime Exemptions
The following exemptions are available against lifetime gifts
t
Annual exemption (AE).
t
The first 3,000 of gift each tax year is exempt. Any unused AE is carried forward a
maximum of one tax year for use after that years own AE The exemption is allocated on
a strict chronological basis within the tax year.
Marriage exemption.
A gift in consideration of marriage / civil partnership is exempt up to certain limits.

For each of the parents of the bride or groom, the first 5,000 is exempt. For remoter
ancestors (e.g. grandparents) and for the parties to the marriage themselves the
exemption is 2,500. For others, the exemption is 1,000.
These exemptions, firstly marriage, if available and then annual exemption(s) are deducted from the transfer of value to compute
the amount of chargeable transfer.
t
t
t
Small gifts.
Gifts of up to 250 per donee per tax year are exempt. However, if this limit is exceeded,
the exemption is lost.
Gifts for family maintenance.
Any gifts made to maintain family members are fully exempt.
Regular gifts out of income.
For this exemption, the donor must show a regular pattern of giving. Also the donor
must have enough income left to retain their normal standard of living.
Illustration 10
Compute the Chargeable transfer figure for each of the following lifetime transfers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7 June 2013
12 August 2013
19 September 2013
9 July 2014
25 December 2014
25 March 2015
a gift to her daughter of 2,000

a wedding present to her son of 5,500
a gift to her husband of 20,000
a gift to her nephew as a wedding gift of 8,000
gifts of 200 each to two friends as a Christmas gift
a gift to a trust of a valuable painting worth 100,000
The gift on 19 September 2013 is exempt as a transfer between spouses and the gifts on 25 December 2014 are exempt as they are
covered by the small gifts exemption.
The chargeable transfer figures are then computed as follows:
Transfer of value
Less: Exemptions
AE 2013/14
Marriage
AE 2013/14
Marriage
AE 2014/15
AE 2013/14 (b/f balance unused)
Chargeable Transfer
7/6/2013
PET
2,000
12/8/2013
PET
5,500
9/7/2014
PET
8,000
25/3/2015
CLT
100,000
(1,000)
(3,000)
(500)
3,500
100,000
(2,000)
(5,000)
(500)
nil
nil
Note: although the 2012/13 AE is unused and would be brought forward into the 2013/14 tax year, it may only be used after the
2013/14 AE has itself been fully utilised. The 2013/14 AE is not however fully used and a balance of 500 is carried forward
into 2014/15 for use after that years own AE, while the 2012/13 AE is lost.
INHERITANCE TAX
Paper F6
Chapter 23
Approach to Exam Questions

In an examination question the following approach should be adopted:
(1)
Compute the chargeable transfer for each lifetime gift (as per illustration 10)
(2)
If any CLTs have been made the computation for Lifetime Transfers Chargeable When Made must be prepared ( as per
illustration 8). To compute any tax payable it must be ascertained who paid the tax, donor or donees, to determine the tax
rate to apply above the nil rate band
(3)
Any lifetime transfers, CLTs or PETs within the 7 years of death are now included in the computation for Lifetime Transfers
Chargeable On Death (as per illustrations 7 and 9).
(4)
The Chargeable Estate is now established and the tax thereon computed.
In short exam questions not all of the above steps may be necessary and hence the steps should be applied as applicable to the
question set.
It may also be required to state by whom and by when the IHT should be paid.
E XAMPLE 1
Joe Kerr died on April 1 2015, leaving 250,000 to his wife and the remainder of his estate to his son.
At the date of his death Joe owned the following assets:
(1)
His principal private residence valued at 300,000 upon which the outstanding repayment mortgage at the date of death
was 80,000
(2)
A holiday home valued at 140,000
(3)
Bank and Building Society Deposits amounting to 230,000
(4)
ISAs with a market value of 50,000
(5)
12,000 Shares in Joe Ltd valued at 20 per share
(6)
A life assurance policy with an open market value at April 1 2015 of 125,000 from which proceeds of 140,000 were
received following Joes death.
Joe had outstanding credit card bills of 6,000 at the date of his death and had also verbally promised to pay the medical expenses of
1,000 of a friend. Funeral expenses amounted to 6,000.
During his lifetime he had made the following lifetime transfers:
(1)
On 20 November 2008 a cash gift of 40,000 to his son on the occasion of his wedding.
(2)
On 15 July 2009 he transferred 405,000 into a trust and paid the IHT due thereon
(3)
On 8 December 2013 he gave 4,000 shares in Joe Ltd to his son. Prior to the gift Joe owned 16,000 of the 20,000 shares in
Joe Ltd. Share valuations agreed with HMRC at this date were as follows:
20% shareholding 8 per share
40%
,,
12 ,,
60%
,,
18 ,,
80%
,,
25 ,,
The nil rate band for the tax year 08/09 was 312,000 and 325,000 for 09/10.
Compute the amount of IHT payable during Joes lifetime and upon his death.
141
142
INHERITANCE TAX
Paper F6
Chapter 23
INHERITANCE TAX
Paper F6
Chapter 23
The 7 year cumulation period

In the illustrations so far, apart from illustration 6, all the lifetime transfers, both PETs and CLTs have taken place within the 7 years
prior to death and have all therefore been chargeable to IHT on the death of the taxpayer. The earliest / oldest transfers within this
period are first to use the nil rate band with the later transfers and / or the chargeable estate at death then being taxed at 40%.
If PETs have been made more than 7 years before the date of death they were neither chargeable when made nor chargeable on
death (illustration 6) they are exempt IHT and are ignored when looking at the 7 year cumulation period used to compute the
IHT on transfers that do fall within the 7 years of death and which are therefore chargeable.
The most difficult concept to grasp, however, is how to deal with a CLT made more than 7 years before death. These transfers were
chargeable when made using the nil rate band in force at that date but are not chargeable on death as the taxpayer has survived
for the required 7 years.
The 7 year cumulation period, however means that when computing the IHT on either a PET or CLT made within the 7 years of
death it is necessary to take account of any CLT made within the 7 years prior to it, so as to determine how much nil rate band, if
any, remains to use against that transfer.
e.g. If an individual dies in January 2015 having made a CLT in June 2005, this CLT will not be taxable on the death as he survived
for more than 7 years. If he had also made a PET in August 2011 this will be taxable. In computing the nil rate band available to
go against the PET, however, the 325,000 will be reduced by the amount of the June 2005 CLT as it had been made within the 7
years prior to the PET.
E XAMPLE 2
Dee Ceased died on 1 March 2015 with a Chargeable Estate of 500,000 having made the following lifetime gifts:
1 October 2002
100,000 cash to son
1 June 2003
278,000 cash into a trust
1 September 2009 296,000 cash to daughter
Required:
(a)
Calculate the IHT payable on the lifetime gifts when they were made assuming that Dee paid any lifetime tax due
(b) Calculate the IHT payable as a result of Dees death.
Nil rate bands are as follows:
02/03
250,000
03/04
255,000
09/10
325,000
143
144
INHERITANCE TAX
Paper F6
Chapter 23
10 IHT Planning
As the Chargeable Estate of the taxpayer is charged at 40% above the nil rate band, making lifetime transfers is the easiest way an
individual may reduce the IHT liability that would otherwise arise upon his death. This of course assumes that the individual has
both the capacity and willingness to make such gifts.
If an individual makes regular lifetime gifts to others out of his income these transfers will be exempt as normal expenditure out
of income.
Other gifts to individuals will be PETs:
t
t
t
these will only become chargeable if the donor dies within 7 years of having made them
if the individual dies within 7 years the value of the transfer is frozen at the time of the transfer. It is therefore beneficial to
gift in lifetime those assets that are likely to increase in value over time
if the donor survives for at least 3 years then any IHT payable thereon is reduced by taper relief
Paper F6
Chapter 24
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
VAT registration
1.1
Compulsory registration historical turnover

(a)
Trader
Supplies (i.e. sales) may be
Standard rated 20%
Zero rated 0%
Exempt
Taxable supplies are those that are either standard rated or zero rated. Trader is able to register for VAT and must then account
for output VAT on sales but may reclaim input VAT on purchases and expenses, both capital and revenue expenditure. If a
trader only makes exempt supplies he is unable to register for VAT and cannot reclaim input VAT
(b)
(c)
(d)
A trader making taxable supplies must register for VAT if during the previous 12 months the value of taxable supplies
exceeded 81,000. However, VAT registration is not required if taxable supplies in the following 12 months will not exceed
79,000. These figures are exclusive of VAT.
HMRC must be notified within 30 days after the end of the period when taxable supplies exceeded 81,000.
The trader will be registered from the end of the month following the month in which the limit was exceeded, or from an
earlier agreed date.
E XAMPLE 1
Orchid Ltd commenced trading on 1 June 2014. Its sales are as follows:
2014
June
3,900
2015
January
July
3,800
February
August
4,300
March
September
5,100
April
October
4,700
May
November
4,700
June
December
4,900
July
The companys sales are all standard rated.
4,800
6,000
6,100
7,900
8,200
11,800
13,500
State
(a)
When Orchid Ltd will become liable to compulsory VAT registration
(b) The date by which Orchid Ltd must notify HMRC
(c)
The date Orchid Ltd will be registered from
145
146
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
1.2
Paper F6
Chapter 24
Compulsory registration future turnover

(a)
A trader must also register for VAT if taxable supplies will exceed 81,000 during the following 30 days. This is regardless of
any taxable supplies preceding this 30 day period. Again the figure is exclusive of VAT.
(b) HMRC must be notified by the end of the 30 day period
(c)
The trader will be registered from the beginning of the 30 day period.
E XAMPLE 2
Tulip Ltd commenced trading on 1 April 2015, and its forecast income is 90,000 per month. The companys sales are all standard rated.
State the date that Tulip Ltd must notify HMRC by and the date from which the company will be registered.
1.3
Voluntary VAT Registration

(a)
A trader may decide to voluntarily register for VAT where taxable supplies are below the 81,000 registration limit. This will
be beneficial when:
The trader makes zero-rated supplies. Input VAT will be reclaimed, but no VAT will be charged on the zero-rated
outputs.
(b)
The trader makes supplies to VAT registered customers. Input VAT will be reclaimed, and it should be possible to
charge output VAT on top of the pre-registration selling price. This is because the output VAT will be recoverable by
the customers.
It will probably not be beneficial to voluntarily register for VAT where customers are members of the general public, as such
customers cannot recover the output VAT charged. If selling prices cannot be increased, the output VAT will become an
additional cost.
Whether or not output VAT can be passed on to customers will also be an important factor when deciding whether to
remain below the VAT registration limit, or whether it is beneficial to accept additional work that results in the limit being
exceeded.
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Paper F6
Chapter 24
E XAMPLE 3
Vine Ltd has been in business for a number of years. All of its sales are standard rated and are to the general public. The company is not
registered for VAT. At present, Vine Ltds annual income is 78,000.
The company is planning to put up its prices, and this will increase annual income to 84,000. There is no further scope for any price
increases. Vine Ltds standard rated expenses are 4,800 p.a. (inclusive of VAT).
Determine if it is beneficial for Vine Ltd to put up its prices.
1.4
1.5
Pre-registration Input VAT

(a)
Input VAT incurred prior to registration can be recovered in certain circumstances.
(b) The circumstances in which a trader will be allowed to recover input VAT incurred on goods purchased and services incurred
prior to the date of VAT registration are as follows:
Inventory & non-current assets must be acquired for business purposes, and not be sold or consumed prior to
registration.
The goods were not acquired more than four years prior to registration.
Services must be supplied for business purposes.
The services were not supplied more than six months prior to registration.
VAT Deregistration
(a)
A trader stops being liable to VAT registration when it ceases to make taxable supplies. The trader must notify HMRC within
30 days, and will then be deregistered from the date of cessation or from an agreed later date.
(b) A trader can also request voluntarily VAT deregistration if expected taxable supplies in next 12 months are less than 79,000
147
148
Paper F6
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Chapter 24
Illustration 1
Iris Ltd has been registered for VAT since 1990, and its sales are all standard rated. The company has recently seen a downturn in its
business activities, and sales for the years ended 30 June 2015 and 2016 are forecast to be 60,000 and 49,500 respectively.
Iris Ltd can request that HMRC cancel its VAT registration because its taxable supplies during the following 12-month
period will not exceed 79,000.
This is provided the fall in the value of taxable supplies is not due to the temporary or permanent cessation of taxable
supplies.
The companys VAT registration will be cancelled from the date on which the request is made or from an agreed later
date.
t
t
t
(c)
(d)
There is a deemed supply of business assets such as plant, equipment and trading inventory when a company ceases to be
registered for VAT, unless VAT due is 1,000
If a business disposes of its assets and trade as a going concern no output VAT will be charged as it will be outsaide the scope
of VAT. The conditions for this treatment are:
- the business is transferred as a going concern
- no significant break in trading
- same type of trade pursued by transferee
- the transferee is or will become VAT registered
Illustration 2
Daisy is a self-employed builder. She is registered for VAT. The business has been quite successful, and Daisy therefore incorporated
her trade into a new limited company on 30 April 2015. All of the business assets were transferred to the new company in return for
ordinary share capital.
No output VAT will have to be charged on the value of inventory and other assets on which VAT has been claimed,
since the business is transferred as a going concern.
t
t
t
The company must be or will be VAT registered

The company will be able to take over Daisys VAT registration number.
The Tax Point

(a)
(b)
It is very important to correctly identify the time of supply or tax point, as this determines when output VAT will be due.
The VAT rules that determine the tax point in respect of a supply of goods are as follows:
The basic tax point is the date goods are made available to the customer or service completed.
If an invoice is issued or payment received before the basic tax point, then this becomes the actual tax point.
If an invoice is issued within 14 days of the basic tax point, the invoice date will usually replace that in (a).
Output VAT and Input VAT
3.1
Major points
There are several important exam points regarding output VAT and input VAT as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
VAT is only chargeable on the net amount where a discount is offered for prompt payment.
Relief for irrecoverable (impaired) debts is only available if the output VAT has been accounted for and paid and debt is over
six months old as measured from the time that payment was due. The relief is claimed as input VAT on the VAT return
Input VAT cannot be recovered in respect of business entertainment of UK customers or on motor cars (unless they are used
100% for business purposes).
Input VAT cannot be recovered in relation to private use by a proprietor of a business
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Paper F6
Chapter 24
E XAMPLE 4
Rose Ltd is registered for VAT, and its sales are all standard rated. The following information relates to the companys VAT return for the
quarter ended 31 March 2015:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Standard rated sales amounted to 120,000. Rose Ltd offers its customers a 5% discount for prompt payment.
Standard rated purchases and expenses amounted to 35,640. This figure includes 480 for entertaining UK customers.
On 15 March 2015 the company wrote off irrecoverable debts of 2,000 and 840 in respect of invoices due for payment on 10
May and 5 December 2014 respectively.
On 31 March 2015 the company purchased a motor car at a cost of 16,450 for the use of a salesperson, and machinery at a cost of
21,150. Both these figures are inclusive of VAT. The motor car is used for both business and private mileage.
Unless stated otherwise, all of the above figures are exclusive of VAT.
Calculate the VAT payable for the quarter ended 31 March 2015.
3.2
The refund of VAT

The refund of VAT that has been overpaid is subject to a four-year time limit.
Motor Expenses
(a)
Input VAT can be recovered where fuel is used for private mileage (either by a sole trader or an employee), but output VAT
must be accounted for. Output VAT is calculated according to a scale charge based on the cars CO2 emissions.
Note: The scale charge, which is VAT inclusive, will be given to you in the examination.
(b)
Provided there is some business use, input VAT can be fully recovered in respect of repairs to a motor car.
149
150
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Paper F6
Chapter 24
E XAMPLE 5
Poppy Plc is to provide one of its directors with a company motor car which will be used for both business and private mileage.
The company will pay for all the running costs of the motor car, including petrol and repairs. The relevant quarterly scale charge is 445 for
quarter to 31 March 2015 based on the cars CO2 emission rating.
State the VAT treatment of the cost of petrol and repairs for the quarter to 31 March 2015.
VAT Returns
(a)
VAT returns are normally completed on a quarterly basis. Each return shows the total output VAT and total input VAT for the
quarter to which it relates. All businesses are now required to file VAT returns and make VAT payments online. VAT returns
must be filed online and electronic payment made by one month and seven days after the end of the VAT return period. For
example for the quarter ended 30 June 2015 a business has until 7 August 2015 to file its VAT return online and electronically
make its VAT payment
Illustration 3
For the quarter ended 31 March 2015 Buttercup Ltd had output VAT of 12,400 and input VAT of 7,100.
Buttercup Ltds VAT return for the quarter ended 31 March 2015 should be submitted by 7 May 2015. VAT of 5,300 (12,400 7,100) is payable, and this is due by 7 May 2015 when the VAT return is submitted..
(b)
(c)
(d)
Because VAT is a self-assessed tax, HMRC make control visits to VAT registered traders. The purpose of a control visit is to
provide an opportunity for HMRC to check the accuracy of VAT returns.
A business may choose to submit monthly returns but would only do so if it received regular VAT repayments. This would
arise where the business had standard rated purchases and expenses but made zero rated sales and hence always had more
input tax than output tax and therefore would claim a repayment.
If a traders VAT liability exceeds 2,000,000 over a 12 month period; they must make monthly payments on account of the
VAT liability.
VAT Invoices
A VAT registered trader making a supply to another taxable person must issue a VAT invoice within 30 days of the relevant tax point.
A VAT invoice must contain certain information.
Paper F6
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Chapter 24
Illustration 4
Daffodil Ltd only sells goods, and at present issues sales invoices that show (1) the invoice date and invoice number, (2) the type of
supply, (3) the quantity and a description of the goods supplied, (4) Daffodil Ltds name and address, and (5) the name and address
of the customer. The company does not offer any discount for prompt payment.
Daffodil Ltd wants to know the additional information that it will have to show on its sales invoices in order that these are valid for
VAT purposes.
The following information is required:
the VAT registration number;
the tax point;
the rate of VAT for each supply;
the VAT-exclusive amount for each supply;
the total VAT-exclusive amount;
the amount of VAT payable.
The Default Surcharge

A new penalty system is being introduced over a period of years for the late filing of VAT returns and late payment of tax. This
system has not yet been implemented by HMRC and hence the examiner has stated that it will be the existing penalty / default
surcharge system that will continue to be examined in the 2015 examinations.
(a)
(b)
(c)
A default occurs if a VAT return is not submitted on time or a payment of VAT is made late.
On the first default, HMRC serve a surcharge liability notice on the trader. The notice specifies a surcharge period, starting
on the date of the notice and ending on the twelve-month anniversary of the end of the VAT period to which the default
relates.
If the trader has a further default during the surcharge period there are two consequences:
the surcharge period is extended to the twelve-month anniversary of the VAT period to which the new default relates
(d)
(e)
if the default involves the late payment of VAT, then the trader will be subject to a surcharge penalty.
There is therefore no surcharge penalty where a late VAT return involves the repayment of VAT.
The rate of surcharge penalty depends on the number of defaults in the surcharge period:
Default in the surcharge period
First
Second
Third
Fourth or more
Surcharge as a percentage of the VAT unpaid at the due date

2%
5%
10%
15%
Surcharge penalties at the rates of 2% and 5% are not made for amounts less than 400.
Where the rate of surcharge is 10% or 15%, the minimum surcharge is 30.
(f)
In order to escape from the surcharge liability period, a trader must submit four consecutive quarterly VAT returns on time
and also pay any VAT due on time.
E XAMPLE 6
Bluebell Ltd has submitted its VAT returns as follows:
Quarter ended
VAT paid ()
Date submitted
30 September 2013
3,100
5 December 2013
31 December 2013
21,300
2 March 2014
31 March 2014
4,300
25 April 2014
30 June 2014
7,600
24 July 2014
30 September 2014
1,900
25 October 2014
31 December 2014
3,200
27 January 2015
31 March 2015
6,900
16 May 2015
Bluebell Ltd paid the VAT due on the same date that the VAT returns were submitted.
State the consequences for Bluebell Ltd of the late submission of the VAT returns.
151
152
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Paper F6
Chapter 24
Penalties and Interest
8.1
Failure to notify liability for registration or change in the nature of supplies by persons exempted from registration
There will be a standard penalty based on a percentage of the VAT lost during the period from when the notification should have
been made until it is actually made.
The actual penalty payable is linked to the taxpayers behaviour.
(a)
There will be no penalty where the taxpayer has a reasonable excuse for the failure to notify
(b) There will be a penalty of 30% of the tax unpaid where there is non-deliberate failure to notify
(c)
There will be a penalty of 70% of the tax unpaid where there is deliberate failure to notify
(d) There will be a penalty of 100% of the tax unpaid where there is deliberate failure to notify with concealment
However a penalty will be substantially reduced where a taxpayer make a disclosure, especially when this is unprompted by HMRC.
8.2
Errors in a VAT return

A trader that makes an error in a VAT return that results in the underpayment of VAT can be subject to a standard penalty for
submission of an incorrect return and penalty interest. There are three different situations:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Net errors of less than a de-minimis can be voluntarily disclosed by a trader. Correction is made by simply entering the errors
on the next VAT return. There maybe a penalty for submission of an incorrect return, but no interest charged.
Net errors of more than the de-minimis can be voluntarily disclosed by a trader. In this case the trader must disclose the
errors separately to HMRC. Penalty interest will be charged, and there may be a penalty for submission of an incorrect return.
Errors may be discovered as a result of a control visit. Both a penalty for submission of an incorrect return and penalty
interest can be charged.
The de-minimus level is the greater of
10,000 and
8.3
1% turnover (subject to on upper limit of 50,000)
Submission of an incorrect return leading to:

an understatement of VAT liability
t
t
a failure of inflated claim for repayment of tax
The amount of penalty is based on the amount of tax understated, but the actual penalty is linked to the taxpayer behaviour, as
follows:
(a)
there will be no penalty where a taxpayer simply makes a mistake.
(b) there will be a moderate penalty (up to 30% of the understated tax) where a tax payer fails to take reasonable care.
(c)
there will be a higher penalty (up to 70% of the understated tax) if the error is deliberate.
(d) there will be an even higher penalty (up to 100% of the understated tax) where there is also concealment of the error.
A penalty will be substantially reduced where the taxpayer makes disclosure, especially unprompted disclosure to HMRC.
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Paper F6
Chapter 24
E XAMPLE 7
Blanche Ltd has made an error relating to understated output VAT of 8,500 on the VAT return, for quarter to 31 December 2014.
Blanche Ltd has turnover for the quarter of 700,000.
How should this error be disclosed to HMRC and what penalties and interest will be charged by HMRC?
The Cash Accounting and Annual Accounting Schemes

(a)
(b)
The cash accounting and annual accounting schemes are both available to small businesses.
The cash accounting scheme enables a trader to account for output VAT on a cash basis. The scheme will normally be
beneficial where an extended period of credit is taken by customers, and it also results in automatic bad debt relief. The
disadvantage is that input VAT will only be recovered in relation to when payments are made.
Illustration 5
Violet Ltd gives its customers a 30-day credit period, but pays for most of its expenses in cash. Violet wants to know what conditions
must be satisfied before it will be permitted to use the cash accounting scheme, and the implications of using the scheme.
1. Violet Ltd will be able to operate the cash accounting scheme provided its expected taxable turnover for the next 12 months
does not exceed 1,350,000.
2. In addition, the company must be up-to-date with its VAT returns and VAT payments.
3. The scheme will result in the companys tax point becoming the date that payment is received from customers.
4. This will delay the payment of output tax, and also provides for automatic bad debt relief should a customer not pay.
5. Since Violet Ltd pays in cash for its expenses, the companys recovery of input VAT will not be affected
6. Stay in scheme until annual taxable turnover reaches 1,600,000
(c)
The advantage of the annual accounting scheme is mainly administrative, since a trader only has to make one VAT return
each year. Payments on account of the annual VAT liability are normally required. It will also allow easier budgeting for
cashflow.
Illustration 6
Crocus Ltd wants to know the advantages of the annual accounting scheme, and when it will be permitted to join. The companys
annual turnover is 450,000.
1. Crocus Ltd can apply to use the annual accounting scheme provided its expected taxable turnover for the next 12 months
does not exceed 1,350,000.
2. In addition the company must be up-to-date with its VAT returns and payments.
3. However, Crocus Ltd will only be able to use the annual accounting scheme if it has been VAT registered for 12 months.
(Businesses with a turnover of less than 150,000 can join the annual accounting scheme as soon as they register for VAT and
new businesses may base their payments on account (see below) on their estimated VAT liability)
4. Under the scheme only one VAT return is submitted each year. This is due within two months of the end of the year.
5. Nine monthly payments are made on account, each being 10% of the previous years VAT, in months 4 to 12 of the period with
any balancing payment being made with the VAT return, or they may choose to pay quarterly instead
6. Stay in scheme until annual taxable turnover reaches 1,600,000
153
154
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Paper F6
Chapter 24
10 Flat rate scheme

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
The flat rate scheme is optional. It simplifies the way in which small businesses calculate their VAT liability.
The scheme can be used if the expected taxable turnover for the next 12 months does not exceed 150,000. The business
can stay in the scheme if turnover is 230,000. Turnover is determined by the method used to determine the VAT whilst
in the scheme, that is cash basis or invoice basis.
Under the flat rate scheme, a business calculates its VAT liability by simply applying a flat rate percentage (given by HMRC
based on trade sector) to total income inclusive of VAT and any exempt supplies. This removes the need to calculate and
record output VAT and input VAT.
The flat rate percentage is applied to the gross total income figure, with no input VAT being recovered.
The percentage varies according to the type of trade that the business is involved in, and will be given to you in the
examination.
VAT at the rate of 20% is still treated as being charged where a supply is made to another VAT registered business, and in this
case a VAT invoice must still be issued.
Illustration 7
a. Snowdrop Ltd has annual sales of 120,000, all of which are standard rated and are to the general public. The companys standard
rated expenses are 6,000 p.a. These figures are inclusive of VAT. The relevant flat rate percentage for Snowdrop Ltds trade is 15%.
Using the normal basis of calculating its VAT liability, Snowdrop Ltd will have to pay VAT as follows:
Output VAT (120,000 20/120)

20,000
Input VAT 6,000 20/120)
(1,000)
VAT payable
19,000
If Snowdrop Ltd uses the flat rate scheme then it will pay VAT of 18,000 (120,000 15%). There is a VAT saving of 1,000 (19,000
18,000) in addition to the simplified administration. As none of Snowdrop Ltds customers are VAT registered, there will be no
need to issue VAT invoices.
b. Primrose Ltd has annual sales of 96,000, of which 50% are standard rated and 50% are zero-rated. All of the companys sales
are to VAT registered businesses. The companys standard rated expenses are 30,000 p.a. These figures are inclusive of VAT. The
relevant flat rate percentage for Primrose Ltds trade is 6%. Using the normal basis of calculating its VAT liability, Primrose Ltd will
have to pay VAT as follows:
Output VAT (96,000 x 50% x 20/120)

8,000
Input VAT (30,000 x 20/120)
(5,000)
VAT payable
3,000
If Primrose Ltd uses the flat rate scheme then it will pay VAT of 5,760 (96,000 6%). Although the flat rate scheme will result in
simplified administration, it is not beneficial as additional VAT of 2,760 (5,760 3,000) is payable and Primrose Ltd would still
have to issue VAT invoices as its customers are registered for VAT.
11 Group VAT Registration

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Two or more companies can register as a group for VAT purposes. They must be under common control of a third company
and resident in the UK
The group is treated for VAT purposes as if it were a single company registered for VAT on its own.
A representative member of the group is appointed and this company is responsible for completing and submitting a single
VAT return and paying the VAT on behalf of the group.
All companies in the VAT group are jointly and severally liable for any VAT liabilities of the group.
The advantages of group VAT registration are:
No VAT is accounted for on transactions between group members within the VAT group
Only one VAT return is submitted for the group; therefore an administrative advantage.
The group can choose which companies to include or exclude. It would be beneficial to exclude a company making
zero rated sales as it would then be able to continue making monthly returns to get the improved cash flow of
monthly VAT repayments.
The disadvantages of group VAT registration are:
The limits for Cash and Annual Accounting schemes will apply to the group as a whole and not on an individual
company basis.
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Joint and several liability of each company in the group
Possible administration issues collecting information to be passed on to the representative member
Paper F6
Chapter 24
12 UK businesses trading within and outside the European Union.

UK businesses frequently trade with companies/individuals within other European Union (EU) and non EU countries. The VAT
treatment of exports and imports must be appreciated on these transactions.
12.1 Supply of goods
(a)
Trading with non EU countries
Exports
t
The supply of goods is zero rated
Imports
t
The importation of goods involves UK VAT being paid directly to HMRC at point of entry into the UK.
t
This is treated as normal input VAT
t
Regular importers can defer this payment of VAT under the duty deferment scheme if the UK business
provides HMRC with a bank guarantee. The VAT on the import is accounted for on a monthly basis.
(b) Trading with EU countries
(i)
Exports (Dispatches)
t
When a UK VAT registered business supplies goods to another VAT registered business within the EU the
supply is zero rated.
t
If the customer does not have a VAT registration the UK supplier will charge UK VAT at the rate in force at the
time of the supply.
(ii)
Imports (Acquisitions)
t
The VAT registered EU supplier will zero rate the transaction and the UK VAT registered business will self
supply under the reverse charge system for the VAT on its VAT return.
t
Self supply effectively means the UK VAT registered business will calculate UK VAT on the acquisition and
declare it as output VAT on the VAT return.
t
This VAT can then be reclaimed as input VAT, that is the VAT contras out and there is no VAT cost.
t
The only time there will be a VAT cost is if the business makes some exempt supplies as the exempt part of
the business cannot reclaim input VAT.
12.2 Supply of Services
To overseas business customer = outside scope of VAT
t
t
t
To overseas non business customer = standard rated

Service from an overseas business = Self supply / reverse charge system applies as above
E XAMPLE 8
BW Ltd a UK VAT registered UK business acquires 12,000 of goods from its suppliers in the United States of America (Non EU) and 20,000
of goods from its supplier in Germany (EU) in the quarter to 31 March 2015.
In the same VAT quarter BW Ltd exported 50,000 to a VAT registered customer in France (EU) and 10,000 of goods to a non VAT registered
individual in Latvia (EU).
Discuss the VAT implications of the above transactions. (All transactions are stated exclusive of VAT)
155
156
VALUE ADDED TAX VAT
Paper F6
Chapter 24
Paper F6
Chapter 25
SELF ASSESSMENT AND PAYMENT

OF TAX FOR COMPANIES
Corporation tax payment dates
1.1
Notification of chargeability
A company falling within the scope of corporation tax for the first time must notify HMRC when its first accounting period
begins, within 3 months of the start of the accounting period. Failure to notify chargeability to tax within 12 months of the end
of the accounting period will lead to a standard penalty based on a percentage of the tax unpaid 12 months after the end of the
accounting period. The standard penalty is discussed in chapter 24, (VAT) 8.1.
1.2
Payment of tax
(a)
Companies pay tax by self assessment
(b) Estimated tax is payable 9 months and one day after the end of each accounting period (due date), with provisions for
quarterly instalment payments for large companies. Payment must be made electronically
(c)
Interest due to the HMRC on tax paid late will run from the due date to the date of payment at a rate of 3.0% per annum.
(d) Interest on overpayments of tax will run from the later of the due date or the date tax was actually paid at a rate of 0.5%
per annum.
(e)
Under self assessment interest on tax paid late will be deductible against interest receivable.
Interest received on overpaid corporation tax will be taxable as Interest receivable
1.3
Quarterly Instalments
(a)
Quarterly instalments apply to large companies.
(b) A large company is one paying the main rate of corporation tax.
(c)
The instalments are based on the estimated current years liability.
(d) The four quarterly instalments will be made in months 7, 10, 13 and 16 following the start of the accounting period. The
instalments are due on the 14th of the month. Thus for the accounting year ended 31 March 2015 the first quarterly
instalment payment would be due October 14, 2014 followed by further payments due January 14, April 14 and July 14,
2015
(e)
Quarterly payments are not required if
current augmented profits do not exceed 10 million

and
the company was not large in previous CAP.
157
158
SELF ASSESSMENT AND PAYMENT OF TAX FOR COMPANIES
Paper F6
Chapter 25
E XAMPLE 1
Photo plc has Taxable Total Profits for the year ended 31 December 2014 of 2M, its lowest profit figure for several years.
Show how the liability for the year ended 31 December 2014 will be settled.
Corporation tax return

(a)
(b)
Companies that do not receive a tax return are required to notify HMRC if they have income or chargeable gains on which
tax is due. This must be done within 12 months from the end of the accounting period in which the liability arises, otherwise
the standard penalty for late notification will arise (as above 1.1).
Complete accounts and computations are due 12 months after the end of the financial accounting period (this is called
the filing date). If the accounts and computations are filed late there is a fixed penalty of 100. If the return is filed more
than 3months after the filing date the fixed penalty is increased to 200 (This becomes 500 and 1,000 if it is the third
consecutive time the return is late).
Returns must now be made online and any corporation tax paid electronically.
The HMRC software if used will now compute the amount of corporation tax payable.
The tax computation and accounts must be submitted online using inline eXtensible Business Reporting Language (iXBRL).
This is the global standard for reporting business information in electronic format using tags that can be read by a computer.
Small companies with straightforward accounts and tax computations may use the HMRC software but other companies
must use:
- commercial software that automatically inserts tags
- a tagging service
- conversion software that allows tags to be added to accounts and computations
(c)
(d)
Returns may be subject to a random or specific enquiry by the HMRC. Written notice of the HMRCs intention to make an
enquiry is given within 12 months from the date the return is received by HMRC.
There will be an additional corporation tax related penalty of 10% of the tax unpaid 6 months after the return is due, if the
self-assessment tax return is more than six months late, or 20% of the tax unpaid 6 months after the return is due, if more
than 12 months late.

(e)
(b)
(c)
(b)
(c)
Wherever possible claims must be made on a tax return or on an amendment to it and must be quantified at the time the
return is made.
If a company believes it has made an error in a return, an error or mistake claim may be made within four years from the
end of the accounting period.
Other claims must be made within four years of the end of the accounting period unless a different time limit specified.
Companies must keep records until the latest of
six years from the end of the accounting period
the date any enquiries are completed
the date after which enquiries may not be commenced

All businesses records and accounts including contracts and receipts must be kept
Failure to keep records can lead to a penalty or up to 3,000 for each accounting period affected
Enquiries
(a)
(b)
(c)
HMRC may amend a return to correct obvious error within nine months of the day the return is filed. A company may amend
a return within 12 months of the filing date.
Records
(a)
Chapter 25
Claims
(a)
Paper F6
HMRC may enquire into a corporation tax return provided that they first give written notice that they are going to enquire.
The notice must be given within a year after the later of:
12 months following the date the return is actually received by HMRC
If the return is late, 12 months following the relevant quarter days ie 31/1, 30/4, 31/7, 31/10
An enquiry may be made due to:
A suspicion income is understated
Deductions being incorrectly claimed
Other information in HMRCs possession
Being part of a random review process
Determinations and Discovery assessments

(a)
(b)
(c)
If a return is not delivered by the filing date, HMRC may issue a determination of the tax payable within 3 years of the filing
date.
If HMRC believe that not enough tax has been assessed for an accounting period they can make a discovery assessment to
collect the tax.
A discovery assessment can only be made if:
HMRC could not reasonably be expected to have been aware of a loss of tax and are supplied with information to draw their
attention to a contentious matter such as the use of a valuation or estimate. HMRC can raise an assessment within 4 years
from the end of the accounting period; this is extended to 6 years if there is a careless error or 20 years if there is a deliberate
error or failure to notify a chargeability to tax.
159
160
Chapter 25
Appeals and Disputes

(a)
(b)
(c)
Paper F6
The company can appeal against amendments to the corporation tax return.
The appeal must be normally be made within 30 days of the amendment and must state the grounds for appeal.
The appeals procedure is as per VAT - see chapter 24.
Penalties for incorrect returns

The amount of penalty is based on the amount of tax understated, but the actual penalty payable is linked to the taxpayers
behaviour, as follows:
(i)
there will be no penalty where a taxpayer simply makes a genuine mistake.
(ii)
there will be a moderate penalty (up to 30% of the understated tax) where a tax payer fails to take reasonable care.
(iii) there will be a higher penalty (up to 70% of the understated tax) if error is deliberate.
(iv) there will be an even higher penalty (up to 100% of the understated tax) where the error is deliberate and there is
also concealment of the error.
Information and Inspection powers

These are as per VAT - see chapter 24.
Paper F6
Chapter 26
SELF-ASSESSMENT AND PAYMENT

OF TAX FOR INDIVIDUALS
Due dates for payment

Type of income
Trading income
Property Business
profit
due
Employment Income
due
PAYE payments made electronically on the 22nd of the month under the Real Time
Information reporting system.
due
31/1/2016 if higher rate liability
Savings income
Dividend
Dates for 2014/15 assessment

31/1/2015 Payment on account (50% of 13/14 income tax payable by self assessment)
31/7/2015 Payment on account (50% of 13/14 income tax payable by self assessment)
31/1/2016 Balancing payment
No payments on account are due if the previous years tax payable by self assessment was 1,000 or if more than 80% of the tax
liability for the previous year was deducted at source.
Class 4 NIC is payable at the same time as the income tax on trading income.
Note, the taxpayer can claim to reduce payments on account at any time before 31 January following the tax year. This would be
done if actual income tax and class 4 NIC is expected to be less than the previous year. If the claim is incorrect, penalties and interest
will be charged.
The maximum penalty is the difference between the amounts actually paid on account and the amounts that should have been
paid on account.
E XAMPLE 1
Janice is self employed, her tax liability for 2013/14 was as follows:
Total Income tax liability
Less tax deducted at source
Income tax payable by self assessment
Class 4 NIC
12,000
(1,000)
11,000
2,000
13,000
For 2014/15 her total income tax liability was 14,000 with 2,000 being deducted at source. She had a class 4 NIC liability of 2,500 and
a capital gains tax liability of 1,700
Show how her 2014/15 liability will be settled and determine the total amount of tax to be paid on January 31, 2016.
161
162
Paper F6
SELF-ASSESSMENT AND PAYMENT OF TAX FOR INDIVIDUALS
Interest on tax
2.1
Late payments
(a)
Interest is charged on late payment of tax at a rate of 3.0%.
For 2014/15
Payment on account:
Other payments:
(b)
(c)
Chapter 26
Interest runs from 31/1/2015 or 31/7/2015

Interest runs from 31/1/2016
Interest charged is not tax deductible for individuals

In addition late payments of tax will attract a penalty as follows:
If tax is paid more than one month late there will be a penalty of 5% of the amount due.
Further penalties of 5% will be charged where tax is unpaid after six months and again twelve months.
Note:
The penalties only apply to the balancing payment, and not payments on account. They therefore cover income
tax, Class 4 NIC and capital gains tax paid late.
2.2
Repayment
If tax is repaid, HMRC pay interest at a rate of 0.5% p.a. from 31 January, or if later, the date of original payment.
Interest received is not taxable for an individual.
2.3
Capital gains tax

(a)
Capital gains tax is payable on 31 January after tax year 31 January 2016 for 2014/15.
(b) There are no payments on account for capital gains tax.
(c)
Under self assessment, gains must be reported to the HMRC within 6 months of the end of the tax year in which the asset
is sold. (ie by 5 October)
Notification of chargeability
An individual who receives a source of income subject to income tax or capital gains tax must notify HMRC by 5th October
following the end of the tax year the source arose.
Failure to notify HMRC will result in a standard penalty based on a percentage of tax unpaid on 31 January following the end of the
tax year - see chapter 24 (VAT).
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
t
t
t
t
There will be an initial penalty of 100 if the return is filed after the due date
If a return is more than three months late then there will be a daily penalty of 10 per day (for a maximum of 90 days)
If a return is more than six months late a penalty of 5% of the tax due on the return will be charged (subject to a minimum
of 300).
If a return is more than twelve months late a further penalty of 5% of the tax due can be charged, although a higher
percentage will be charged if the failure to submit is deliberate.
Records
(b)
Records must be retained until five years after the filing date, which is 31 January 2021 for the year 2014/15 if the tax payer
is a business or has properties to let. However records must be retained for only one year after the filing date, which is 31
January 2017 for the year 2014/15 if not in business.
A failure to retain records can result in a penalty of up to 3,000.
The maximum penalty will only be charged in serious cases
Claims
(a)
(b)
Individuals complete their own tax return. The first part details income and capital gains for the tax year, the second part
shows the calculation of the income tax liability.
The tax payer has the choice of filing a paper return or filing electronically online. The dates by which a return must be filed
depends on the method used.
All completed and signed paper returns must be filed by 31 October following the end of the tax year
All online electronic returns must be filed by 31 January following the end of the tax year.
The relevant dates for a 2014/15 return are therefore 31 October 2015 (paper returns) and 31 January 2016 (electronic
returns)
The 31 October date will also be the deadline for a taxpayer to complete a paper return if they wish HMRC to prepare a self
assessment on their behalf. For tax returns filed online a self assessment is automatically provided as part of the online filing
service.
HMRC can amend a tax payer self assessment to correct obvious errors or mistakes within nine months of receiving the
return.
The tax payer can give notice to an officer to amend his tax return within 12 months of the 31 January filing date regardless
of whether the return is paper based or filed electronically.
Late filing of returns
(a)
Chapter 26
Self assessment tax return

(a)
Paper F6
All claims and elections which can be made in a tax return must be made in this manner if a return has been issued.
The time limit for making a claim is 4 years from the end of the tax year, unless a different limit is specifically set.
Error or mistake claim

The time limit is 4 years from the end of the tax year to correct errors in a tax return when the tax would otherwise be overcharged,
for 2014/15 this will be 5 April 2017.
Enquiries into returns

HMRC can enquire into a taxpayer return by written notice by the later of:
(a)
(b)
(c)
12 months following the date the return is actually filed.

If the return is late (ie after the filing date), 12 months following the relevant quarter days ie 31/1, 30/4, 31/7, 31/10
An enquiry may be made due to:
A suspicion that income is understated
Deductions being incorrectly claimed
Other information in HMRCs possession
Being part of a random review process
163
164
Paper F6
Chapter 26
10 Determinations and discovery assessments

(a)
(b)
(c)
If a return is not delivered by the filing date, HMRC may issue a determination of the tax payable within three years of the
filing date.
If HMRC believe that not enough tax has been assessed for an accounting period they can make a discovery assessment to
collect the tax.
A discovery assessment can only be made if:
HMRC could not reasonably be expected to have been aware of a loss of tax and are supplied with information to draw their
attention to a contentious matter such as the use of a valuation or estimate. HMRC can raise an assessment within 4 years
from end of the tax year if there is no careless or deliberate behaviour by the taxpayer. This increases to 6 years from the end
of the tax year if there is careless behaviour, and 20 years from the end of the tax year if there is deliberate error or failure to
notify a chargeability to tax.
11 Appeals & Disputes

The individual can appeal against amendments to the income tax return.
The appeal must normally be made within 30 days of the amendment.
The appeal must state the grounds of appeal.
The process of the appeals procedure is as per VAT chapter 24.
12 Penalties for incorrect returns

The amount of penalty is based on the amount of tax understated, but the actual penalty payable is linked to the taxpayers
behaviour, as follows:
(i)
there will be no penalty where a taxpayer makes a genuine mistake.
(ii)
there will be a moderate penalty (up to 30% of the understated tax) where a tax payer fails to take reasonable care.
(iii) there will be a higher penalty (up to 70% of the understated tax) if error is deliberate.
(iv) there will be an even higher penalty (up to 100% of the understated tax) where there is also concealment of the error.
13 Income Tax Fraud

There is a statutory offence of evading income tax. The penalty may be up to seven years in prison or an unlimited fine or both
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 1
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
(a)
Income Tax and NIC - both direct taxes
(b) Corporation tax on profits and NIC in respect of employees - both direct taxes. Employees pay income tax and NIC on salary
(c)
Capital gains tax - direct tax
(d) The business is charged VAT indirect tax
(e)
Corporation tax (companies pay corporation tax on their chargeable gains) - direct tax
(f)
Inheritance tax - direct tax
Chapter 2
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Mr Smith Income tax computation 2014/15
Employment Income
Total income
Taxable income
Non-savings
50,000
50,000
(10,000)
40,000
Total
50,000
50,000
(10,000)
40.000
Tax calculation:
Non Savings
31,865 20%
8,135 40%
40,000
Tax liability
Less: tax suffered at source (PAYE)
Tax payable
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Billy Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Trading income
Bank Deposit interest (8,000 10080)
Total Income
Taxable Income
Tax calculation:
Non Savings
15,000 @ 20% =
Savings
10,000 @ 20%
Tax liability
Less tax deducted @ source:
Bank deposit interest 10,000 @ 20%
Tax payable
6,373
3,254
9,627
(9,627)
Non-savings income Savings income
25,000
25,000
(10,000)
15,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
Total
25,000
10,000
35,000
(10,000)
25,000
3,000
2,000
5,000
(2,000)
3,000
Note: The starting rate for savings income is not applicable as non savings taxable income exceeds 2,880
165
166
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
Billy Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Non-savings
income
25,000
Trading income
Bank Deposit interest 16,000 10080
Total Income
Taxable income
25,000
(10,000)
15,000
Savings income
20,000
20,000
20,000
Total
25,000
20,000
45,000
(10,000)
35,000
Tax calculation:
Non Savings
15,000 @ 20% =
3,000
16,865 @ 20% =
3,135 @ 40% =
35,000
3,373
1,254
Savings
Tax liability
Tax payable
7,627
(4,000)
3,627
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Molly Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Bank interest 16,000 10080

Total Income
Taxable income
Tax calculation:
Savings
2,880 @ 10% =
7,120 @ 20%
10,000
Income Tax liability
Bank Deposit interest 20,000 @ 20%
Income Tax repayable
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Molly Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Trading income
Total Income
Taxable income
Savings
20,000
20,000
(10,000)
10,000
Total
20,000
20,000
(10,000)
10,000
288
1,424
1,712
(4,000)
(2,288)
Non-savings
income
11,000
11,000
(10,000)
1000
Savings income
Total
11,000
20,000
31,000
(10,000)
21,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Tax calculation
Non Savings
1000 @ 20% =
200
Savings
(2,880 1000 = 1,880)
1,880 @ 10% =
18,120 @ 20% =
21,000
188
3,624
Income tax liability

Income Tax Payable
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
Daisy Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Employment Income
Bank deposit interest 8,000 10080
Dividends 1,800 10090
Total Income
Taxable income
4,012
(4,000)
12
Non-savings
income
15,000
Savings income
Dividends
10,000
15,000
(10,000)
5,000
10,000
2,000
2,000
10,000
2,000
Total
15,000
10,000
2,000
27,000
(10,000)
17,000
Tax calculation:
Non Savings
5,000 @ 20% =
1,000
10,000 @ 20% =
2,000
2,000 @ 10% =
200
3,200
Savings
Dividends
Less tax deducted @ source
Dividends 2,000 @10%
Bank Deposit Interest 10,000 @ 20%
PAYE
Income Tax Repayable
(200)
(2,000)
(1,112)
(112)
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 7
Daisy Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Employment Income
Total Income
Taxable income
Non-savings
income
35,000
Savings income
Dividends
12,000
35,000
(10,000)
25,000
12,000
2,000
2,000
12,000
2,000
Total
35,000
12,000
2,000
49,000
(10,000)
39,000
167
168
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Tax calculation:
Non savings
25,000
Savings
6,865
5,135
12,000
Dividends:
2,000
20%
5,000
20%
40%
1,373
2,054
32.5%
650

Less: Tax suffered at source
Dividend income (2,000 10%)
Bank deposit interest (12,000 20%)
PAYE
Income Tax Payable
9,077
(200)
(2,400)
(5,705)
772
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 8
Mike Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Non-savings
108,000
108,000
(6,000)
102,000
Employment income
Total income
Less: Personal Allowance (W1)
Taxable Income
Income Tax calculation:
Non Savings
31,865 @ 20% =
70,135 @ 40% =
102,000
Less: Tax deducted at source
PAYE
Income tax Payable
(W1) Normal personal allowance
Less [108,000 100,000]
Revised Personal Allowance
Total
108,000
108,000
(6,000)
102,000
6,373
28,054
34,427
(33,130)
1,297
10,000
(4,000)
6,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 9
Ken Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Trading income
Bank interest 32,000 100/80
Dividends 32,400 100/90
Total Income
Less: Personal allowance (W1)
Taxable Income
Non-savings
130,000
Savings
Dividends
40,000
130,000
()
130,000
40,000
36,000
36,000
40,000
36,000
Total
130,000
40,000
36,000
206,000
()
206,000
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Non Savings
31,865 @ 20% =
98,135 @ 40% =
130,000
6,373
39,254
20,000 @ 40% =
20,000 @ 45% =
40,000
8,000
9,000
Savings
Dividends
36,000 37.5%
13,500
76,127

Dividends 36,000 10%
Bank Interest 40,000 20%
Income tax Payable
(3,600)
(8,000)
64,527

10,000
(53,000)
Less [206,000 100,000]
Restricted to
Nil
[Alternatively as adjusted net income > 120,000 the personal allowance is reduced to nil]
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 10
Personal Allowance
Less
[27,800 27,000]
10,500
(400)
10,100
Personal Allowance
Less [31,100 27,000]
10,500
(2,050)
8,450
However the personal allowance cannot fall below 10,000 (normal) so his allowance is 10,000
James Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Non-savings
102,000
Trading income
Total Income
Taxable income
102,000
(7,000)
95,000
Savings
4,000
4,000
4,000
Total
102,000
4,000
106,000
(7,000)
99,000

Non Savings
Savings
Bank Interest 4,000 20%
Income tax Payable
31,865 @ 20% =
63,135 @ 40% =
95,000
4,000 40%
6,373
25,254
1,600
33,227
(800)
32,427
169
170
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
(W1) Personal allowance
Less [106,000 27,000]
Revised to minimum normal personal allowance
10,500
(39,500)
10,000
As adjusted net income exceeds 100,000, however the normal personal allowance is then restricted
Normal personal allowance
10,000
(3,000)
Less [106,000 100,000]
Revised personal allowance
7,000
PA (born before 6 April 1938)

Net Income
Less: Gross gift aid (400 x 100/80)
ANI
10,660
28,000
(500)
27,500
Less: Income limit

Excess
(27,000)
500
x 50% =
Revised PA
(250)
10,410
Kathy Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Trading income
Total income
Less reliefs Qualifying interest
Net Income
Taxable Income
Non-savings
50,000
50,000
(1,000)
49,000
(10,000)
39,000
Tax calculation:
Non Savings
31,865 @ 20% =
7,135 @ 40% =
39,000
Total
50,000
50,000
(1,000)
49,000
(10,000)
39,000
6,373
2,854
9,227
Elliot Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Trading income
Total Income
Taxable income
Tax calculation
Non Savings
33,865 (W1) @ 20% =
4,135 @ 40% =
38,000
Non-savings
48,000
48,000
(10,000)
38,000
Total
48,000
48,000
(10,000)
38,000
6,773
1,654
8,427
(W1) 31,865 + (1,600 10080) = 33,865
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Thomas Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Trading income
Total Income
Taxable income
Income Tax Non savings
Non Savings
(W3) 39,865 @ 20% =
(W4) 118,135 @ 40% =
2,000 @ 45% =
160,000
Non-savings
160,000
160,000
()
160,000
Total
160,000
160,000
()
160,000
7,973
47,254
900
56,127

less
[(W2)152,000 100,000]
10,000
(26,000)
Nil
(W2) Net Income

Less Gross gift aid payment (6,400 10080)
Adjusted Net income
160,000
(8,000)
152,000
(W3) 31,865 + (6,400 10080) = 39,865

150,000 + (6,400 10080) = 158,000
(W4) 158,000 39,865= 118,135
Kerry Income Tax Computation 2014/15
Trading income
Dividends 2,700 100/90
Total Income
Less reliefs:
Qualifying interest
Net Income
Taxable income
Non-savings
102,000
Savings
Dividends
4,000
102,000
(3,000)
99,000
(10,000)
89,000
4,000
3,000
3,000
4,000
3,000
4,000
3,000
Income Tax
Non Savings
(W3)
37,865 @ 20% =
51,135 @ 40% =
89,000
Savings
4,000 40% =
Dividends
3,000 32.5%
96,000
Total
102,000
4,000
3,000
109,000
(3,000)
106,000
(10,000)
96,000
7,573
20,454
1,600
975
30,602
171
172
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Dividends
3,000 10%
Bank Interest
4,000 20%
Income tax payable
(300)
(800)
29,502
(W1) Standard personal allowance

Less [(W2)100,000 100,000]
10,000
()
10,000
(W2) Net Income

Less Gross gift aid payment (4,800 10080)
Adjusted Net income
106,000
(6,000)
100,000
(W3) 31,865 + (4,800 10080) = 37,865

150,000 + (4,800 10080) = 156,000
If Elton transfers a 5% (say) holding in his property to David, they will automatically be treated as jointly owning the property for tax
purposes and each will be taxed on 50% of the income. Eltons tax liability will be reduced by 4,000 and Davids liability will be computed
as:
Property income
10,000
(10,000)
nil
nil
Tax liability
This will save the couple 4,000

If Elton transferred the ownership of the entire asset then all the income would be assessed on David and hence the remaining 10,000 of
income would now be taxed at 20% instead of 40% achieving a further tax saving of 2,000.
Chapter 3
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
The rent assessable in each case is the rent due for the period 1 July 2014 to 5 April 2015
Expenses incurred in the same period are deductible.
Rent due 912 6,000

4,500
Expenses:
Redecoration
300
Repairs
500
800
Property Income for 2014/15
3,700
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Rent due 300 12

Expenses
Bad debt June 2014 rent
Insurance (312 420) + (912 480)
Drain clearance
Redecoration
Wear and tear (10% 3,300)
3,600
300
465
380
750
330
Property Income for 2014/15

The garage is an improvement, not a repair, and is therefore not deductible.
(2,225)
1,375
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
(a)
Ordinary calculation
Gross rent (85 52)
Less: expenses
Wear & tear (10% 4,420)
Property Income
(b)
4,420
(120)
(442)
3,858
Alternative calculation
Gross rent (85 52)
Less: Rent a Room Relief
Property Income
4,420
(4,250)
170
Barbara should elect for the alternative treatment in 2014/15 by 31 January 2017
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Premium
Rent
Property Income
51 20
60,000
50
(912 5,000)
37,200
3,750
40,950
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Relief available =
37,200
20
= 1,860 p.a.
Chapter 4
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Tax adjusted trading profit for the year ended 31 May 2015
Net profit as per accounts

Add: Items debited in P&L not allowed for tax purposes
Depreciation
Light and heat (40% 1,525)
Motor expenses (9,000/12,000 4,720)
Personal tax work
Purchase of new shop
Rent and rates (40% 3,900)
Decorating private flat
Gift of food hampers
Donation to national charity
Excessive remuneration to Jeremys wife
(15,500 11,000)
Own consumption
Adjusted trading profit
Less: Capital allowances (given)
30,200
4,760
610
3,540
250
1,200
1,560
1,050
640
100
4,500
650
18,860
49,060
(13,060)
36,000
173
174
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 5
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Accounting Year Ended 5 April 2015
WDV b/f at 6 April 2014

Additions Qualifying for AIA
AIA
Disposals
10,000
(10,000)
Small pool WDA

WDV c/f
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Accounting Year ended 5 April 2015

Plant
AIA
Other additions
Motor car (CO2 100g/km)
Motor car (CO2 180g/km)
Disposal
(500)
750
(750)
750
10,750
6,600
(6,600)
6,600
10,600
16,000
(5,724)
Balancing allowance
(9,400)
4,200
(4,200)
70%
WDA @ 8%
WDV c/f
10,000
70%
70%
Main Pool Business use car (1) Business use car (2) Allowances
21,200
13,600
31,800
WDA @ 18%
Main Pool
Allowances
1,250
26,076
16,000
5,724
2,940
(1,280)
70%
896
16,160
14,720
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
WDV b/f
Machinery
Photocopier
AIA (Maximum)
Main Pool
16,000
Short life Asset
520,000
4,000
524,000
(500,000)
500,000
20,000
36,000
(6,480)
WDA @ 18%
WDA @ 18%
4,000
4,000
(720)
WDV c/f
Allowances
29,520
6,480
720
507,200
3,280
Main Pool
29,520
Short life Asset Allowances
3,280
(1,500)
29,520
1,780
(5,314)
5,314
(1,780)
1,780
7,094
24,206
WDV b/f
Disposal
WDA @ 18%
Balancing allowance
WDV c/f
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Year ended 5 April 2015

Addition 1/10/14
Less Disposal 10/04/14
Balancing charge
Main Pool
4,000
2,000
6,000
(8,600)
(2,600)
2,600
Allowances
Main Pool
12,000
4,000
16,000
(5,000)
11,000
(11,000)
Allowances
(2,600)
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Accounting Period ended 31 March 2015
WDV b/ at 1 January 2015

Addition 1 Feb 2015
Less Disposals 31/03/15
Balancing allowance
11,000
175
176
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
Main Pool
WDV b/f
Additions Qualifying for AIA (Special Rate)
Thermal insulation for business building
AIA
Special rate pool
30,000
80%
Business use car
14,000
28,000
(28,000)
Allowances
28,000
Additions Qualifying for AIA (Main)

Computer
Machine
Plant
AIA (500,000 28,000)
60,000
184,000
260,000
504,000
(472,000)
472,000
32,000
Other additions
Motor car (96 -130g/km)
Disposals
11,200
(8,000)
6,000
73,200
(13,176)
WDA @ 18%
(6,000)
80%
Balancing allowance
Additions Qualifying for FYA
Motor car ( 95g/km)
FYA @ 100%
17,000
(17,000)
WDV c/f
13,176
4,800
17,000
534,976
60,024
Chapter 6
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
(a)
2013/14
(b)
2014/15
(c)
2014/15
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
2011/12
Actual (1/01/12 5/04/12)
2012/13
First 12 months (1/01/12 31/12/2012)

1/01/12 30/06/12
1/07/12 31/12/2012
CYB (year to 30/06/13)
2013/14
2014/15
Overlap profits:
CYB (year to 30/06/14)

1/01/12 5/04/12
1/07/12 31/12/2012
36 30,000
612 70,000
15,000
30,000
35,000
65,000
70,000
82,000
15,000
35,000
50,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
2013/14
2014/15
2015/16
Overlap profits
Actual (1/05/13 5/04/14)

12 months to 31/10/14
CYB (y/e 31/10/15)
1/11/13 5/04/14
1118 36,000
1218 36,000
518 36,000
22,000
24,000
30,000
10,000
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
2013/14
CYB (y/e 31/01/14)
2014/15
4 months: 1/02/14 31/05/14

Less: overlap relief
47,000
8,000
(6,000)
2,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Income tax computation 2014/15
Non savings
10,000
54,463
64,463
(10,000)
54,463
Employment Income (3/12 x 40,000)

Trading Profit (W1)
Total Income
Personal allowance
Taxable income
Tax calculation:
31,865 @ 20%
22,598 @ 40 %
54,463
6,373
9,039
15,412
As Wendy started to trade on 1 July 2014 the first tax year of assessment is 2014/15,
2014/15 (Actual) (1.7.14 - 5.4.15)
=
54,463
.
(W1) Adjusted profit
Less capital allowance (W2)
Trading income
89,000
(34,537)
54,463
(W2)
Main Pool
Accounting Period to 5 April 2015

Additions qualifying for AIA (max 9/12 x 500,000)
Recording equipment
Computer
Other Additions
Motor car ( 96-130g/km)
Motor car ( >130g/km)
WDA 18% x 9/12
60%
Business use asset
(1)
30,000
2,600
Allowances
32,600
10,400
10,400
(1,404)
WDA 8% x 9/12
14,800
14,800
(888)
60%
1,404
533
34,537
WDV c/f
8,996
13,912
177
178
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
Normal Basis
Revenues
61,000
Cost of sales (29,000 1,800)
(27,200)
33,800
Motor expenses (3,600 x 60%)
(2,160)
Capital allowances (8,000 + (12,000 x 18% x 60%)
(9,296)
Adjusted Trading Profit
22,344
Cash Basis
Receipts (61,000 4,000)
57,000
Payments
Purchases & Expenses (29,000 2,000)
27,000
Equipment
8,000
Motor expenses (10,000 x 60% x 45p)
2,700
Adjusted Trading Profit
(37,700)
19,300
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 7
Eve may either establish an agreed split between business and private use and add back the private use proportion or simply use the flat
rate private use adjustment and add back 4,200, giving an adjusted trading profit figure of 27,200 (23,000 + 4,200).
If a question is set using the cash basis it should be assumed that the election to use the relevant flat rate scheme has been made.
Although the flat rate scheme applies to unincorporated businesses generally it will only be examined within the cash basis.
If the cash basis is to be used in the examination it will be specifically mentioned and should only be used therefore if specifically required.
Chapter 7
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Trading income
Less: carry forward relief
Revised trading income
Working loss memorandum
Trading loss
Less: carry forward relief in 2013/14
Less: carry forward relief in 2014/15
Loss carried forward to 2015/16
2012/13
nil
nil
nil
2013/14
3,000
(3,000)
nil
2014/15
10,000
(2,000)
8,000
5,000
(3,000)
2,000
(2,000)
nil
Note
The loss is set off against the first trading profits to arise, to the maximum extent possible. Thus 3,000 of the loss is set off in 2013/14 and the
remainder carried forward to 2014/15.
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Trading profit assessments:
2012/13
2013/14
2014/15
32,000
25,000
NIL
Income tax computations
Trading profit
Property income
Total income
2012/13
32,000
6,000
38,000
2013/14
25,000
6,000
31,000
2014/15
Nil
6,000
6,000
Less reliefs
Loss relief against total income
Net income
PA
Taxable income
38,000
(10,000)
28,000
(31,000)
(10,000)
()
6,000
(10,000)
t
t
t
A claim against total income in 2014/15 would waste the personal allowance for 2014/15 and save no income tax. The claim in
2013/14 will also waste the PA but will generate a repayment of tax of 20% on a taxable income of 21,000 (31,000 - 10,000).
The balance of the trading loss 53,000 (84,000 - 31,000) will then be carried forward against the first available future trading
profits that arise from the same trade.
As the total non trading income for the tax year 2013/14 is less than 50,000 the cap on the income tax loss relief available is not
relevant (explained in section 4 part (c) of this chapter).
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
Provided an election is made, the whole of the trading loss available can be offset against the capital gains as follows:
Capital gains
44,000
Loss relief
(24,000)
20,000
Annual Exemption
(11,000)
Taxable gain
9,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Trading income assessable amounts:
2013/14 (Actual basis)
1/8/13 5/4/14 (810 (20,000))
2014/15 (First 12 months)
1/8/13 31/7/14
Loss
Less: Used in 2013/14
Profits 2/12 48,000
2015/16 (CYB)
A/C year ended 31/5/15
Assessment
Loss
Nil
(16,000)
(20,000)
16,000
(4,000)
8,000
4,000
48,000
When calculating the amount assessable for 2014/15, the loss already taken into account in 2013/14 must be deducted. The loss of
4,000 allocated to 2014/15 is then used in aggregation against the profit of 8,000 creating a net assessment of 4,000. No further relief
is therefore available for this part of the loss. The taxpayer would then need to choose his preferred use of the 16,000 loss in respect of
179
180
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
2013/14. A loss may only be relieved once hence there is no concept of overlap loss
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Taxable income computations
Employment Income
Trading profit (W1)
Other income
Total income
Less: Opening years relief
Net Income
Less: Personal Allowances
Taxable income
2010/11
12,800
2011/12
11,050
2012/13
5,868
4,500
17,300
(9,000)
8,300
(10,000)
Nil
4,500
15,550
(3,000)
12,550
(10,000)
2,550
4,500
10,368
10,368
(10,000)
368
2013/14
2014/15
2015/16
Nil
4,500
4,500
4,500
(10,000)
Nil
Nil
4,500
4,500
4,500
(10,000)
Nil
2,500
4,500
7,000
7,000
(10,000)
Nil
Under opening years loss relief the loss of 2013/14 (9,000) is set initially against Total Income of 2010/11. Any loss remaining would
then be set automatically against Total Income of 2011/12 and finally against Total Income of 2012/13. In this example there is clearly
sufficient income in 2010/11 to absorb all the available loss of 2013/14. It does however result in some wastage of the personal allowance
for 2010/11. The loss of 2014/15 (3,000) is then set against Total Income of 2011/12 (before relieving 2012/13 and 2013/14 had any loss
remained).
Workings
(W1) New business assessments
2013/14 (Actual) 1/7/2013 5/4/2014
912 (12,000)
2014/15 (CYB)
y/e 30/6/2014
Less: used in 2013/14
2015/16
(y/e 30/6/2015)
Loss available for relief
2013/14
2014/15
Assessment
Nil
Nil
Loss
(9,000)
(12,000)
9,000
(3,000)
2,500
(9,000)
(3,000)
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
Trading loss arising in final 12m of trading available for terminal loss relief is calculated as
2015/16
6/4/2015 31/5/2015
210 (20,000)
(4,000)
Overlap Relief
(500)
2014/15
1/6/2014 5/4/2015
212 6,000
1,000
+ 810 (20,000)
(16,000)
(15,000)
Trading Loss available under terminal loss relief
(19,500)
The loss of 19,500 would then be set off against the trading profits of firstly 2014/15 of 6,000 leaving the remaining 13,500 to be used
against the 18,000 trading profit assessment of 2013/14
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 8
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
A/C Year Ended 30/9/2014

1/10/2013 to 30/6/2014
(Profits 18,000 912 = 13,500)
Salaries (912)
Balance (3:2)
Total
18,000
3,750
9,750
13,500
Doug
Rob
2,250
5,850
8,100
1,500
3,900
5,400
1/7/2014 to 30/9/2014
(Profits 18,000 312 = 4,500
Salaries (312)
Balance (2:1)
2,500
1,500
1,000
2,000
1,333
667
4,500
2,833
1,667
Total allocation
18,000
10,933
7,067
Each partner will then be assessed on their share of the profit in 2014/15 using the normal CYB assessment
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Allocate the trading income for accounting periods between the partners.
Profits will be allocated between the partners as follows:
Total
Ann
6,000
7,000
8,000
Beryl
6,000
7,000
8,000
y/e 30/6/2013
12,000
y/e 30/6/2014
14,000
y/e 30/6/2015
24,000
Compute each partners trading income as though they were a sole trader.
Ann and Beryl will both be assessed as follows, based upon a commencement on 1 July 2012:
Clair
8,000
4,500
6,000
7,000
8,000
2012/13 (Actual) 1 July 2012 to 5 April 2013 6,000 912

2013/14 (CYB)
2014/15 (CYB)
2015/16 (CYB)
They will both carry forward overlap profits of 4,500.
Clair will be treated as commencing on 1 July 2014, and will be assessed on her share of the partnership profits as follow:
2014/15 (Actual) 1 July 2014 to 5 April 2015 8,000 9/12
2015/16 (CYB)
She will carry forward overlap profits of 6,000
6,000
8,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
Paul will be entitled to terminal loss relief since he has actually ceased trading.
George will be entitled to claim opening years relief since he has actually commenced trading.
John and James will not be entitled to either of the above reliefs.
All the partners will be entitled to relief against total income of the current or previous tax year and against gains.
All the partners except Paul will be entitled to carry forward relief.
181
182
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 9
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
The mileage allowance of 3,600 (12,000 at 30p) received is tax free and Kerry will be entitled to a deduction of 1,400 computed as
follows:
Authorised rate
10,000 miles at 45p

4,500
500
2,000 miles at 25p
5,000
(3,600)
1,400
Mileage allowance from employer (12,000 30p)

Allowable deduction
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Accommodation benefit - Annual Value
Less: Employee contribution for personal use
Additional accommodation benefit (120,000 75,000) 3.25%
Total assessable benefit
4,000
(500)
3,500
1,462
4,962
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
(a)
Gift of dishwasher
(b)
Market value when first made available to Gerald

900
Less: Benefit already assessed 2013/14 : (900 20% 10/12)
(150)
Taxable benefit on gift: 2014/15
750
The benefit is 750 since this is greater than the dishwashers market value when given to Gerald (150)
Sale of dishwasher to Gerald for 150
Benefit calculated in (a) above

750
(150)
Less: Price paid
Taxable benefit on gift: 2014/15
600
Notes :
1.
Where the benefit for use is provided for only part of tax year the benefit is reduced proportionately.
2.
Gerald would also have been taxed on the benefit of using the dishwasher.
Taxed in 2013/14 use 150
Taxed in 2014/15 Gift 750 (a) or 600 (b)
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Lewis
The CO2 emissions are above 95g/km, so the relevant percentage is 20% (12% + 3%(diesel car) + 5% (1% for every complete 5g/km above
95g/km ie 120-95 = 25 / 5 = 5%). The motor car was only available for eight months of 2014/15, so the benefit is 1,800 (13,500 20%
8/12).
Nico
The CO2 emissions are above the base level figure of 95 grams per kilometre. The CO2 emissions figure of 187 is rounded down to 185 so that
it is divisible by five. The base level percentage of 12% is increased in 1% steps for each complete 5 grams per kilometre above the base level,
so the relevant percentage is 30% (12% + 18% (185 95 = 90/5)). The motor car was available throughout 2014/15 so the benefit is 4,920
(16,400 30%).
Fernando
The CO2 emissions are above the base level figure of 95 grams per kilometre. The relevant percentage is 42% (12% + 30% (245 95 =
150/5)), but this is restricted to the maximum of 35%. The motor car was available throughout 2014/15 so the benefit is 6,710 (22,600
35% = 7,910 - 1,200). The contribution by Carla towards the use of the motor car reduces the benefit.
Jenson
The CO2 emissions are between 76 grams per kilometre and 94 grams per kilometre so the relevant percentage is 11% as it is a petrol car.
The benefit is 16,000 11% = 1,760 for 2014/15.
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Sebastian
The CO2 emissions are below 75 grams per kilometre and the relevant percentage is 8% (diesel car). The benefit is 11,000 8% = 880
for 2014/15.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Lewis
21,700 20% 8/12 = 2,893
The fuel was not available for first 4 months
Nico
21.700 30% = 6,510
Fernando
21,700 35% = 7,595
There is no reduction for the contribution made by Fernando since the cost of private fuel was not fully reimbursed.
Jenson
21,700 11% = 2,387
Sebastian
21,700 8% = 1,736
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
(a)
Average method
35,000 + 15,000
x 3.25%
2
Less: interest paid (as below)
6/4/2014 31/5/2014
1/6/2014 30/11/2014
1/12/2014 5/4/2015
(b)
812
(258)
554
35,000 1% 212
30,000 1% 612
15,000 1% 412
58
150
50
258
Accurate method
6/4/2014 31/5/2014
1/6/2014 30/11/2014
1/12/2014 5/4/2015
190
488
162
840
(258)
582
35,000 3.25% 212

30,000 3.25% 612
15,000 3.25% 412
Less: Interest paid (as above)

HMRC would be entitled to opt for the accurate basis as this gives a higher assessment.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 7
Personal Allowance
Benefits
Tax underpaid: 132 10020
Tax code
10,000
(440)
(660)
8,900
890L
183
184
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 10
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
The total pension input allowed is made up as follows:
AA for 2014/15
40,000
Unused AA b/f
- 2011/12 fully used
nil
- 2012/13 (50,000 30,000)
20,000
- 2013/14 (50,000 25,000)
25,000
Maximum gross contribution
85,000
It can be seen from the above working that the current years AA is used first and then unused AA brought forward is used on a FIFO basis.
If therefore in 2014/15 Aston made a gross contribution of 55,000, this would be less than his relevant earnings for the year (120,000)
and would therefore qualify for relief and would utilise all of the 2014/15 AA of 40,000 and 15,000 of the 20,000 unused AA brought
forward from 2012/13.
The remaining 5,000 would be carried forward for one more year to 2015/16. If a 30,000 payment were then made this would be within
the AA for 2015/16 so no unused AA brought forward would be utilised.
The 5,000 unused AA from 2012/13 would now lapse so that in 2016/17 after that years AA is used there would be unused AA brought
forward for use as follows:
- 2013/14
25,000
- 2014/15
NIL
- 2015/16
(40,000 30,000)
10,000
Chapter 11
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
The Class 1 and Class 1A NIC liability is as follows:
Class 1
Employee
. 7,956 @ 0%
. [41,865 7,956] 12%
. [50,000 41,865] 2%
Employer
Class 1A
Employer
. 7,956 @ 0%
. [50,000 7,956] 13.8%
Nil
4,069
163
4,232
Nil
5,802
5,802
6,400 + 4,320 + 1,800 = 12,520 @ 13.8% = 1,728
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Class 4
(41,865 7,956) 9%
(50,000 41,865) 2%
Class 2
2.75 52 weeks
3,052
163
3,215
143
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 12
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Tina Capital Gains tax computation as 2014/15
Painting
Disposal proceeds
Less Cost
Capital Gain
Investment property
Disposal proceeds
Less incidental costs of disposal
Net proceeds
Less cost
Capital Gain
500,000
(350,000)
150,000
310,000
(15,000)
295,000
(200,000)
95,000
Antique vase
Disposal proceeds
Less cost
Capital loss
Net capital gains in 2014/15
Less capital losses b/f
Net Capital Gains
Less Annual Exemption
Taxable Gains
CGT 28% (Note)
Due
10,000
(15,000)
(5,000)
240,000
(12,000)
228,000
(11,000)
217,000
60,760
31/1/2016
Note: Tinas taxable income of 50,000 exceeds the basic rate band of 31,865 so all of the taxable gain is taxed at 28%
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Capital Gain
Taxable Gain
Capital Gains Tax (W1)
7,000 18%
Due
18,000
(11,000)
7,000
1,260
31/1/2016
Income Tax Computation

Trading profit
20,000
Less Personal allowance
(10,000)
Taxable income
10,000
Basic rate band remaining.
31,865 10,000 = 21,865. The taxable gains of 7,100 therefore fall wholly into the remaining basic rate band so the CGT rate is 18%
185
186
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
Capital Gain
Taxable Gain
1,865 18%
17,135 28%
19,100
CGT Due
Trading profit
Taxable income
30,000
(11,000)
19,000
336
4,798
5,134
31/1/2016
40,000
(10,000)
30,000
Basic rate band remaining.

31,865 30,000 = 1,865.
Part of the taxable gain falls within the remaining basic rate band so will be taxed at 18%, but (19,000 1,865) 17,135 exceeds the
basic rate band so will be taxed at 28%.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Capital Gain
Taxable Gain
865 18%
14,135 28%
15,000
CGT Due
W1
26,000
(11,000)
15,000
156
3,958
4,114
31/1/2016

Trading profit
Taxable income
44,000
(10,000)
34,000
Basic rate band remaining 34,865 34,000 = 865

Part of the taxable gain falls into the remaining basic rate band so will be taxed at 18%, but (15,000 865) 14,135 exceeds the
basic rate band so will be taxed at 28%.
The basic rate band is extended by the gross gift aid payment: (31,865 + 2,400 10080) = 34,865
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Lower of
400 + (408 400) = 402p
or
408 + 399
= 403.5p
2
The lower figure is 402p
Value 1,000 402p = 4,020
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
Fiona
2013/14
Capital gains in the tax year
Capital losses in the tax year
Net Capital gains in the tax year
15,000
(10,000)
5,000
Net Capital gains are covered by the Annual Exemption. No losses to carry forward to 2014/15.
2014/15
17,000
(5,200)
Net Capital gains in the tax year
11,800
Annual Exemption
(11,000)
Taxable gains
800
Fiona is taxed on taxable gains of 800 in 2014/15. No losses to carry forward.
Jane
2013/14
Net Capital Gains in the tax year
7,000
(10,000)
Nil
Jane is unable to use her 2013/14 Annual Exemption since her gains are covered by current year losses. She has losses of 3,000 (10,000
- 7,000) to carry forward to 2014/15.
2014/15
13,700
(2,000)
Net Capital Gains in the tax year
11,700
Less capital loss b/f (restrict)
(700)
Net Capital Gains
11,000
(11,000)
Taxable Gain
Capital loss to carry forward 3,000 700 = 2,300

ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 7
Mike transfers the Ring at Nil Gain/Nil Loss in December 2014
Barbara sells the ring
Disposal Proceeds
20,000
Less Cost
(12,000)
Capital gain
8,000
Barbara simply takes on the original cost of the asset from Mike as if she acquired it herself in July 1993
187
188
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 8
16,000
Proceeds
Less Acquisition cost
26,000 x
16,000
16,000 + 34,000
Chargeable gain
(8,320)
7,680
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 9
(a)
Antique table this is an exempt asset as cost and proceeds are both 6,000 and it is a non wasting chattel.
(b)
Painting non wasting chattel

Normal calculation
Disposal proceeds
Cost
Chargeable gain
10,000
(2,000)
8,000
Restricted to 53 [10,000 6,000] = 6,667

(c)
Antique vase non wasting chattel

Disposal proceeds (deemed)
Less cost
Capital loss
(d)
6,000
(8,000)
(2,000)
The vintage car is exempt

Asset (1)
Asset (2)
Asset (3)
Asset (4)
Net chargeable Gain
6,667
(2,000)
4,667
Proceeds
Purchase
Less 12/30 [25,000 1,000]
Chargeable gain
38,000
25,000
(9,600)
(15,400)
22,600
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 13
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
(a)
Match with acquisitions on same day as sale
(b)
none
Match with acquisitions in next 30 days

7 March 2015
Disposal proceeds (2001,000 25,000)
Less: cost
Capital gain
(c)
200 shares
5,000
(4,000)
1,000
Match with share pool

31 May 2012
30 June 2013
Disposal
Calculate Gain
Disposal proceeds (8001,000 25,000)
Less: cost
Capital gain
Number
1,500
500
2,000
(800)
1,200
Cost
20,000
10,000
30,000
(12,000)
18,000
20,000
(12,000)
8,000
Capital Gains 2014/15
9,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
(a)
Match with acquisitions on same day
(b) Match with acquisitions in next 30 days
(c)
Feb 2013
June 2013
July 2013 Bonus 1:5
October 2014 Disposal
none
none
Number
7,000
1,000
8,000
1,600
9,600
Cost
15,000
4,000
19,000
19,000
(5,000)
4,600
(9,896)
9,104
Calculate Gain
Disposal proceeds
Less: cost
Capital gain
20,000
(9,896)
10,104
189
190
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
(a)
Match with acquisitions on same day
none
(b)
Match with acquisitions in next 30 days
none
(c)

Feb 2013
June 2013
July 2013 Rights 1: 3 @ 3.00
September 2014 Disposal
Number
6,000
900
6,900
2,300
9,200
Cost
15,000
2,700
17,700
6,900
24,600
(6,000)
3,200
(16,043)
8,557
Calculate Gain
24,000
(16,043)
7,957
Disposal proceeds
Less: cost
Capital gain
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Disposal proceeds
Less Cost (W)
Capital gain
35,000
(10,000)
25,000
Working: Cost of ordinary shares in Gold Ltd

Mark received:
8,000 ordinary shares, valued at 5 = 40,000
4,000 preference shares, valued at 2 = 8,000
Total
48,000
The cost attributable to the ordinary shares is therefore: 12,000 x
40,000
48,000
= 10,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Mark receives at takeover:
Market value
Cost
8,000 Gold Ltd ordinary shares
40,000
10,000
Cash
8,000
2,000
Total
48,000
12,000
The original Silver Ltd share cost of 12,000 is divided between the shares and cash received from Gold Ltd proportionate to the value
received. As cash has now been received at the time of the takeover an immediate gain arises.
Capital gain in June 2014:
(Computed from working above)
Proceeds (cash received)

8,000
Less Cost
(2,000)
Capital gain
6,000
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 14
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Daisy
Sale of business
Goodwill
Factory
Warehouse
250,000
320,000
(90,000)
480,000
Sale of shares
370,000
Gain on shares
Net chargeable gains
850,000
(11,000)
Taxable gain
839,000
Capital Gains Tax 839,000 10%
83,900
Due
31/1/2016
Entrepreneurs relief is available on both disposals, the sale of the business and the sale of the shares where Daisy had owned at least 5%
of the shares and been an employee for a period of at least 12 months
Daisy has utilised 850,000 (480,000 + 370,000) of entrepreneurs relief in 2014/15 so has (10,000,000 850,000) = 9,150,000 to
utilise over the rest of her lifetime.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Anne
Capital Gains Calculation
Capital gains qualifying for entrepreneurs relief

Sale of shares
Proceeds
Cost
Capital gains / taxable gain
5,000,000
(500,000)
4,500,000
Capital gains not qualifying for entrepreneurs relief

Sale of painting
Less capital loss brought forward
100,000
(25,000)
75,000
(11,000)
64,000

Taxable gain
Due date
450,000
17,920
31/1/2016 31/1/2016
(W1)
4,500,000 10%
64,000 28% (Note)
Capital Gains Tax
450,000
17,920
467,920
Note: 13,865 (31,865 18,000) of Annes basic rate band is unused, but this is deemed to be utilised by the gains qualifying for
entrepreneurs relief (even though this does not affect the 10% tax rate)
There is a lifetime allowance of 5,500,000 (10000,000 4,500,000) remaining to utilise on future gains qualifying for
entrepreneurs relief.
191
192
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
320,000
(50,000)
270,000
Cost of new asset

Less: Capital gain on old asset (300,000 - 250,000)
Deemed cost of new asset
As all the sale proceeds have been reinvested in a new qualifying business asset the entire gain is eligible for rollover relief. If rollover
relief was not claimed entrepreneurs relief would not be available as this is the disposal of an individual asset used in the business, not
the business itself.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
(a)
New factory purchased for 750,000
Purchase cost of new factory

Capital gain on old factory (800,000 - 680,000)
Restriction on rollover (800,000 - 750,000)
Gain rolled over
Base cost of new factory
750,000
120,000
(50,000)
(70,000)
680,000
As 50,000 of the sale proceeds has not been reinvested this amount of the gain remains chargeable. Entrepreneurs relief is not
available in respect of the gain of 50,000 that is immediately chargeable as it is not the disposal of the business. If a further 50,000
were to be reinvested in other qualifying business assets by August 2017 (3 years from disposal date) a further rollover relief claim
could be made to defer the remaining gain
(b)

In this case the amount of proceeds not reinvested of 200,000 (800,000 - 600,000) exceeds the gain made on the old factory.
Thus none of the gain is eligible to be rolled over and so there is no adjustment to the base cost of the new factory. It remains at
the purchase price of 600,000. Entrepreneurs relief would not be available against the gain of 120,000 in 2014/15 as it is not the
disposal of the whole of the business.
If however further reinvestment in qualifying assets within the relevant time period (by August 2017) is made then claims for
rollover relief may then be available.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
(a)
The non-qualifying part of the gain is:
9,000 (600,000 - 540,000 = 60,000 15%).
This is taxable immediately, as it does not qualify for rollover relief. Entrepreneurs relief will not be available as the whole of the
business has not been sold.
(b)
As all the business proportion of the sale proceeds has been reinvested in a business asset the business proportion of the gain
(85%) may be rolled over in full. The base cost of the new factory is reduced by the amount of the gain rolled over. It is therefore:
Purchase cost
Capital gain rolled over (60,000 85%)
650,000
(51,000)
599,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
As Charles reinvested all of the proceeds from the sale of the freehold factory in a 55 year leasehold factory, a depreciating asset, the entire
gain may be held over. The held over gain on the sale of the factory in June 2013 becomes chargeable in 2014/15, as the depreciating
asset has been sold in February 2015. The capital gain is 200,000 (500,000 - 300,000). A further gain of 40,000 (640,000 - 600,000)
arises on the sale of the leasehold factory. Entrepreneurs relief is not available as Charles did not dispose of the whole business.
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 7
David has made a disposal in September 2014 as follows:
Market value of asset
Less: Cost
Less: Gift relief
Revised gain
100,000
(60,000)
40,000
(40,000)
Nil
Tommy has a deemed base cost to set against a future disposal, calculated as follows.
Market value of asset acquired

100,000
(40,000)
Less: gain deferred
60,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 8
(a)
Richard Chargeable gain on shares sold at undervalue in March 2015
Market value of shares in March 2015

Less cost
Capital Gain
Less: Gain deferred
Capital gain
Less: Proceeds received actual cost (85,000 60,000)
140,000
(25,000)
(115,000)
25,000
(11,000)
14,000
1,400
Revised gain eligible for entrepreneurs relief

Taxable gain
CGT @ 10%
(b)
200,000
(60,000)
140,000
Richards son Base cost

Market value of shares in March 2015
Less: Gain deferred
Base cost
200,000
(115,000)
85,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 9
Johns Proceeds (market value)
Less: cost
Capital Gain
Less gift relief (W1)
Revised gain eligible for entrepreneurs relief
Taxable gain
CGT @ 10%
800,000
(200,000)
600,000
(525,000)
75,000
(11,000)
64,000
6,400
Johns son Base cost of shares

Cost (Market value)
Less: Gain deferred
Base cost
800,000
(525,000)
275,000
193
194
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
(W1) Gain eligible for Gift relief
The shares in the unquoted trading company will qualify for gift relief but as 100,000 (investments) of the 800,000 (investments,
premises and goodwill) chargeable assets are investments the relief is restricted as follows:
700,000
= 525,000
800,000
600,000
150,000
(10,000)
140,000
(108,348)
31,652
Disposal proceeds
less cost
Capital gain
less PPR relief (W1)
Chargeble Gain
Actual & Deemed Occupation

(months)
3
24
174
66
267
(W1)
1/4/86 30/6/86
1/7/86 30/6/88
1/7/88 31/12/02
1/1/03 31/12/2014
PPR relief
(actual)
(working overseas)
(actual)
(4 years work in UK/last 18 months)
Absent (months)
267
140,000 = 108,348
345
250,000
(30,000)
220,000
(121,379)
98,621
(18,966)
79,655
Disposal proceeds
Less cost
Capital Gain
Less PPR relief (W1)
Less Letting relief (W2)
Chargeable Gain
(W1)
1/4/1986 31/3/1988
(actual)
1/4/1988 30/9/1993
(Any reason)
1/10/1993 31/3/2003
(actual)
1/4/2003 31/3/2015
(last 18 months)
PPR relief
(W2) (i)
(ii)
(iii)
Actual &
Deemed
(months)
24
36
Absent
(months)
30
(house
let)
114
18
126
192
156
348
192
220,000 = 121,379
348
121,379
40,000
30
220,000 = 18,966
348
78
78
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chapter 15
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Corporation tax computation for the chargeable accounting period of 12 months ended 31 March 2015
Tax adjusted trading profits
1,456,500
Property income
25,000
Interest receivable
10,000
Chargeable gains
37,500
Less: Capital losses
(2,500)
35,000
1,526,500
Less: Qualifying charitable donations
(10,000)
1,516,500
Note: Dividends from other companies (UK or overseas) are ignored when calculating Taxable Total Profits
Chapter 16
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Augmented profits = Taxable Total Profits + FII
= 1,800,000 + 9,000 10090
= 1,810,000
As the augmented profit exceeds 1.5M the company is large and as the CAP falls entirely in FY 2014 only one tax rate is charged on the
TTP.
Therefore the main rate of 21% applies
Corporation tax payable = 1,800,000 21% = 378,000
If the company had prepared accounts to 31 December 2014 the computation would now span 2 Financial Years (FY 2013 and FY 2014)
where the tax rates had changed and therefore the corporation tax must now be computed as follows:
FY 2013 3/12 1,800,000 23%
= 103,500
FY 2014 9/12 1,800,000 21%
= 283,500
CT payable
= 387,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Small profits rate
Augmented profits
= 60,000 + 1800 10090

= 62,000 < 300,000
... Small profits rate applies, 20%
Corporation Tax payable = 60,000 20% = 12,000
If the company had prepared accounts to 31 December 2014 thus spanning 2 Financial Years, FY 2013 and FY 2014, as the Small profits
rate has not changed there would be no need to split the calculation between the FYs and the corporation tax payable would be the
same.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
As the augmented profit falls between the lower and upper limits the company is a marginal company.
Augmented profits = 430,000 + 20,000
= 450,000
... marginal relief applies
Corporation Tax payable
430,000 21%
90,300
Less:
00 (1,500,000 450,0000) 430,000450,000
(2,508)
CT Payable
87,792
If the company had prepared accounts to 31 December 2014 thus spanning 2 Financial Years, the tax would be computed as follows:
FY 2013
3/12 x 430,000 x 23%
= 24,725
Less Marginal Relief
3/400 (1500 - 450) 430/450 3/12
= (1,881)
22,844
FY2014
9/12 x 430,000 x 21%
= 67,725
Less Marginal Relief
1/400 x (1500 - 450) x 430/450 x 9/12
= (1,881)
65,844
CT Payable
88,688
195
196
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Augmented profits = 300,000 + (9,000 10090) = 310,000
Accounting period is less than 12 months therefore time apportion upper and lower limits.
1,500,000 412 = 500,000
300,000 412 = 100,000
300,000 @ 21%
63,000
less
00 (500,000 310,000) 300,000310,000
(460)
Corporation Tax payable
62,540
Chapter 17
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Adjusted profit (12 : 3)

Less: CA (W1)
Chargeable Gain (6/5/2015)
Qualifying charitable donations (31/7/2014)
Corporation Tax (W2)
(W1) 12 months to 31/3/2015
WDV b/f
Additions qualifying for AIA - Vans
3 months to 30/6/2015
WDV b/f
Plant & Machinery
AIA - (Maximum 500,000 312)
12 months to
31/3/2015
3,200,000
(68,000)
3,132,000
(20,000)
3,112,000
3 months to
30/6/2015
800,000
(126,238)
673,762
80,000
753,762
Main pool
nil
Allowances
68,000
(68,000)
68.000
nil
152,500
(125,000)
125,000
WDA 18% 312
27,500
27,500
(1,238)
WDV c/f
26,262
1,238
126,238
(W2) 12 months to 31/3/2015
Augmented profits
= 3,112,000
FY 2014
Limits - lower
300,000
- upper
1,500,000
As the augmented profit exceeds 1.5M the company is large and its Taxable Total Profits will be taxed at the main rate.
Main rate
Corporation tax
FY 2014
3,112,000 x 21%
653,520
3 months to 30/6/15
Augmented profits
FY 2014
limits 312
= 753,762
75,000
375,000
As Augmented Profit exceeds the upper limit of 375,000 the company is large.
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Main rate
Corporation tax
753,762 21% =
158,290
Chapter 18
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Current year relief
Trading profit
Interest receivable
Chargeable gain
Current year relief
y/e 31/3/15
20,000
50,000
70,000
(45,000)
25,000
(15,000)
10,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
Trading profit
Interest receivable
Current year relief
Carry back relief
Loss memorandum
Loss arising
y/e 31/3/15
Current year relief
y/e 31/3/15
Carry back relief
y/e 31/3/14
Available to carry forward
y/e 31/3/13
30,000
10,000
40,000
40,000
y/e 31/3/14
60,000
10,000
70,000
(70,000)
y/e 31/3/15
10,000
10,000
(10,000)
(ii)
90,000
(10,000) (i)
(70,000) (ii)
10,000
(i)
197
198
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
y/e 31/3/13
25,000
3,000
(W1)
28,000
Trading profit
Interest Income
Chargeable Gain
Total profit before Qualifying charitable donations
Current year relief
Carry back relief (3/12 x 28,000)
y/e
31/12/2014
1,000
1,000
(1,000) )
Less Qualifying charitable donations

W1 The capital loss of 1000 is c/f to set off against the 6000 gain of next CAP
W2 Qualifying charitable donations are unrelieved
Loss memorandum
Trading loss
y/e 31/12/2014
40,000
Current year 31/12/2014
(1,000)
39,000
Carry back to 9m to 31/12/2013 & 3m of y/e 31/3/13 (26,000 + 7,000) (33,000)
Available to carry forward
6,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
(7,000)
21,000
(500)
20,500
Trading profit
Interest income
Chargeable Gain
10,000
2,000
12,000
6 months
31/3/12
16,000
16,000
Current year relief

Carry back relief
Qualifying charitable donations unrelieved
(6,000)
(500)
5,500
(16,000)
y/e 30/9/11
Loss memorandum
Loss arising y/e 31/3/2015
Current year relief
Carry back relief
Carry back relief
Carry back relief
Carry back relief
Loss unrelieved
9m to
31/12/2013
20,000
1,000
5,000
26,000
(26,000)
(500)(w2)
y/e 31/3/13
y/e 31/3/14
20,000
2,000
6,000
28,000
32,000
2,000
34,000
(28,000)
500
(34,000)
500
(500)(w2)
y/e 31/3/2015
y/e 31/3/2014
y/e 31/3/2013
6m to 31/3/2012
y/e 30/9/2011 12,000 612 = 6,000 maximum set off
y/e 31/3/15
2,000
8,000
10,000
(10,000)
97,000
(10,000)
(34,000)
(28,000)
(16,000)
(6,000)
3,000
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
y/e 31/03/12
Trading income
Carry forward relief
Property Income
Interest receivable
40,000
y/e 31/03/13
20,000
y/e 31/3/14
3,000
4,000
47,000
3,000
3,000
26,000
3,000
5,000
8,000
Current year relief

Carry back relief
(i)
(ii)
Less Qualifying charitable donations

Unrelieved Qualifying charitable donations
47,000
(1,000)
46,000
Loss memo
Loss arising y/e 31/3/14
Current year relief
31/3/14
(i)
Carry back relief
31/3/13
(ii)
Carry forward y/e 31/3/15
(iii)
(26,000)
1,000
y/e 31/3/15
20,000
(iii)
(9,000)
3,000
3,000
17,000
(8,000)
1,000
17,000
(1,000)
16,000
43,000
(8,000)
35,000
(26,000)
9,000
(9,000)
Chapter 19
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
100,000
(1,000)
Sale proceeds
Less: Incidental costs of sale
99,000
Less: Cost
Enhancement expenditure
20,000
6,000
(26,000)
73,000
Unindexed gain
Less: Indexation allowance on cost
On enhancement
Chargeable gain
20,000
6,000
257.7 97.85
(1.634)
97.85
257.7 128.1
(1.012)
128.1
32,680
6,072
(38,752)
34,248
199
200
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
1)
Same day
2)
Previous 9 days
X
500 shares
500
3,000
Proceeds
3)
x 36,000
6,000
(5,000)
1,000
Less cost
Chargeable gain
Share pool
Number
1,000
Share Pool
20 August 1989
Index up to November 1996
153.9 115.8
x 5,000
115.8
1,645
1,000
2,000
3,000
Addition 16 November 1996

Index up to October 2014
Cost
Indexed cost
5,000
5,000
5,000
12,000
17,000
6,645
12,000
18,645
257.7 153.9
x 18,645
153.9
Disposal 10 October 2014
12,575
2500/3000 x 17,000: 2500/3000 x 31220
3,000
(2,500)
500
17,000
(14,167)
2,833
31,220
(26,017)
5,203
Note: when reindexing the indexed cost in the share pool we do not round the indexation factor to 3 decimal places. However in
the examination the examiner may simply give you indexation factors from one relevant date to another for ease of calculation, in
which case use the given indexation factors where applicable.
Calculate the gain on the 2,500 shares
2,500
3,000
Proceeds
x 36,000
30,000
(14,167)
15,833
(11,850)
3,983
Cost
Unindexed gain
I.A (26,017 14,167)
Chargeable gain
Total Gains
Previous 9 days
Pool
Chargeable Gains to include in the corporation tax computation
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
Matching rules
Same day
Previous 9 days
Share pool
Share pool
July 1993
February 1995 Bonus 1:3
No reindexation of pool (though examiner will still give the RPI for that date - ignore!)
257.7 140.7
10,000
Index up to October 2014 from July 1993
140.7
Sale
Gains
1,000
3,983
4,983
Number
3,000
1,000
4,000
Cost
10,000
10,000
Indexed cost
10,000
10,000
8,316
4,000
(2,000)
2,000
10,000
(5,000)
5,000
18,316
(9,158)
9,158
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Calculate the Gain
12,000
(5,000)
7,000
(4,158)
2,842
Proceeds
Less Cost
Unindexed Gain
Less Indexation allowance (9,158 5,000)
Chargeable gain
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Market value
30,000
10,000
40,000
B plc ordinary shares 10,000 2 1.50

B plc preference shares 10,000 1 1.00
Cost
7,500
2,500
10,000
As the terms of the takeover are a share for share transfer no gain will arise at the the time of the takeover with the new shares in B plc
taking on the same original cost as the old shares in A Ltd. As 2 types of share are issued at takeover we use the market values of those
shares as the basis of dividing the A Ltd share cost, hence the ordinary shares take 30/40 and the preference shares take 10/40 of the
10,000 share cost.
Calculate Gain on sale of preference shares in October 2014:
Proceeds
Cost
Less: indexation allowance 1.231 2,500
Chargeable gain
15,000
(2,500)
(3,078)
9,422
The cost of B plc ordinary shares when they are sold will be 7,500. If the examiner gives you an indexation factor rather than the RPIs to
use then just apply as in a normal indexation allowance calculation.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
As Z Ltd now receives some cash at the time of the takeover an immediate gain will arise thereon as computed below.
Z Ltd receives at takeover:
20,000 B plc ordinary shares
Cash
Total
Chargeable gain in July 2014:
Market value
30,000
10,000
Cost
7,500
2,500
40,000
10,000
10,000
(2,500)
(3,040)
4,460
Proceeds
Less Cost
Indexation allowance (1.216 2,500)
Chargeable gain
Chapter 20
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Proceeds
Less: I.A
26,000
16,000
16,000 + 34,000
16,000
(8,320)
7,680
Unindexed gain
Less: I.A
Chargeable gain
257.7 220.7
= 0.168 8,320
220.7
(1,398)
6,282
201
202
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
(a)
Antique table this is an exempt asset as cost and proceeds are both 6,000 and it is a non wasting chattel.
(b)
Painting non wasting chattel

Normal calculation
10,000
(2,000)
8,000
Disposal proceeds
Cost
Less: Indexation allowance
257.7 217.9
217.9
(366)
= 0.183 x 2.000
Gain
7,634
Restricted to 53 [10,000 6,000] = 6,667

(c)
Antique vase non wasting chattel

Disposal proceeds (deemed)
Less cost
Capital loss
(d)
6,000
(8,000)
(2,000)
The vintage car is exempt

Asset (1)
Asset (2)
Asset (3)
Asset (4)
Net chargeable Gain
6,667
(2,000)
4,667
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
Proceeds
Purchase
Less 12/30 [25,000 1,000]
Unindexed gain
Less indexation allowance 0.486 15,400
Chargeable gain
38,000
25,000
(9,600)
(15,400)
22,600
(7,484)
15,116
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
Proceeds (July 2014)
30,000
10,000 30,000 + 25,000
Unindexed gain
Less indexation allowance 0.505 5,455
Chargeable gain
30,000
(5,455)
24,545
(2,755)
21,790
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
On 1 July 2014 there is no chargeable gain as the company has elected to rollover the proceeds against the cost of the painting.
When the painting is eventually sold its cost will be:
Original cost
10,000
Less insurance proceeds
(8,000)
Base cost of painting
2,000
In addition the restoration costs themselves of 8,000 can be deducted on a future disposal
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
34,000
(23,000)
11,000
Proceeds
Less cost
Unindexed gain
Less: I.A
257.7 216.8
= 0.189 23,000
216.8
(4,347)
Chargeable gain
Less gain rolled over
Revised chargeable gain
6,653
(2.653)
4,000
Proceeds have been used to buy a replacement asset but only partially used, therefore 4,000 (34,000 30,000) of the gain is chargeable
immediately and 2,653 (6.653 4,000) can be deferred.
Base cost of the replacement asset
Cost
Less Gain Deferred
Base cost
30,000
(2,653)
27,347
Chapter 21
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
400,000
(150,000)
250,000
Proceeds
Less Cost
Unindexed Gain
Less: I.A
257.7 145.2
= 0.775 150,000
145.2
Chargeable gain
(116,250)
133,750
Proceeds are fully reinvested into a qualifying asset within the specified time period, so the entire gain of 133,750 can be deferred until
the sale of the land.
Base cost of the land
Cost
Less Gain deferred
Base cost
500,000
(133,750)
366,250
203
204
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
350,000
(200,000)
150,000
Proceeds
Cost
257.7 181.5
= 0.420 200,000
181.5
Less: I.A
(84,000)
66,000
Chargeable gain
Proceeds not reinvested = 350,000 335,000 = 15,000
.15,000 will be taxed in y/e 31/12/2014
The remaining gain 51,000 (66,000 15,000) can be deferred
Base cost of new asset:
Cost
Gain deferred
335,000
(51,000)
284,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
350,000
(200,000)
150,000
Proceeds
Cost
212.8 156.3
= 0.361 x 200,000
156.3
I.A
(72,200)
77,800
The gain is deferred due to the purchase of the fixed plant and will be chargeable in year ended 31 March 2015, when the depreciating
asset is sold/ceases to be used in the trade (Feb 2015). This is earlier than 10 years from its date of acquisition (March 2020).
Chapter 22
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
As companies are associated if they have been associated for any part of the Chargeable Accounting Period including overseas resident
companies, A Ltd is treated as having two associated companies, so the lower and upper limits must be divided by three (A Ltd plus its
two associated companies). The lower limit is therefore 100,000 (300,000/3) and the upper limit is 500,000 (1,500,000/3). As A Ltd
has Augmented Profits of 150,000 it is a marginal company. The companys corporation tax liability is therefore computed as follows:

140,000
Franked investment income
10,000
Augmented profits
150,000
Corporation tax liability 140,000 at 21%
29,400
140,000
Less: Marginal relief 00 (500,000 150,000)
(817)
150,000
28,583
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
The AIA may be split in anyway the group chooses between A Ltd and its UK resident subsidiary acquired during the accounting period.
As previously seen it is better to allocate AIA to special rate pool expenditure ahead of main pool expenditure, but within a group a more
important issue is the marginal tax rate applicable in each company. A Ltd is a marginal company and therefore on augmented profit
above 100,000 its Taxable Total Profits are being taxed at the highest corporate tax rate, the marginal rate of 21.25%. If the UK subsidiary
acquired is for example a small company the tax rate on its profits would be only 20%. It would therefore be better to use the available AIA
in A Ltd to save paying tax at 21.25% rather than in the subsidiary where tax is payable at only 20%.
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
Group relief
(1)
Z plc will be able to group relieve its trading loss to effective 75% subsidiaries. The shareholding can be held directly or
indirectly.
(2)
Z plc will therefore be able to group relieve its trading loss to A Ltd and B Ltd.
(3)
Z plc does not have the required 75% shareholding in C Ltd (100% 80% 80% = 64%).
C Ltd may however separately group relieve with B Ltd its 80% parent. It is therefore possible where sub - subsidiaries (indirect subsidiaries)
exist that more than one group will exist for purposes of group relief.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
(1)
Group relief to B Ltd will be restricted to 6/12ths of Z plcs trading loss for the year ended 31 March 2015.
(2)
The setoff will be against B Ltds Taxable Total Profits for the sixmonth period to 31 March 2015.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Both Beyonce Ltd and Z Ltd prepare accounts to 31 March but as Z Ltd only commenced trading on 1 January, 2015 only 60,000 (3/12 x
240,000) of Beyonces loss period corresponds with Z Ltds profit period. This, however will not be a problem as Z Ltds profit is only 50,000
and will therefore represent the maximum group relief available.
J Ltds accounting period is not coterminous and therefore both its profits and Beyonces loss must be time apportioned between the
corresponding periods:
3 months of Beyonces loss corresponds with 3 months of Js profit for the year ended 30 June 2014, hence maximum group relief in this
period is lower of:
3/12 (240,000) = (60,000)
3/12 160,000 = 40,000
Maximum group relief is therefore40,000.
9 months of Beyonces loss corresponds with 9 months of Js profit for the year ended 30 June 2015, hence group relief in this period is
restricted to lower of:
9/12 (240,000) = 180,000
9/12 280,000 = 210,000
Maximum group relief is therefore 180,000
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
The corporation tax liability of each of the group companies for the year ended 31 March 2015 is computed as follows:
Year ended 31 March 2015
S Ltd
E Ltd
F Ltd
Trading profit
650,000
130,000
Property Income
120,000
Current year relief
(20,000)
100,000
650,000
130,000
Group relief
(75,000)
(30,000)
Revised Taxable Total Profits
100,000
575,000
100,000
Corporation tax at 20%
20,000
20,000
Corporation tax at 21%
120,750
(1)
(2)
(3)
There are three associated companies in the group, so the relevant lower and upper limits for corporation tax purposes are
100,000 (300,000/3) and 500,000 (1,500,000/3) respectively. E Ltd is a large company paying tax at 21% whereas both S
Ltd and F Ltd are marginal companies paying tax at 21.25% on those profits above the lower limit of 100,000.
S Ltds trading loss has been relieved so as to reduce both its own and F Ltds augmented profits down to the lower limit.
The remaining loss of 75,000 is used to reduce the main rate profits in E Ltd. To achieve this optimal outcome the group
relief claims must however be made first so as to leave S Ltd with only 20,000 loss remaining which is then relieved with
a normal current period claim. This is because partial claims are not allowed in current period relief but are in group relief!
S Ltds brought forward trading losses of 7,500 are carried forward in S Ltd only and are not available for group relief.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 7
(1)
The two companies can make an election to transfer the capital loss from Large Ltd to Small Ltd.
(2)
Alternatively, the capital gain or any part thereof can be transferred from Small Ltd to Large Ltd.
(3)
In either case, the capital loss will be set against the capital gain, leaving 25,000 (100,000 75,000) chargeable to
corporation tax.
(4)
There is no need for either asset to be actually transferred between the companies simply an election needs to be made for
the capital gain or loss to be transferred.
(5)
The election must be made by 31 March 2017.
205
206
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
(6)
(7)
It is therefore possible to choose the alternative that results in the 25,000 being chargeable in the company with the
lowest rate of corporation tax. Large is paying tax at the main rate of 21% as its profits exceed the revised upper profit limit
of 750,000 (1.5M / 2). Small will pay tax at 20% on the taxable net gain of 25,000 as its other profits of 100,000 leave it
50,000 below the revised lower profit limit of 150,000.
An election should therefore be made to deem the capital loss made by Large to have been made by Small. This will net
off the loss against Smalls gain and ensure that the remaining taxable gain is taxed at the lowest available rate within the
group.
Chapter 23
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Chargeable Transfers
Transfer of value
20/11/08
15/7/09
8/12/2013
PET
CLT
PET
40,000
405,000
184,000 (W1)
Less: Exemptions
Marriage
(5,000)
AE 2008/09
(3,000)
AE 2007/08
(3,000)
AE 2009/10
(3,000)
AE 2013/14
(3,000)
AE 2012/13
(3,000)
29,000
W1
402,000
178,000
Transfer of value
Before transfer (16,000 @ 25) =
400,000
After transfer (12,000 @ 18) =
(216,000)
184,000
Lifetime Transfers Chargeable When Made
15/7/09
CLT
325,000 @ nil
77,000 @ 25%
402,000
402,000
20/11/08 PET
15/7/09 CLT
Available nil rate band (325,000 - 29,000) = 296,000
296,000 @ nil
= nil
125,250 @ 40%
= 50,100
421,250
Gross
Transfers
29,000
421,250
19,250
=71,200
IHT
nil
50,100
450,250
Taper Relief (60%) (5-6 years)
Less:
Lifetime tax paid
Additional tax due on death
8/12/2013PET
178,000 @ 40%
IHT
= nil
= 19,250
Lifetime Transfers Chargeable on Death April 1, 2015
Less:
Gross
Transfers
421,250
178,000
628,250
(30,060)
20,040
(19,250)
790
71,200
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Chargeable Estate at Death April 1, 2015.
300,000
(80,000)
Principal Private Residence

Less: Repayment Mortgage
Holiday Home
Bank & Building Society Deposits
ISAs
Shares (12,000 @ 20)
Life Assurance
Less: Debts
Funeral Expenses
6,000
6,000
Less: Exempt bequest to spouse
220,000
140,000
230,000
50,000
240,000
140,000
1,020,000
(12,000)
1,008,000
(250,000)
Chargeable Estate
758,000
Gross Chargeable Transfers in 7 years before death
628,250
Nil Rate Band fully used therefore entire estate taxed @ 40%
758,000 @ 40%
303,200
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
The gift on 1 October 2002 to her son is a PET. This was not chargeable when made nor will it be chargeable on death as Dee survived
for the required 7 years. The transfer is therefore exempt but will be deemed to have used the Annual Exemptions for 02/03 and 01/02.
The gift on 1 June 2003 is a CLT and was chargeable when made but not on death as again Dee survived for 7 years.
The gift on 1 September 2009 is a PET and will be chargeable on death as Dee died within the next 7 years.
Step 1 Compute the Chargeable Transfers
1/6/03
CLT
278,000
Transfer of value
Less: Exemptions
AE 03/04
AE 09/10
AE 08/09
Chargeable Transfer
1/9/09
PET
296,000
(3,000)
275,000
(3,000)
(3,000)
290,000
AE 02/03 will have been applied to the 1 October 2002 PET despite it never becoming chargeable.
Step 2 Lifetime Transfers Chargeable When Made
1/6/03
CLT
255,000 @ nil
20,000 @ 25%
275,000
Gross
Transfers
280,000
IHT
5,000
= nil
= 5,000
As the donor, Dee, paid the IHT, the transfer is a net transfer and therefore the excess over the nil rate band is taxed at 25%
207
208
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
Step 3 Lifetime Transfers Chargeable on Death
This is the hardest part of the question and requires us to firstly determine the earliest transfer within the 7 years before death as
the starting point. In this example there is only one such transfer the PET on 1/9/09. However in computing any IHT payable on
this transfer we must take account of what nil rate band is available after firstly deducting from it any CLTs made within the 7 years
of this transfer:
CLT 7 years < 1/9/09

1/9/09 PET
Available nil rate band = 325,000 280,000
= 45,000 @ nil
= nil
245,000 @ 40%
= 98,000
290,000
Less:
Taper Relief ((5-6 years) 60%)
Gross
Transfers
280,000
290,000
570,000
IHT
98,000
(58,800)
39,200
Although the CLT of 1 June 2003 has drastically affected the tax payable on the PET of 1 September 2009 it will only be relevant
for transfers within the following 7 years hence any transfer after that date (1 June 2010), or as here the Chargeable Estate, will not
take account of this earlier CLT in computing any IHT payable.
The 7 year cumulation period at the date of death will only therefore consider the PET of 1 September 2009 in determining any
available nil rate band.
If the taxpayer had taken advice before making the PET in September 2009 she may have delayed the gift until after 1 June 2010
such that then if the PET were to become chargeable as a result of her death the CLT of 1 June 2003 would not then be taken into
account in computing the IHT on the PET and no IHT would then be payable upon it as it would be entirely within the available nil
rate band at the date of death.
Step 4 Chargeable Estate at Death 1 March 2015
Chargeable Estate
Available nil rate band = 325,000 290,000 = 35,000
IHT on Estate
35,000 @ nil
= nil
465,000 @ 40%
= 186,000
500,000
500,000
Chapter 24
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
(a)
Orchid Ltd will become liable to compulsory VAT registration when its taxable supplies during any 12-month period exceed 81,000.
The taxable supplies for the first 12 months of trading to 31 May 2015 amount to only 64,400 so we now move forward adding in
the next month, June 2015 and removing the sales of what is now 13 months ago, June 2014, as this revised 12 month total is only
72,300 compulsory registration is still not required. When we move forward to the end of July 2015, however taxable supplies will
amount to 82,000 (4,300 + 5,100 + 4,700 + 4,700 + 4,900 + 4,800 + 6,000 + 6,100 + 7,900 + 8,200 +11,800 + 13,500).
(b) Orchid Ltd will have to notify HMRC by 30 August 2015, being 30 days after the end of the period.
(c)
The company will be registered from 1 September 2015 or from an agreed earlier date.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 2
A business must register for VAT if there are reasonable grounds for believing that taxable supplies will exceed 81,000 in the following
30 days.
Forecast income is 90,000 per month, and so taxable supplies for the 30-day period to 30 April 2015 will exceed 81,000.
Tulip Ltd will have to notify HMRC by 30 April 2015, being the end of the 30-day period, and will be registered from 1 April 2015.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 3
Prior to putting up its prices, Vine Ltds net profit is 73,200 (78,000 - 4,800).
If Vine Ltd puts up its prices, then it will exceed the VAT registration limit of 81,000, and the business will have to register for VAT.
Output VAT will have to be absorbed by Vine Ltd, as sales are to the general public and there is no further scope for price increases.
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
The revised annual net profit will be:
70,000
(4,000)
66,000
Income (84,000 100/120)

Expenses (4,800 100/120)
Net profit
This is a decrease in net profit of 7,200 (73,200 66,000), and so it is not beneficial for Vine Ltd to put up its prices.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 4
VAT Return - Quarter ended 31 March 2015
Output VAT
Sales (120,000 95% (100% - 5%) 20%)
Input VAT
Purchases and expenses (35,640 - 480 = 35,160 20%)
Irrecoverable debt (2,000 95% x 20%)
Machinery (21,150 20/120)
VAT payable
Due date ( see Section 5 of chapter)
22,800
7,032
380
3,525
10,937
11,863
7/05/15
Notes:
(1)
The calculation of output VAT must take into account the discount for prompt payment, even if customers do not take it.
(2)
Input VAT on UK customer entertaining cannot be reclaimed If they had been overseas customers the input tax would be
recoverable..
(3)
Relief for an irrecoverable debt is not given until six months from the time that payment is due and again must account for
the prompt payment discount.
(4)
Input VAT on motor cars not used wholly for business purposes cannot be reclaimed.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 5
Input VAT can be reclaimed in respect of the cost of petrol and repairs.
Because fuel is being provided for private use to the director, Poppy plc will have to account for output VAT based on the scale charge.
The quarterly cost is 74 (445 20120)
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 6
The late submission of the VAT return for the quarter ended 30 September 2013 will have resulted in HMRC issuing a surcharge liability
notice specifying a surcharge period running to 30 September 2014.
The late payment of VAT for the quarter ended 31 December 2013 will result in a surcharge of 426 (21,300 2%).
The surcharge period will have been extended to 31 December 2014.
Bluebell Ltd then submitted four VAT returns on time.
The late submission of the VAT return for the quarter ended 31 March 2015 will therefore only result in a surcharge liability notice (specifying
a surcharge period running to 31 March 2016).
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 7
Greater of
t
b
t
b
The de minimis level is therefore 10,000. As the error is less than the de minimis level, it can be disclosed on the next VAT return, that is
the VAT return for the quarter to 31 March 2015. No interest will be charged by HMRC but a penalty for submission of an incorrect return
could be imposed, unless Blanche Ltd simply made a mistake. But if HMRC believes Blanche Ltd failed to take reasonable care, the penalty
may be 30% 8,500 = 2,550.
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 8
(1)
The export of 50,000 of goods to the VAT registered customer in France will be zero rated.
(2)
The export of 10,000 of goods to the non VAT registered individual in Latvia will need to have VAT equal to (20% 10,000)
2,000 accounted for by BW Ltd on its VAT return as output VAT.
209
210
Paper F6
ANSWERS TO EXAMPLES
(3)
The import of 12,000 of goods from the Non EU supplier will necessitate VAT of 12,000 20% = 2,400 being paid to
HMRC at the point of entry (assuming the duty deferment scheme is not in place). This can then be recovered as input VAT
on the VAT Return.
(4)
The import of 20,000 of goods from the EU supplier will involve a self supply of output VAT of 20,000 20% = 4,000
being accounted for by BW Ltd on its VAT Return for quarter to 31 March 2015. However assuming BW Ltd makes wholly
taxable supplies the same amount of 4,000 can be recovered as input VAT.
Extract from BW Ltd VAT return for quarter to 31 March 2015
Output VAT
1) On supplies to Non VAT registered EU customer
2) On self supply of acquisition from EU supplier
2,000
4,000
Input VAT
1) On import from non EU supplier
2) On self supply of acquisition from EU supplier
(2,400)
(4,000)
Chapter 25
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
Photo Plc
Corporation tax liability
FY 2013 (3/12 2M) 23% =
FY 2014 (9/12 2M) 21% =
115,000
315,000
430,000
All payable by instalments

This will be paid as follows:
107,500
on
14 July 2014
107,500
on
14 October 2014
107,500
on
14 January 2015
107,500
on
14 April 2015
In reality of course as the payments are based on an estimate of the current years liability and the first payment is made in only the 7th
month of the accounting period the amounts paid are likely to change at each payment date as that estimate is updated.
Chapter 26
ANSWER TO EXAMPLE 1
The payments on account for 2014/15 will be based on the tax payable by self assessment and the class 4 (NIC) liability in 2013/14
Due dates:
31/1/2015 13,0002
= 6,500
31/7/2015 13,0002
= 6,500
The Balancing payment for 2014/15 is made up as follows
Total income tax liability

14,000
(2,000)
12,000
Class 4 NIC liability
2,500
Capital Gains tax
1,700
less Payments on Account
(13,000)
Balancing Payment due 31/1/2016
3,200
The payments on Account for 2015/16 will be based on the income tax payable by self assessment and class 4 NIC liability in 2014/15
31/1/2016
(12,000 + 2,500)/2
= 7,250
31/7/2016
= 7,250
Total payment to be made on 31 January 2016 is 10,450 (3,200 + 7,250)
Paper F6
211
212
Paper F6
Paper F6
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
1
UK Tax System
Jackie received property income of 5,000 but accidently entered the figure on her tax return as 500.
Michelle receives property income of 7,000 p.a. and deliberately declares 5,000 on her tax return.
Which of the above represents tax avoidance or tax evasion?
Kate
Kate has the following income and outgoings for 2014/15:

Trading profit
Employment Income
Bank Deposit Interest (amount received)
Dividend income (amount received)
Qualifying interest (amount paid)
Gift aid (amount paid)
36,535
8,000
2,800
1,800
1,000
2,000
PAYE of 505 was deducted from the Employment Income.

Calculate the amount of income tax payable by Kate for 2014/15.
Jessica
Jessica had the following income and outgoings for 2014/15

Trading profit
Bank interested received
90,000
16,000
1,600
Calculate the amount of income tax payable by Jessica for 2014/15
Karl
Karl has the following income and outgoings for 2014/15
Employment income
140,000
Dividends received
27,000
Qualifying interest (amount paid) 3,000
3,200
PAYE of 48,520 was deducted from the Employment income
Calculate the amount of income tax payable by Karl for 2014/15
Mr & Mrs Elderely
Mr Elderely was born in 1946 and receives Property Income of 45,000 in the tax year 2014/15
His wife Mrs Elderely was born in 1942 and earns no income in 2014/15.
Calculate Mr Elderelys income tax liability and recommend what course of action you would advise the couple to take to
reduce this liability.
213
214
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
Michael
Michael was born in 1946 and received Property income of 110,000 in 2014/15.
Calculate his income tax liability
Peter
Peter acquired two properties on 1 June 2014 that were first let on 1 July 2014.
Property A is let unfurnished for an annual rental of 4,000 payable quarterly in advance. Peter incurred the following expenditure in
respect of this property during the period to 5 April 2015.
20 June 2014
Repairs to roof following a violent storm on 15 June 2014
1,600
29 June 2014
Insurance for y/e 31/5/15
420
01 February 2015 Repainting exterior
810
Property B is let furnished for an annual rental of 5,000, payable quarterly in arrears. The tenants were late in paying the amount due on
31 March 2015, and this was not received until 15 April 2015. Peter incurred the following expenditure in respect of this property during
the period to 5 April 2015.
4 June 2014 Letting expenses paid to agent

40
29 June 2014 Insurance for y/e 31/5/15
585
You are required to calculate Peters Property Income for the tax year 2014/15.
Matthew
Matthew owns three cottages that are let out. For the tax year 2014/15 the rent and allowable deductions for each cottage are as follows:
Rent
Deductions
Cottage 1
5,000
7,500
Cottage 2
4,000
2,000
Cottage 3
1,500
4,500
All the cottages are let unfurnished.
Calculate Matthews Property loss for the tax year 2014/15 and discuss the options for its use.
Charlie
Charlie lets out a room in his residence to a lodger. The lodger pays rent of 120 per week throughout 2014/15, and the total allowable
expenses are 5,100 (including a wear and tear allowance)
Charlie had elected for rent a room relief to apply for 2013/14.
Advise Charlie whether or not he should withdraw the election
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
10 John
For the past five years John has run a business importing electrical goods from the Far East which he then sells to wholesalers in the UK.
His statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 2014 is as follows:
Sales
325,000
Cost of sales
(172,500)
Gross profit
152,500
Rent received (Note 1)
9,500
162,000
Wages and salaries
50,200
Rent and rates (Note 1)
12,900
Light and heat (Note 1)
5,250
Depreciation of fixtures and fittings
1,500
Insurance
3,550
Travelling and entertaining (Note 2)
10,750
Irrecoverable debts (Note 3)
6,750
Depreciation of vehicles
7,500
Motor car expenses (Note 4)
4,500
Sundry expenses (Note 5)
750
Legal and professional charges (Note 6)
4,750
Interest on bank overdraft
1,500
Van expenses
9,300
Telephone
3,350
Repairs and renewals (Note 7)
3,500
126,050
Net profit
35,950
Notes
(1)
Rent received is in respect of a flat above Johns business premises that is rented out. John estimates that a tenth of the rent
and rates, and a seventh of the light and heat is in respect of this flat.
(2)
Travelling and entertaining expenses:
Johns business travelling expenses
5,175
Christmas presents for staff
250
Entertaining UK customers
5,050
Gifts to customers that carry the business name:
Boxes of chocolate costing 5.00 each
125
Calendars costing 1.50 each
150
10,750
(3)
Irrecoverable Debts
Trading debts written off
5,250
Increase in allowance against specific debtors
1,750
Non trading loan written off
200
A trade debt recovered which had been written off the previous year
(450)
6,750
(4)
Motor car expenses
Johns motor car expenses
3,300
Salesmans motor car expenses
1,200
4,500
Johns total mileage for the year was 12,000 miles. During the year he drove 2,000 miles on a touring holiday and estimates that the
balance of his mileage is 20% private and 80% business.
(5)
Sundry expenses
50
Donation to local political party
100
Subscription to chamber of commerce
25
215
216
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
A gift to a member of staff upon marriage
Johns squash club subscription
Advertising in trade press
(6)
(7)
45
250
280
750
John often uses his squash club as a place to take customers since several of them are keen squash players.
Legal and professional charges
The cost of renewing a 21 year lease in respect of the business premises
250
Accountancy
3,050
Debt collection
300
Legal fees in connection with an action by an employee for unfair dismissal
1,150
4,750
Included in Johns accountancy fee is 950 for taxation services. Of this, 200 is for the normal taxation work involved in submitting
accounts to the HMRC. The balance is in respect of calculating Johns capital gains tax liability following the disposal of some shares
that he had owned.
Repairs and renewals
Repairs to the office photocopier
175
A new printer for the office computer
650
The installation of new central heating for the office
2,200
475
Decorating the office
3,500
During the year ended 31 December 2014 John took various electrical goods out of stock for his own and his familys use without
paying for them. These goods cost 450 and would have normally been sold at a mark up of 30%.
John has a room in his private house that he uses as an office as he often works at home. The allowable amount for the use of the
office is 250 and appears to be a fair estimate. Also, John makes business calls from his private telephone and he estimates the
business use as two fifths. The total of his private telephone calls for the year was 450.
Calculate Johns adjusted profit (before capital allowances) for the year ended 31 December 2014.
You should indicate by the use of zero any items in the statement of profit or loss for which no adjustment is required.
11 Carl
Carl prepares accounts to 5 April.
The written down value on the main pool as at 6 April 2014 was 23,500.
In the two years ended 5 April 2016 the following transactions took place.
1 Nov 2014
Purchased machinery costing 476,000.
10 Nov 2014
Sold two lorries (purchased for 8,450 each) for 2,500 each. Purchased two replacement lorries for 15,250 each.
1 Dec 2014
Purchased a motor car with CO2 emissions of 170 g/km for 16,600 for use by the sales manager.
1 July 2015
Purchased thermal insulation for a business building of 120,000
1 Nov 2015
Purchased a motor car with CO2 emissions of 120 g/km for 7,500.
1 Dec 2015
Sold the motor car purchased on 1 December 2014 for 12,000.
Calculate the capital allowances available to Carl for the years ended 5 April 2015 and 5 April 2016.
12 Jason
Jason commenced trading on 1 July 2013 drawing up accounts to 31 May each year.
Trading profit for each accounting period is as follows:
1 July 2013 to 31 May 2014

33,000
24,000
36,000
Calculate the trading profit assessments for the relevant tax years and any overlap profits arising.
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
13 Stephen
Stephen started to trade on 1 February 2009 and ceased trading on 31 October 2014. His accounts shows the following trading income.
P/e 30 April 2010

30,000
Y/e 30 April 2011
10,000
Y/e 30 April 2012
12,000
Y/e 30 April 2013
15,000
Y/e 30 April 2014
18,000
P/e 31 October 2014
7,000
Calculate the trading profit assessments for all relevant tax years.
14 Grace
Grace starts a trade on 1 May 2014, and has the following results (before capital allowances).
Period of account
Profit
1 May 2014 31 July 2015

128,360
1 August 2015 31 July 2016
88,013
1 August 2016 31 July 2017
75,727
Plant is bought as follows:
Date
1 May 2014 Plant
1 Dec 2014 Car (115g /km)
1 Oct 2015 Machinery
1 Feb 2017 Plant
Cost
69,500
21,600
40,000
25,000
On 1 May 2017, the car purchased on 1 December 2014 was sold for 13,000.
Calculate the trading profit assessments for the opening tax years as far as the available information permits, assuming
maximum capital allowances are claimed.
Assume that the capital allowance rates applicable to the 14/15 tax year apply throughout.
15 David
David traded for many years preparing accounts to 5 April when he ceased trading at 30 June 2016. Trading profits (before capital
allowances) have been as follows:
Year ended
5 April 2015
25,000
5 April 2016
27,000
Period to 30 June 2016
14,000
Expenditure on plant had been as follows:
Date
1 June 2014
1 October 2015
Cost
2,800
4,600
All items of plant were sold on 30 June 2016 for 4,000 (no item was sold for more than cost).
The written down value of the main pool as at 6 April 2014 was 14,800.
Overlap profit from commencement was 2,000
Calculate the trading profit assessments for the last three tax years of assessments.
Assume that the capital allowance rates applicable to the 2014/15 tax year apply throughout
217
218
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
16 Max
Max began trading on 1 January 2014. He prepares accounts to 31 December annually, with results as follows:
Trading profit
Year ended 31 December 2014 Loss

(12,000)
Year ended 31 December 2015 Loss (estimated)
(4,000)
Year ended 31 December 2016 Profit (estimated)
8,000
Year ended 31 December 2017 Profit (estimated)
11,500
Prior to commencing self-employment, Max had the following income from employment:
2010/11
2011/12
2012/13
2013/14
9,200
13,800
10,100
1,400
(a)
Calculate the trading profit assessments for relevant tax years assuming loss relief is carried forward.
(b)
Show how the losses incurred in the first years of trading can be relieved under special opening years loss relief, by
showing the net income of each year affected by the loss relief.
17 Elliot
Elliot has been in business many years producing accounts to 31 December.
His recent trading profit results are as follows:
y/e 31 Dec 2011
60,000
y/e 31 Dec 2012
30,000
y/e 31 Dec 2013
40,000
y/e 31 Dec 2014
(60,000)
Elliots only other income is property income of 6,000 in each relevant tax year.
Assuming Elliot wants to claim relief for the trading loss as soon as possible calculate the taxable income for each relevant
tax year. Assume the 2014/15 personal allowance applies in all years
18 Anne and Betty

(a)
Briefly explain the basis by which partners are assessed in respect of their share of a partnerships trading profit.
(b)
Anne and Betty have been in partnership since 1 January 1997 sharing profits equally. On 30 June 2014 Betty resigned as a partner,
and was replaced on 1 July 2014 by Chloe. The profits were then split in the ratio of 2:1 between Anne and Chloe. The partnerships
trading profit is as follows:
60,000
72,000
As at 6 April 2014 Anne and Betty each have unrelieved overlap profits of 3,000.
Calculate the trading profit assessments of Anne, Betty and Chloe for 2014/15 and 2015/16.
(c)
Daniel and Elvis have been in partnership since 6 April 1995, making up accounts to 5 April. On 31 December 2014 Elvis resigned as
a partner, and was replaced on 1 January 2015 by Frank. For 2014/15 the partnership made a trading loss of 40,000, and this has
been allocated between the partners as follows:
Daniel
Elvis
Frank
(20,000)
(15,000)
(5,000)
Each of the partners has investment income. None of them have any capital gains.
State the possible ways in which Daniel, Elvis and Frank can relieve their Trading losses for 2014/15.
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
19 Renner
Renner is employed by C Ltd, a small family company, in which he holds 20,000 1 ordinary shares; the remaining 80% are held by the
other senior employees.
The company accounts show the following information:
Year to 30 November
Salary to Renner (paid at the end of each month)
Bonus to Renner (paid in the following February)
2014
28,500
4,200
2015
33,000
2,700
The following information is provided in respect of 2014/15.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
The senior employees have been able to use the company yacht moored on the south coast for two weeks each year since
its purchase. Renner spent his fortnight on the boat along with his family. The yacht cost the company 42,000 in 2009
(current value 33,000) and running and maintenance expenses amounted to 6,000 during the year.
Renner belongs to a private medical scheme and the company paid the required premium of 270 (including 50 for his
family),
Renner took meals in the fully-subsidised executive canteen; the cost for the year being 135. Another fully subsidised
canteen was available for the other staff.
When at the company premises Renner has use of a 3,500 cc Range Rover car owned by the company which emits 268 g/
km of CO2 . It had a list price of 62,000 when new in 2009 and costs 4,800 a year to run. It is garaged at the companys
head office and is also used by all the directors for business purposes.
Renner is also provided with a three year old 2 litre Mini (list price 16,500) with CO2 emissions of 149 g/km. Renner is provided with
private fuel. Both cars run on petrol, and the list price includes delivery and number plates.
He pays 3% of his basic salary into the companys occupational pension scheme. The company contributes 7% of his salary.
Renner is provided with a 2% loan from his employer of 20,000 which was granted three years ago to assist with the
purchase of his daughters residence. He has no other loans and has paid interest only on a monthly basis.
The company also loaned Renner one of its personal computers, with a printer, for use at home so that he could
improve his IT skills. The equipment had cost the company 2,800 (including 350 for the printer) in June 2012. The market
value of the equipment when it was first provided to Renner on the 6 April 2014 was 2,010.
From 6 June 2014 he lived in Southampton in a house owned by the company which cost 80,000 in 1995. Its market
value on 6 June 2014 was 138,000. The annual value for the period from 6 June 2014 to 5 April 2015 can be taken as
900. The company paid the following expenses in connection with the house during his period of residence in 2014/15.
Council tax
550
Electricity
260
Telephone
110
Cleaning
130
The furniture in the house is estimated to have cost 7,200.
Renner received a dividend of 20p per share in May 2014.
Compute Renners income tax liability for 2014/15

Assume the official rate of interest for 2014/15 is 3.25%.
20 George
(a)
George is employed by Exchequer plc earning an annual salary of 100,000 and has made the following gross personal pension
contributions since first joining a scheme in June 2012:
2012/13
28,000
2013/14
(b)
33,000
During 2014/15 he made cash payments of 60,000 into the pension scheme and wishes to know whether tax
relief will be available in full on this amount and what will be the maximum contribution he will be able to make in
2015/16.
Osbourne is an employee of Chancellor plc with an annual salary of 200,000pa. He has made regular annual gross personal
pension contributions of 60,000pa other than in 2013/14 when his gross contributions were only 30,000. In 2014/15 Osbourne
has made gross pension contributions of 90,000.
Compute Osbournes Income Tax liability for 2014/15.
219
220
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
21 Tony
Tony is in business as a baker, and prepares accounts to 31 March each year. He has given you the following information:
(1)
(2)
His trading income for the year ended 31 March 2015 was 18,479.
Tony employed Jack and Jill during 2014/15. Their gross wages were 8,200 and 12,480 respectively.
Jacks and Jills wages and employers NIC are already accounted in the profit figure which Tony has given you.
You are required to calculate the following:
(c)
The total Class 1 NICs payable for 2014/15.
(d)
The Class 2 and Class 4 NICs payable by Tony for 2014/15.
22 Chorley Ltd
You are presented with the accounts of Chorley Ltd for the year to 31 December 2014 (see below). Chorley Ltd runs a small printing business
and the managing director wishes to know the amount of the companies Adjusted trading profit for the year ended 31 December 2014.
Gross profit from trading

25,620
Profit on sale of business premises (1)
1,750
27,370
Advertising
642
Irrecoverable Debts
75
Depreciation
2,381
Light and heat
372
Miscellaneous expenses (2)
347
Motor car expenses (3)
555
Rates
1,057
Repairs and renewals (4)
2,598
Staff wages (5)
12,124
Telephone
351
20,502
Profit before tax
6,868
Notes
(1)
The profit on the sale of premises relates to the sale of a small freehold industrial unit in which the company stored paper
before building the extension.
(2)
Miscellaneous expenses included:

Subscription to Printers Association
Contribution to local Enterprise Agency
Gifts to customers
Calendars costing 7.50 each
Two food hampers
(3)
A director uses the motor car 75% for business purposes and 25% for private purposes.
(4)
Repairs and renewals comprises the following expenditure:

Refurbishing second hand press before it could be used in the business
Redecorating administration offices
Building extension to enlarge paper store
(5)
45
50
75
95
522
429
1,647
2,598
Staff wages includes an amount of 182 for a staff Christmas lunch.
Calculate Chorley Ltds Adjusted trading profit for year ended 31 December 2014.
You should indicate by the use of zero any items in the accounts for which no adjustment is required
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
23 Sail Ltd
Sail Ltd has the following results for the year ended 31 March 2015. It has one associated company.
380,000
9,000
12,000
21,000
45,000
22,000
Trading profit
Interest receivable
Property Income
Chargeable gains
Dividends received from UK companies (non associated)
Calculate the amount of corporation tax payable by Sail Ltd for the year ended 31 March 2015.
24 Swish Ltd
Swish Ltd has the following results for the year ended 31 March 2015
(116,500)
3,500
44,500
Net loss per Accounts (Note (1))

Interest receivable
Chargeable gain
Notes
10,800
1,200
(1)
Net loss is after charging:

Depreciation
Entertaining customers
(2)
(3)
All other expenses are allowable for corporation tax.

The written down value of plant and machinery on the main pool at 1 April 2014 was 20,000. There were no purchases or sales
during the year ended 31 March 2015.
Swish Ltd has the following results for the previous year:
(4)
Trading profit
Interest receivable
Chargeable gain
(a)
(b)
31/3/14
40,000
2,000
42,000
To compute the trading loss for the year ended 31 March 2015.
To show how the trading loss is relieved assuming relief is taken as soon as possible.
25 Trunk Limited
Trunk Limited acquired 1,000 shares in Branch Limited on 17th July 1994 costing 10,000. A further 500 shares in this company were
acquired on 20th February 1996 costing 6,000. In September 1998 there was a 1 for 2 Bonus issue and in October 1998 a 1 for 3 Rights
issue at 9 per share by Branch Limited.
On 15th October 2014 Trunk Limited acquired a further 1,000 shares in Branch Limited costing 15,000 and on 20th October 2014 sold
2,500 shares in Branch Limited for 40,000
Calculate the chargeable gain arising on the sale of the Branch Limited shares in October 2014
RPIs to be used are
July 1994
February 1996
September 1998
October 1998
October 2014
144.0
150.9
164.4
164.5
257.7
221
222
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
26 Granger Limited
Granger Limited bought a piece of land in January 1991 for 5,000. In December 2014 the company sold part of the land for 4,500 at
which time the remaining part was valued at 20,500.
In addition the company sold some antique furniture for 5,000 in September 2014. It had originally purchased the furniture in August
1996 for 8,000.
It also sold a painting for 6,600 in October 2014. It was purchased in July 1996 for 2,000.
Calculate the net chargeable gain arising on the above transactions
RPIs to be used
January 1991
July 1996
August 1996
September 2014
October 2014
December 2014
130.2
152.4
153.1
257.6
257.7
257.5
27 Westcroft Limited
Westcroft Ltd purchased a painting in February 2009 for 100,000. In September 2014 it was stolen and never recovered. In December
2014 the company received insurance proceeds of 500,000 and immediately acquired a replacement painting for 450,000.
Calculate the chargeable gain arising in December 2014 and the base cost of the replacement painting.
RPIs to be used
February 2008
September 2014
December 2014
211.4
257.6
257.5
28 Mighty Ltd
Mighty Ltd has been offered 160,000 for a freehold factory that it owns, and is now considering disposing of the factory. The company
acquired the factory on 15 March 1984 and it now has an indexed cost of 120,000. The factory has always been used by Mighty Ltd for
business purposes.
Explain the chargeable gains implications of each of the following alternative courses of action that Mighty Ltd is considering
taking to replace the factory if sold:
(a)
Acquiring a larger freehold factory for 170,000.
(b) Acquiring a smaller freehold factory for 155,000 and using the remainder of the proceeds as working capital.
(c)
Using the proceeds to pay a premium of 180,000 for a 40-year lease of a new factory (it is possible that a freehold warehouse will
also be bought in the next two or three years for an estimated cost of 200,000).
29 Claude
For 2014/15 Claude has made the following gains and capital losses:
t
a gain of 31,000
t
a gain of 24,000
t
a capital loss of 7,000
t
a capital loss brought forward of 10,000
All three assets were purchased during May 2012 and were sold during September 2014.
Calculate the CGT in 2014/15 assuming his taxable income is 50,000
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
30 Cheryl
Cheryl disposed of various assets in 2014/15 resulting in chargeable gains of 40,000. Her taxable income was 32,000 and she made a
gift aid payment of 1,600 in the tax year.
Calculate Cheryls capital gains tax for 2014/15 and state the due date for payment
31 Shamus
Shamus acquired a property in October 2013 for 124,000. This was damaged by flooding in December 2014. In January 2015 the
insurance company made a payment of 50,000. In February 2015 Shamus spent 60,000 restoring the property. The property was worth
160,000 prior to the restoration. He made an election to deduct the proceeds from the cost of the property on a future disposal.
Calculate the capital gain arising on the receipt of the insurance proceeds in January 2015 and the base cost of the property
on a future disposal. Recompute these figures assuming that no election was made.
32 Zoe
Zoe acquired 1,500 shares in XYZ Ltd on 30 April 2014 for 18,000, and 500 shares on 31 May 2014 for 7,000.
On 10 February 2015 Zoe bought a further 200 shares in the company for 3,600.
Zoe sold 1,000 shares in XYZ Ltd on 31 January 2015 for 20,000.
Calculate Zoes capital gain on the disposal of the shares
33 Michael
Michael had the following transactions in the shares of Saint Ltd:
January 2014
May 2014
Purchased 600 shares for 1,500
June 2014
Took up 1 for 3 rights issue at 2.30 per share
August 2014
Calculate the capital gain on the disposal in August 2014.
34 Jenny
Jenny disposed of her entire business in October 2014 giving rise to the following gains and losses.
Gain
Loss
Goodwill
100,000
Factory used in the business
250,000
Investment Asset
80,000
Warehouse
(50,000)
She had owned the business for five years.
In addition she disposed of her entire shareholding in Max Limited giving rise to a gain of 145,000.
She owned 15% of the shares in Max Limited for two years and had worked for Max Ltd as an employee for the entire period of ownership.
Jenny has capital losses brought forward at 6 April 2014 of 15,000 and her taxable income for 2014/15 was 30,000.
Calculate Jennys Capital Gains Tax for 2014/15 and state the due date for payment.
223
224
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
35 Beth
Beth bought a factory in September 1998 for 635,000. In December 2014, wishing to move to a more convenient location, she sold the
factory for 750,000. She moved into a rented factory until March 2015 when she purchased and moved into a new factory.
What is the base cost of the new factory if it was purchased for
(a)
700,000,
or
(b) 550,000?
36 Wendy
Wendy purchased shares in an unquoted trading company of which she owned a 1% holding (and worked part time) in November 1999
for 40,000. In January 2015 she sold them to her grandson for 70,000 when their value was 165,000. Wendy and her grandson claimed
relief for a gift of business assets.
Required
(a)
What is the chargeable gain, if any, incurred by Wendy?
(b)
What is the base cost of the shares for Wendys grandson?
37 Amy
Amy bought a house on 1 April 1985 and occupied as follows:
1/4/1985 1/4/1986
lived in it
1/4/1986 30/9/1990
travels the world and lets the house
1/10/1990 1/4/1994
lived in it
1/4/1994 1/5/2014
house empty
Amy sold the house on 1 May 2014 for 400,000. It cost 190,270 on 1 April 1985
Calculate the chargeable gain on the sale of the house after considering all reliefs
38 Nathan
(a)
Nathan made the following lifetime gifts:

(1)
23 October 2005
A gift of 356,000 into a trust
(2)
17 September 2008
A gift of 47,000 to his nephew on the occasion of his marriage
(3)
14 February 2010
A gift to his civil partner of 100,000
(4)
26 August 2011
A gift of 276,000 to a trust.
Calculate the IHT payable on the lifetime transfers assuming that Nathan pays any IHT due on the first transfer into
trust and the trustees pay IHT due on the second transfer into trust. Clearly state who is responsible for paying the
tax and the due date for payment.
The nil rate bands are as follows
2005/06
275,000
2008/09
312,000
2009/10
325,000
2011/12
325,000
(b)
Nathan died on 30 November 2014 leaving an estate comprising of a property valued at 500,000.
There was an interest only mortgage of 150,000 outstanding on this property
In addition he owned
Quoted shares in various companies valued at
120,000
Paintings valued at
205,000
Motor cars valued at
50,000
Building society accounts of
36,000
Nathan had a life assurance policy on his own life. The surrender value at 30 November 2014 was 100,000 and proceeds received
on 30 December 2014 of 105,000
Nathan had credit card debts of 2,500 and had also verbally promised to pay the 1,000 legal fees of a friend. Funeral expenses
amounted to 5,000.
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
Under the terms of his will he left 100,000 to his civil partner Norris, 20,000 to his niece and the residue of the estate to his
nephew.
Using the information from the part (a), calculate the IHT as a result of death on the lifetime gifts made by Nathan
and the IHT on the death estate.
Clearly state who is responsible for paying the tax, who suffers it and the due date for payment
39 VAT
(a)
Kite Ltd started trading on 1 December 2014, and its forecast turnover is as follows:
One month ended 31 December 2014

26,000
Quarter ended 31 March 2015
84,000
Quarter ended 30 June 2015
68,000
Quarter ended 30 September 2015
81,000
Assume that the quarterly sales figures accrue evenly within the period.
Advise Kite Ltd when it should register for VAT, and if so, when HMRC should be notified.
(b)
Cart Ltd is registered for VAT, and its sales are all standard rated. The following information relates to the companys VAT return for
the quarter ended 31 December 2014:
(1)
Standard rated sales amounted to 240,000. Cart Ltd offers its customers a 5% discount for prompt payment, and this discount is taken by half of the customers.
(2)
Standard rated purchases and expenses amounted to 71,280. This figure includes 960 for entertaining UK customers.
(3)
On 15 December 2014 the company wrote off irrecoverable debts of 4,000 and 1,680 in respect of invoices due for payment on 10 May and 5 August 2014 respectively.
(4)
On 30 December 2014 the company purchased a motor car at a cost of 32,900 for the use of a director, and machinery at a
cost of 42,300. Both these figures are inclusive of VAT. The motor car is used for both business and private mileage.
Unless stated otherwise, all of the above figures are exclusive of VAT.
Calculate the amount of VAT payable by Cart Ltd for the quarter ended 31 December 2014.
40 Geewizz Ltd
Geewizz Ltd commenced trading as a manufacturer of childrens toys on 1 April 2014, and the company is in the process of completing its
VAT return for the quarter ended 31 March 2015.
All of Geewizz Ltds sales are standard rated. It has recently been suffering some debt collection problems with a number of slow paying
customers and irrecoverable debts where customers have not paid. At present, the company does not use the cash accounting scheme.
Geewizz Ltds first three VAT returns were submitted on 20 August 2014, 26 October 2014 and 25 January 2015 respectively. The VAT payable in respect of the second and third returns was not paid until 11 November 2014 and 5 March 2015 respectively.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Explain the implications if the VAT return and the VAT payable for the quarter ended 31 March 2015 are not submitted
to HMRC until 20 May 2015.
State the conditions that Geewizz Ltd needs to satisfy before it will be permitted to use the cash accounting scheme or
the annual accounting scheme.
Explain the advantages of using either scheme.
41 Factor Limited
Factor Limited manufactures music CDs. Its customers are mainly overseas.
Discuss the VAT implications of selling the music CDs to non European Union (EU) customers and alternatively EU customers.
Further what are the VAT implications of buying the raw materials to manufacture the music CDs from non EU suppliers and
alternatively from EU suppliers.
225
226
Paper F6
PRACTICE QUESTIONS
42 Group Relief
A Ltd controls four companies B, C, D and E (all subsidiaries being 100% owned). Each company had the following results for the year
ended 31 March 2015.
Trading profit/(loss)
(100,000)
20,000
83,000
96,000
375,000
A Ltd
B Ltd
C Ltd
D Ltd
E Ltd
Calculate the corporation tax payable.

(a)
If no election for group relief is made; and
(b) If an election for group relief is made, on the assumption that A Ltds loss is allocated in such a manner as to save the
maximum amount of tax.
(c)
Discuss which companies could form part of a VAT group and why. What are the advantages and disadvantages of a
forming of a VAT group?
43 Jim
Jim is required to make payments on account. His income tax payable by self assessment for 2013/14 was 5,100.
His income tax payable by self assessment in 2014/15 is 7,629, and he has a capital gains tax liability for the year of 1,000.
State the due dates for payments for tax year 2014/15 and the amount of payment due on each due date.
44 Enquiries
HMRC must give written notice before starting an enquiry into a self assessment personal tax return.
(a)
State the date by which the written notice must normally be given
(b)
State the circumstances under which HMRC can extend the above deadline and the time limits for this extension.
(c)
State the three main reasons for the commencement of an enquiry.
(d)
Explain the choices available to a taxpayer who is notified of an additional liability as a result of an enquiry.
45 Cannock Limited
Cannock limited is a large company and has Taxable Total Profits in year ended 31 January 2015 of 2,400,000.
Calculate the corporation tax liability of Cannock Limited for the accounting period ended 31 January 2015 and state when
this liability is due for payment and the filing date for the corporation tax return.
Paper F6
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
UK Tax System
Jackie made a mistake on her tax return so this is neither tax avoidance or evasion. She could amend her tax return within 12 months of
the filing date. It is unlikely a penalty will be imposed for an incorrect return as this was a genuine mistake.
Michelle deliberately understated the income received. This is tax evasion.
A penalty is likely to be imposed for an incorrect return up to 70% of the tax revenue lost as the behaviour of the tax payer was a deliberate
understatement. (The penalty will be 100% if the error was concealed).
Kate
Trading profit
Employment Income
Interest 2,800 10080
Total Income
Less: Reliefs - Qualifying Interest
Net Income
Taxable income
Tax calculation
Non Savings:
(W1)
Savings [34,365 33,535 = 830]
Dividends
Kate Income tax computation 2014/15

Non savings
36,535
8,000
Savings
Dividends
3,500
44,535
(1,000)
43,535
(10,000)
33,535
3,500
2,000
2,000
3,500
2,000
3,500
2,000
33,535 20%
6,707
830 @ 20%
2,670 @ 40%
166
1,068
2,000 @32.5%
39,035

Less: tax deducted at source
Dividends (2,000 10%)
Savings (3,500 20%)
PAYE
Tax payable
650
8,591
(200)
(700)
(505)
7,186
(W1) The basic rate band is extended by the gross amount of the gift aid payment
31,865 + (2,000 10080) = 34,365
Note: The starting rate for savings income is not available as non savings income exceeds 2,880
Total
36,535
8,000
3,500
2,000
50,035
(1,000)
49,035
(10.000)
39,035
227
228
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
Jessica
Jessica Income tax computation 2014/15

Non savings
90,000
Trading profit
Total income
Less Personal allowance (W1)
Taxable income
Tax calculation
Non savings
(W2)
Savings
90,000
(6,000)
84,000
33,865 20% =
50.135 40% =
84,000
20,000 x 40%
104,560
Savings
20,000
20,000
20,000
Total
90,000
20,000
110,000
(6,000)
104,000
6,773
20,054
8,000

Bank interest 20,000 20%
Income tax payable
34,827
(4,000)
30,827
(W1) Total income = Net Income

Less Gift aid payment 1,600 100/80
Adjusted net income
Personal allowance
Less
(108,000 100,000)
Revised personal allowance
110,000
(2,000)
108,000
10,000
(4,000)
6,000
(W2) 31,865 + 2,000 = 33,865

150,000 + 2,000 = 152,000
Note: The starting rate for savings income is not available as non savings income exceeds 2,880.
Karl
Karl Income tax computation 2014/15

Non savings
140,000
Employment income
Dividend Income 27,000 100/90
Total income
Less reliefs
Qualifying interest
Net income
Less personal allowance (W1)
Taxable income
140,000
(3,000)
137,000
()
137,000
Tax calculation
Non savings (W2)
35,865 20% =
101,135 40% =
137,000
Dividends
30,000
30,000
30,000
30,000
7,173
40,454
Total
140,000
30,000
170,000
(3,000)
167,000
()
167,000
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
Dividends
(154,000 137,000 = 17,000)
17,000 32.5% =
13,000 37.5% =
167,000
Less tax deducted of source
Dividends 30,000 10%
PAYE
Income tax payable
5,525
4,875
58,027
(3,000)
(48,520)
6,507
(W1) Adjusted Net income:

Net income
Less Gift aid 3,200 100/80
Adjusted net income
167,000
(4,000)
163,000
As Adjusted Net Income exceeds 120,000 the personal allowance is reduced to nil.
(W2) Basic rate band
Additional rate band
31,865 + 4,000 = 35,865

150,000 + 4,000 = 154,000
Mr & Mrs Elderely
Mr Elderly Income tax Computation 2014/15
Property Income
Total Income
Taxable income
Tax calculation
31,865 @ 20%
3,135 @ 40%
Tax liability
Non savings
45,000
45,000
(10,000)
35,000
Total
45,000
45,000
(10,000)
35,000
6,373
1,254
7,627
(W1) As Mr Elderely was born between 6 April 1938 and 5 April 1948, he is entitled to the personal age allowance (PAA) of 10,500,
however this is abated to 9,440
PAA
less (45,000 27,000)
10,500
(9,000)
10,000
Restriction limited to reduce to normal PA
Mr Elderely is paying tax at 40% on part of his income and is wasting the personal age allowance, and Mrs Elderely is not using her
allowance ( 10,500 as she was also born between 6 April 1938 and 5 April 1948 ). It would be better to transfer part of the property
to his wife such that she would receive some of the income.
Mr Elderely should transfer any share of the property, the income would then be split 50:50, such that each is deemed to have
income of 22,500 which is below the income threshold for abatement of the personal age allowance.
229
230
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
Revised calculations
Property Income
Total Income
Taxable income
Tax calculation
12,000 @ 20%
Tax liability
Combined liability
Original liability
Tax Saving
Mr Elderely
22,500
22,500
(10,500)
12,000
Mrs Elderely
22,500
22,500
(10,500)
12,000
2,400
2,400
12,000 @ 20%
2,400
2,400
4,800
7,627
2,827
Michael
Michael Income tax computation 2014/15
Property income
Total income
Less personal allowance (W1)
Taxable income
Tax calculation
Non savings
31,865 20%
73,135 40%
105,000
Non savings
110,000
110,000
(5,000)
105,000
6,373
29,254
35,627
(W1) Michael was born between 6 April 1938 and 5 April 1948 so is entitled to the personal age allowance of 10,500.
This will be restricted as adjusted net income > 27,000 and the standard personal allowance will also be restricted as adjusted
net income > 100,000
Personal age allowance
Less (110,000 27,000)
Standard personal allowance
Less (110,000 100,000)
Revised Personal allowance
10,500
(41,500
restriction limited
10,000)
10,000
(5,000)
5,000
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
Peter
Rental income
Property A - 912 4,000
Property B - 912 5,000
3,000
3,750
6,750
Expenses
Property A
Insurance 10/12 420
Repainting exterior
Roof repairs (pre-trading expenditure)
350
810
1,600
Property B
Insurance 1012 585
Letting expenses
Wear and tear allowance 10% 3,750
487
40
375
(3,662)
3,088
Property Income for the tax year 2014/15
Matthew
The Property loss for the tax year 2014/15 will be 3,500 calculated as follows:
Rental income (5,000 + 4,000 + 1,500)
Expenses (7,500 + 2,000 + 4,500)
Property loss
10,500
14,000
(3,500)
This is carried forward against future property income only.
Charlie
Gross rents exceed 4,250

(52 120 = 6,240) so two treatments
(1)
Normal calculation
Rental income
less expenses
Property Income
(2)
6,240
(5,100)
1,140
Alternative calculation
Gross rents
less rent a room relief
Property Income
6,240
(4,250)
1,990
Charlie should withdraw the election so he is assessed on 1,140 in 2014/15
231
232
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
10 John
The adjusted profit should be 48,120 calculated as follows:
Net profit per accounts

Deduct
Rent received
Business use of office at private home
Business use of private telephone: (450 25)
35,950
9,500
250
180
(9,930)
26,020
Add back:
Wages and salaries
Rent and rates: 12,900 110
Light and heat: 5,250 17
Depreciation of fixtures and fittings
Insurance
Johns business travel
Christmas presents for staff
Entertaining UK customers
Gifts of chocolate to customers
Gifts of calendars
Trading debt written off
Increase in allowance
Non trading loan written off
Trade debt recovered (Taxable)
Depreciation of vehicles
Private motor expenses: 3,300 4,000/12,000 (W1)
Salesmans motor car expenses
Donation to local charity
Political donation
Subscription to chamber of commerce
Gift to employee on marriage
Squash club subscription
Advertising in trade press
Cost of renewing 21 year lease
Accountancy:
Taxation services re capital gains tax
Balance
Interest on bank overdraft
Van expenses
Telephone
Repairs to office photocopier
New printer
Central heating
Decorating the office
Goods for own consumption: 450 130100
0
1,290
750
1,500
0
0
0
5,050
125
0
0
0
200
0
7,500
1,100
0
50
0
100
0
0
250
0
0
750
0
0
0
0
0
650
2,200
0
585
22,100
48,120
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
(W1) Total mileage
Private (touring)
12,000
(2,000)
10,000
2,000
8,000
Private 20% 10,000

Business 80% 10,000
Total private use 4,000/12,000
11 Carl
Main Pool
WDV b/f
Machinery
Lorries
AIA(Maximum)
Special Rate
Pool
Allowances
23,500
476,000
30,500
506,500
(500,000)
500000
6,500
Other additions
Motor car > 130 g/km
Disposals
16,600
(5,000)
25,000
(4,500)
WDA @ 18%
WDA @ 8%
(1,328)
WDV c/f
WDV b/f
Thermal insulation for business building
AIA
16,600
20,500
15,272
20,500
15,272
120,000
(120,000)
4,500
1,328
505,828
120,000
-
Other Additions
Motor car (96 - 130g/km)
Disposals
WDA @ 18%
WDA @ 8%
WDV c/f
7,500
28,000
(5,040)
(12,000)
3,272
(262)
22,960
5,040
262
125,302
3,010
233
234
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
12 Jason
2013/14: Actual
1 July 2013 - 5 April 2014
2014/15: 1st 12 months (no CYB)
1 July 2013 - 30 June 2014
2015/16 (CYB)
2016/17: (CYB)
Overlap profits
(911 33,000)
27,000
33,000 + (112 24,000)
35,000
1 July 2013 - 5 April 2014

1 June 2014 - 30 June 2014
24,000
36,000
(112 24,000)
27,000
2,000
29,000
13 Stephen
2008/09 Actual
1/2/2009 5/4/2009
(30,000 215)
4,000
2009/10 Actual
6/4/2009 5/4/2010
(30,000 1215)
24,000
2010/11 12 months to accounting date ended in tax year
12m to 30/4/2010
(30,000 1215)
24,000
2011/12 CYB
Y/e 30/4/2011
10,000
2012/13 CYB
Y/e 30/4/2012
12,000
2013/14 CYB
Y/e 30/4/2013
15,000
2014/15
Y/e 30/4/2014
P/e 31/10/2014
Less: Overlap
1/5/2009 5/4/2010
18,000
7,000
25,000
(22,000)
3,000
(1115 30,000)
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
14 Grace
The capital allowances, computed for each period of account, are as follows:
Period to 31 July 2015
Plant 1/5/2014
AIA (max 15/12 x 500,000)
Other Additions - Car (96 - 130g/km) 1/12/2014
WDA (18% x 15/12 x 21,600)
69,500
69,500
Main Pool
Allowances
69,500
21,600
(4,860)
4,860
74,360
WDV c/f
16,740
Accounting Year ended 31 July 2016

WDV b/f
Plant 1/10/2015
AIA
16,740
40,000
(40,,000)
40,000
WDA @ 18%
(3,013)
3,013
43,013
WDV c/f
13,727
Accounting Year ended 31 July 2017

WDV b/f
Plant 1/2/2017
AIA
Disposal
13,727
25,000
(25,000)
25,000
(13,000)
727
(727)
Small Pool WDA

WDV c/f
The Trading profits of the first three periods of account are as follows.
Period of account
Working
1/5/2014 - 31/7/2015
(128,360 74,360)
1/8/2015 - 31/7/2016
(88,013 43,013)
1/8/2016 - 31/7/2017
(75,727 25,727)
The assessments are as follows.
Year
Basis of Assessment
2014/2015
2015/2016
2016/2017
2017/2018
727
25,727
Actual
12 months to accounting date ended in tax year
CYB
CYB
Trading Profits
54,000
45,000
50,000
Basis period
1/5/2014 - 5/4/2015
1/8/2014 - 31/7/2015
A/C y/e 31/7/2016
A/C y/e 31/7/2017
Working
54,000 1115
54,000 1215
Overlap profits are those from 1/8/2014 5/4/2015 ie: 815 54,000 = 28,800
Assessment
39,600
43,200
45,000
50,000
235
236
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
15 David
Capital allowances for each period of account:
WDV b/f
Plant
AIA - 100%
Main Pool
14,800
2,800
(2,800)
2,800
WDA @ 18%
14,800
(2,664)
WDV c/f
12,136

WDV b/f
Plant
AIA - 100%
Allowances
2,664
5,464
12,136
4,600
(4,600)
4,600
12,136
WDA @ 18%
(2,184)
WDV c/f
9,952
Period to 30 June 2016

WDV b/f
Disposal
9,952
(4,000)
5,952
(5,952)
Balancing allowance
Profits for periods of account:

Period of account
Working
6/4/2014 - 5/4/2015
6/4/2015 - 5/4/2016
6/4/2016 - 30/06/2016
2014/15
2015/16
2016/17
(25,000 5,464)
(27,000 6,784)
(14,000 5,952)
Trading profit Assessments

CYB (y/e 5/4/2015)
CYB (y/e 5/4/2016)
6/4/2016 - 30/6/2016
Less overlap profit
Trading profit
19,536
20,216
8,048
19,536
20,216
8,048
(2,000) 6,048
2,184
6,784
5,952
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
16 Max
(a)
Trading profit assessments

Trading profit
assessments
2013/14 (1/1/2014 - 5/4/2014)

3/12 ( 12,000) (loss)
2014/15 (1/1/2014 - 31/12/2014) (loss)
(12,000-3,000 (used in 13/14))
2015/16
Y/e 31/12/2015 (loss)
2016/17
Y/e 31/12/2016
Less: brought forward loss
2017/15
Y/e 31/12/2017
Less: brought forward loss
Nil
3,000
Nil
9,000
Nil
4,000
16,000
8,000
(8,000)
Nil
(8,000)
11,500
(8,000)
3,500
(8,000)
Loss carried forward

(b)
Trading loss
Nil

2013/14 loss of 3,000
This can be relieved against total income of 2010/11, 2011/12, 2012/13 in that order.
2014/15 loss of 9,000
2015/16 loss of 4,000
The revised net income for 2010/11 to 2013/14 is as follows:
Loss sustained in 2013/14

2010/11
Salary
Less: opening years loss relief
Net Income
2011/12
Salary
Net Income
2012/13
Salary
Net Income
9,200
(3,000)
6,200
3,000
(3,000)
Nil
9,000
13,800
(9,000)
4,800
(9,000)
Nil
4,000
10,100
(4,000)
6,100
(4,000)
Nil
237
238
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
17 Elliot
Assessments
2011/12
y/e 31 Dec 2011
2012/13
y/e 31 Dec 2012
2013/14
y/e 31 Dec 2013
2014/15
y/e 31 Dec 2014
60,000
30,000
40,000
NIL
(loss of 60,000)
Income Tax Computations

2011/12
60,000
6,000
66,000
Trading profit
Property Income
Total Income
Current year
Carryback
Net income
Personal Allowance
Taxable income
2012/13
30,000
6,000
36,000
2013/14
40,000
6,000
46,000
2014/15
NIL
6,000
6,000
()
66,000
(10,000)
56,000
36,000
(10,000)
26,000
(46,000)
(10,000)
6,000
(10,000)
Loss memo:
60,000
(46,000)
14,000
Trading loss 2014/15

Carryback 2013/14
Trading loss available to carry forward
A current year offset could be chosen but this would waste the Personal allowance of 2014/15 without achieving any tax saving. The carry
back against total income in 2013/14 is unrestricted as the non trading total income (6,000), does not exceed 50,000. As Elliot has traded
for many years the special opening years loss relief allowing a 3 year carry back is not available.
18 Anne and Betty

(a)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Each partner is treated as a sole trader running a business and is assessed on his / her share of the adjusted trading profit of
the partnership using the relevant basis of assessment for each partner. Continuing partners will be assessed using CYB.
The commencement rules apply when a new partner joins the partnership.
The cessation rules apply when an existing partner leaves the partnership.
(b)
1/1/2014 30/6/2014
(6/12 x 60,000) PSR1:1
1/7/2014 31/12/2014
(6/12 x 60,000) PSR 2:1

PSR 2:1
Total
60,000
Anne
Betty
30,000
15,000
15,000
30,000
60,000
20,000
35,000
15,000
Chloe
10,000
10,000
72,000
48,000
24,000
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
Assessments
Anne
2014/15 (CYB)
35,000
2015/16 (CYB)
48,000
Betty (note 1)
2014/15
6 months to 30/6/2014
Less: Overlap relief
15,000
(3,000)
12,000
Chloe (note 2)
2014/15 (Actual)
(1/7/2014 5/4/2015)
10,000 + (3/12 x 24,000)
16,000
2015/16 (CYB)
24,000
Note 1 Betty
Betty ceased trading on 30/6/2014 so her final tax year of assessment is 2014/15 in which she will be assessed on all remaining
profit as yet not assessed less her overlap relief. Therefore in the preceding tax year, 2013/14 she would have been assessed on her
normal CYB i.e. on her share of the profit of the accounting year ended 31/12/2013. The only remaining profit to be assessed is
therefore for her final 6 months of trading to 30/6/2014 which is then reduced by the available overlap relief.
Note 2 Chloe
Chloe commenced trading on 1 July 2014 so her first tax year of assessment is 2014/15 in which an actual basis applies. She is able
to use CYB from 2015/16 which will generate an overlap profit of 6,000 (3/12 x 24,000)
(c)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Daniel and Frank can carry the loss forward against future trading profits.
Daniel, Elvis and Frank can claim against total income for 2014/15 and/or 2013/14
Frank can claim against total income for 2011/12, 2012/13 and 2013/14. (Special opening year loss relief )
Elvis can claim against trading profit for 2013/14, 2012/13 and 2011/12. (Terminal loss relief )
19 Renner
Income tax computation - 2014/15
Non-savings
Earned income
Employment income (W1)
Dividend income (20,000 20p 10090)
Total Income
Less PA
Taxable income
Income tax
Basic rate:
Higher rate:
Non savings
Non-savings
Dividends
Dividends
48,036
48,036
(10,000)
38,036
31,865 @ 20%
6,171 @ 40%
4,444 @ 32.5%
6,373
2,468
1,444
10,285
4,444
4,444
4,444
Total
47,872
4,444
52,316
(10.000)
42,316
239
240
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
Workings
(W1) Employment income
Salary
(812 28,500)
(412 33,000)
19,000
11,000
30,000
4,200
14,736
48,936
(900)
48,036
Bonus (February 2015)

Benefits (W2)
Less: Occupational pension contributions (3% 30,000)
Employment income
(W2) Benefits
(a)
(b)
(c)
(e)
(f )
(g)
(h)
(i)
Use of yacht (Two weeks use only)

Annual value
20% (M.V. when first made available to any employee)
(20% 42,000 2/52)
Running expenses (6,000 2/52)
Private medical insurance - Cost to employer
Subsidised canteen - Exempt benefit
Car scale charges
Pool car - exempt benefit
Mini (W3)
Fuel charge (petrol)
Mini (W3)
Employers contribution into pension - Exempt benefit
Beneficial loan 20,000 (3.25% 2%)
Use of computer equipment
MV when first provided
Use of asset (20% 2,010)
Living accommodation
Annual value for ten months
Additional charge for expensive accommodation
[(138,000 75,000) 3.25% 1012]
Council tax
Electricity
Telephone
Cleaning
Use of furniture (20% 7,200 10/12)
323
231
554
270
3,630
4,774
250
402
900
1,706
550
260
110
130
1,200
4,856
14,736
Total assessable benefits

(W3) Mini - Car and fuel benefits
CO2 emissions = 145g/km (rounded down to the nearest 5g/km)
Petrol engine
Appropriate percentage
= 12% + (145 - 95) = 50/5 = 10%
= 22%
Car benefit (22% 16,500)
Fuel benefit (22% 21,700)
3,630
4,774
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
20 George
(a)
The maximum allowable contribution that George may make into his pension scheme, subject to his earnings level for a year is
his annual allowance limit of 40,000 for 2014/15 plus any unused allowance brought forward from the previous 3 years. For this
purpose we compare the gross amount of contributions made in the year with a deemed 50,000 (pre 14/15) annual limit for each
year so long as he was a member of a pension scheme for the tax year in question.
His payment of 60,000 will represent a gross pension contribution of 75,000 (60,000 x 100/80). As this exceeds the annual
allowance of 2014/15 he will now be able to use any unused allowance brought forward from the previous 3 years on a FIFO basis
i.e. 2011/12, 2012/13 and 2013/14.
As George was not a member of a pension scheme in 2011/12 no unused allowance will be available to carry forward from this
year. 22,000 of unused allowance (50,000 28.000) is available from 2012/13 and will now be fully utilised, followed by 13,000
of the 17.000 (50,000 33,000) unused allowance from 2013/14.
(b)
Tax relief will therefore be available on the full contribution of 75,000 (gross) made in 2014/15 and George will have 4,000 of
unused allowance to carry forward to 2015/16 which will permit a maximum allowable gross contribution of 44,000 to be made
in 2015/16.
Osbourne Income Tax Computation 2014/15
200,000
30,000
230,000
Nil
230,000
Employment Income
Annual Allowance Charge (note 1)
Personal Allowance (note 2)
Taxable Income
121,865 @ 20%
108,135 @ 40%
230,000
24,373
43,254
67,627
The basic and higher rate bands are extended by the gross amount of personal pension contributions (31,865+ 90,000 = 121,865)
and (150,000 + 90,000 = 240,000)
Osbourne has employment income of 200,000pa and hence all of the 90,000 pension contribution will attract tax relief.
Note 1 Osbourne has his annual allowance for 2014/15 of 40,000 and 20,000 brought forward unused allowance from 2013/14.
Therefore an Annual Allowance Charge will arise of 30,000 (90,000 60,000)
Note 2 Osbourne has an adjusted net income of 140,000 (230,000 90,000) which exceeds 120,000 and thus no personal
allowance is available
21 Tony
(a)
Class 1 NICs
Employees
Jack
Jill
(8,200 7,956) 12% =

(12,480 7,956) 12% =
Employers
Jack
(8,200 - 7,956) 13.8% =
Jill
(12,480 7,956) 13.8% =
Total Class 1 NICs
(b)
29
543
34
624
1,230
Class 2 NICs
52 2.75
143
Class 4 NICs
(18,479 7,956) 9%
947
241
242
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
22 Chorley Ltd
6,868
Profit before tax per Accounts

Deduct
Profit on sale of business premises
Add back:
Advertising
Irrecoverable debts
Depreciation
Light and heat
Subscription to printer association
Contribution to local Enterprise agency
Gifts to customers:
Calendars
Food hampers (1)
Director use of car (2)
Refurbishing press (3)
Redecorating adm offices
Building extension (3)
Staff Christmas lunch and wages (4)
Telephone
(1,750)
0
0
2,381
0
0
0
0
95
0
522
0
1,647
0
0
9,763
Notes
(1)
Gifts to customers are disallowed unless they amount to 50 or less per customer during the year and display a conspicuous
advert for the business. Gifts of food (or drink or tobacco) are disallowed irrespective of their cost.
(2)
Motor car expenses are all allowable for the company although the director will be taxed as an employee on the private
use of the car.
(3)
Refurbishment of the second hand press is disallowed on the grounds that the expenditure was necessary before it was
brought into use in the business. The extension of the paper store created a new asset and was not the repair of part of an
existing one.
(4)
The expenditure on the Christmas lunch is allowable for the employer.
23 Sail Ltd
Corporation tax computation for the year ended 31 March 2015
380,000
9,000
12,000
21,000
422,000
(22,000)
400,000
50,000
450,000
Trading profit
Interest receivable
Property Income
Chargeable gains
Less: Qualifying charitable donations
Taxable Total profits
Franked investment income (45,000 10090)
Augmented profits
400,000 at 21%
Marginal relief 00 (750,000 - 450,000)
84,000
400,000
(Note 1)
450,000
(667)
83,333
Note 1: Upper limit 1,500,000 2 (Sail Ltd plus one associated company) = 750,000 reduced upper limit.
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
24 Swish Ltd
(a)
Computation of Trading loss for the year ended 31/3/15
Net loss per accounts

Add back:
Depreciation
Entertaining
(116,500)
10,800
1,200
12,000
(104,500)
(3,600)
(108,100)
Less: Capital allowances 20,000 18%

Trading Loss
(b)
Year ended 31 March

2014
2015
40,000
2,000
3,500
44,500
42,000
48,000
(42,000) (48,000)
Nil
Nil
Trading profit
Interest receivable
Chargeable gain
Less: Current Year / Carry back
Taxable Total Profit
Loss memorandum
Loss for y/e 31/3/15 (part (a))
Less: Current Year relief y/e 31/3/15
Carry back relief y/e 31/3/14
Loss available to carry forward
108,100
(48,000)
(42,000)
18,100
25 Trunk Limited
Matching rules
t
same day
t
previous 9 days
Calculate the gain:
1,000
Proceeds
1,000
2,500
40,000
16,000
(15,000)
1,000
Less cost
Chargeable Gain
Share Pool
July 1994
Index up to February 1996
Number
1,000
150.9 144.0
144.0
10,000
164.5 150.9
150.9
16,479
257.7 164.5
164.5
24,714
Bonus issue 1:2

Sale October 2014
10,000
6,000
16,000
16,000
10,479
6,000
16,479
16,479
1,485
2,250
750
3,000
Rights issue 1:3 @ 9 per share

479
1,000
500
1,500
750
2,250
Purchase February 1996
Cost
Indexed cost
10,000
10,000
16,000
6,750
22,750
17,964
6,750
24,714
14,002
3,000
(1,500)
22,750
(11,375)
38,716
(19,358)
243
244
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
Calculate the gain
Proceeds
1,500
2,500
40,000
24,000
(11,375)
12,625
(7,983)
4,642
Less cost
Unindexed gain
Less indexation allowance (19,358 11,375)
Chargeable gain
Total chargeable gains:
Previous 9 days
Pool
Chargeable gains to include in Corporation tax computation
1,000
4,642
5,642
26 Granger Limited
(1)
Sale of land
4,500
Proceeds
Less cost 5,000
4,500
4,500 + 20,500
(900)
Unindexed gain
3,600
257.5 130.2
130.2
(880)
= 0.978 900
2,720
Chargeable Gain
(2)
Sale of antique furniture - Non wasting chattels rules
6,000
(8,000)
(2,000)
Deemed Proceeds
Less cost
Capital loss
(3)
Sale of painting - Non wasting chattel rules

(a)
Normal calculation
6,600
(2,000)
4,600
Proceeds
Less cost
Unindexed gain
257.7 152.4
152.4
= 0.691 2,000
Chargeable Gain
(b)
(1,382)
3,218
Restricted to
53 [6,600 6,000] = 1,000
Take lower gain = 1,000
Total chargeable Gains
Land
Painting
Antique
Net Chargeable Gains
2,720
1,000
(2,000)
1,720
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
27 Westcroft Limited
500,000
(100,000)
400,000
Disposal proceeds
Less cost
Unindexed gain
257.5 211.4
211.4
= 0.218 100,000
Chargeable Gain
(21,800)
378,200
As the proceeds have been used within 12 months of receiving the monies to buy a replacement asset, therefore some of the gain
can be deferred. However as only part of the proceeds have been used, some of the gain is chargeable immediately.
Proceeds
Cost of replacement
Chargeable now
500,000
(450,000)
50,000
Available to defer
378,200 50,000 = 328,200
When the replacement painting is sold the base cost is:
Actual cost
Less Gain Deferred
Base cost
450,000
(328,200)
121,800
28 Mighty Ltd
The chargeable gain on the disposal of the freehold factory is 40,000 (160,000 - 120,000).
(a)
Larger freehold factory
The gain will be rolled over against the base cost of the new factory as all the proceeds are reinvested:
Cost of factory
Gain rolled over
(b)
Smaller freehold factory

As only part of the proceeds are reinvested, the capital gain element that cannot be rolled over will be 5,000 (160,000 - 155,000).
This will be immediately chargeable to corporation tax. The balance of the gain will be rolled over as above.
Cost of factory
Gain rolled over (40,000 - 5,000)
(c)
170,000
(40,000)
130,000
155,000
(35,000)
120,000
Lease
If all the proceeds are used to acquire a depreciating asset (one with an expected life of no more than 60 years), the capital gain is
not rolled over but is instead held over. It will become chargeable to corporation tax on the earlier of:
the date that the lease is sold
the date when the leasehold property ceases to be used in Mighty Ltds trade
the expiry of ten years from the acquisition date.
Therefore the base cost of the lease remains at 180,000. If, before the held over gain becomes chargeable, a non-depreciating
asset is acquired, the capital gain can be rolled over in the usual way. In this question, if the freehold of the factory is acquired in
the next two to three years, all the proceeds will be reinvested and so the rollover claim would switch to the freehold factory cost
of 200,000.
t
t
t
In all the cases above the reinvestment must take place within 1 year before to 3 years after the disposal date if the gain is to be
eligible for relief
245
246
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
29 Claude
Claude 2014/15 Capital Gains Tax
31,000
24,000
(7,000)
48,000
(10,000)
38,000
(11,000)
27,000
7,560
Capital Gain
Capital Gain
Capital Loss
Net Capital gains arising in 2014/15
Less Capital loss brought forward
Net Capital Gains
Taxable Gains
Capital Gains Tax payable 27,000 28%
Claude is a higher rate taxpayer and hence all the taxable gains are taxed at 28%. The CGT will be due for payment on 31 January 2016
30 Cheryl
40,000
(11,000)
29,000
7,934
31/1/2016
Chargeable Gain
Less annual exemption
Taxable gains
Due
(W1) Basic rate band remaining
31,865 + (1,600 100/80) = 33,865 32,000 = 1,865
1,865 18% =
27,135 28% =
29,000
336
7,598
7,934
31 Shamus
As all proceeds have been used in restoring the asset, and a claim has been made to deduct the proceeds from the cost on a future
disposal, there is no gain arising in January 2015.
Base cost of restoration property when sold
Original cost
Restoration cost
Less Insurance Proceeds
Base cost
124,000
60,000
(50,000)
134,000
If no claim was made the receipt of the proceeds would be a part disposal in January 2015.
Proceeds
50,000
50,000
(29,524)
Less cost 124,000
50,000 + 160,000
Gain
20,476
On subsequent sale of the restored asset

Original cost (124,000 29,524)
Restoration
Base cost
= 94,476
= 60,000
154,476
Oct 2013
Feb 2015
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
32 Zoe
Apply matching rules
i)
same day
ii)
Next 30 days
Calculate a Gain
Proceeds 2001000 20,000
less cost
Capital Gain
iii)
X
10/2/2015
200 shares
4,000
(3,600)
400
Share Pool
Number
1,500
500
2,000
(800)
1,200
30/4/2014 Acquisition
31/5/2014 Acquisition
31/1/2015 Disposal
Calculate the Gain

Proceeds 8001000 20,000
Less cost
Capital Gain
Cost
18,000
7,000
25,000
(10,000)
15,000
16,000
(10,000)
6,000
Summary
Next 30 days
Share Pool
Total Capital Gains
400
6,000
6,400
33 Michael
Apply matching rules
i)
same day
ii)
Next 30 days
iii)
Share Pool
January 2014
May 2014
June 2014 Rights issue 1:3 @ 2:30
Disposal August 2014
Calculate the Gain

Proceeds
Less cost
Capital Gain
X
X
Number
2,700
600
1,100
4,400
(4,000)
400
Cost
5,400
1,500
2,530
9,430
(8,573)
857
14,000
(8,573)
5,427
247
248
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
34 Jenny
Gains not qualifying for Entrepreneurs Relief (ER)
Investment asset
Less capital loss b/f
Less Annual exemption
CGT @ 28% (Note 1)
80,000
(15,000)
65,000
(11,000)
54,000
15,120
Gains qualifying for ER
Sale of business
Goodwill
Factory
Warehouse
Sale of shares
CGT @ 10%
100,000
250,000
(50,000)
300,000
145,000
445,000
44,500
Total CGT 44,500 + 15,120 = 59,620 Due 31 January 2016

Note:
(1)
Jennys taxable income is below the basic rate band but the gains qualifying for ER effectively use up the remaining basic
rate band such that gains not qualifying for ER are taxed at 28%
(2)
The capital loss brought forward and the annual exemption are used in priority against those gains taxed at the highest tax
rate.
(3)
The remaining gains eligible for ER in future years are (10,000,000 445,000) = 9,555,000
35 Beth
(a)
Purchase cost of new factory

Capital gain on old factory (750,000 - 635,000)
Gain immediately chargeable (750,000 - 700,000)
Gain rolled over
700,000
115,000
(50,000)
(65,000)
635,000
Entrepreneurs relief is not available on the 50,000 gain chargeable as it is only the disposal of an asset used in the business not
the disposal of the entire business.
(b)

In this case the amount of proceeds not reinvested of 200,000 (750,000 -550,000) exceeds the gain made on the old factory. Thus
none of the gain is eligible to be rolled over and so there is no adjustment to the base cost of the new factory. It remains at the
purchase price of 550,000.
If further qualifying business assets were to be acquired by December 2017 (within 3 years of disposal date) then claims for rollover
relief against those assets may become available
As above entrepreneurs relief is not available.
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
36 Wendy
(a)
Wendy - Capital gain on shares sold in January 2015
Market value of shares in January 2015

Less: cost
Less: Gain deferred with gift relief claim
Gain
Less: (Proceeds received - Actual cost) = (70,000 - 40,000)
125,000
(30,000)
(95,000)
30,000
Chargeable Gain
(b)
165,000
(40,000)
125,000
Wendys grandson - Base cost
165,000
(95,000)
70,000
Market value of shares, January 2015

Less: Gain deferred
Base cost
37 Amy
Proceeds
Less cost
Gain
Less PPR relief (W1)
Less letting relief (W2)
Chargeable Gain
400,000
(190,270)
209,730
(64,902)
(10,817)
134,011
(W1)
1/4/85 1/4/86
1/4/86 30/9/90 (any reason)
1/10/90 1/4/94
1/4/94 1/5/14 (last 36 months)
PPR
209,730
Actual & Deemed

12m
36m
42m
18m
108m
Letting
Non occupation
Total
223m
223m
349m
18m
18m
108
= 64,902
349
(W2) Letting relief

Lower of
- 64,902
- 40,000
-
18
209,730 = 10,817
349
Letting relief = 10,817
249
250
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
38 Nathan
(a)
Chargeable transfers
Transfer value
Less: Exemptions:
AE 2005/06
AE 2004/05
Marriage exemption
AE 2008/09
AE 2007/08
AE 2011/12
AE 2010/11
Chargeable Transfer
Note: Transfer to civil partner on 14/02/2010 is exempt
23/10/2005 17/09/2008 26/08/2011

CLT
PET
CLT
356,000
47,000 276,000
(3,000)
(3,000)
(1,000)
(3,000)
(3,000)
350,000
40,000
(3,000)
(3,000)
270,000
350,000
Gross
368,750
IHT
18,750
270,000
270,000
638,750
54,000
Gross
368,750
40,000
408,750
IHT
Computation of IHT on lifetime transfers chargeable when made

23/10/2005 CLT
275,000 @ NRB = nil
75,000 @ 25% = 18,750
Tax paid by Nathan due 30/04/2006
26/08/2011 CLT
NRB of 325,000 deemed used by Gross Chargeable Transfers(GCTs) in previous 7 years
270,000 @ 20%
Tax paid by trustees due 30/04/2012
(b)
Computation of IHT on lifetime transfers chargeable on death - 30 November, 2014

GCTs in 7 years before 17/09/2008
17/09/2008 PET
All 325,000 NRB deemed used = 40,000 @ 40%
Less: Taper relief (80%)
Tax payable and borne by donee (nephew)
26/08/2011 CLT
GCTs in previous 7 years exceed NRB
270,000 @ 40%
Less: Taper relief (20%)
Lifetime Tax Paid
Additional Tax Due on Death paid by trustees, borne by beneficiaries
23/10/2011 GCT (23/10/2003) Removed from cumulative total
GCTs in 7 years before death
16,000
(12,800)
3,200
270,000
678,750
108,000
(21,600)
(54,000)
32,400
(368,750)
310,000
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
Nathan chargeable Estate at death 30 November, 2014
Property
Less: Mortgage
Quoted shares
Paintings
Cars
Building Society Accounts
Life insurance proceeds
Less: Debts (Note)
Funeral expenses
Less: Exempt transfers
Civil partner
NRB @ death
GCTs in 7 years before death
Remaining NRB
Balance of Estate
500,000
(150,000)
2,500
5,000
350,000
120,000
205,000
50,000
36,000
105,000
(7,500)
(100,000)
758,500
325,000
(310,000)
15,000 @ Nil
743,500 @ 40%
758,500
NIl
297,400
The tax is payable by the Personal Representatives (Executors) and is borne by the residuary legatee (Nathans nephew).
Note - legal fees of friend not allowable deduction as not legally enforceable debt.
39 VAT
(a)
(b)
Traders become liable to register for VAT if at the end of any month the value of taxable supplies in the previous 12 months
exceeds 81,000, or if the value of the taxable supplies to be made in the next 30 days will exceed 81,000.
Kite Ltd will therefore be liable to register for VAT from 28 February 2015 (26,000 + 28,000 + 28,000 = 82,000), and the company
must notify HMRC by 30 March 2015. Kite Ltd will be registered from 1 April 2015.
VAT Return - Quarter ended 31 December 2014
Output VAT
Sales (240,000 95% (100% - 5%) 20%)
Input VAT
Purchases and expenses (71,280 - 960 = 70,320 20%)
Irrecoverable debt (4,000 x 95% x 20%)
Machinery (42,300 20/120)
VAT payable 7 February 2015
45,600
14,064
760
7,050
(21,874)
23,726
Notes
1
The calculation of output VAT must take into account the discount for prompt payment, even if customers do not take it.
2
Input VAT on entertaining UK customers cannot be reclaimed.
3
Relief for an irrecoverable debt is not given until six months from the time that payment is due and again must account for
the prompt payment discount.
4
Input VAT on motor cars not used wholly for business purposes cannot be reclaimed.
251
252
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
40 Geewizz Ltd
(a)
The default surcharge

Geewizz Ltds first VAT return for quarter to 30 June 2014 was due on 7 August 2014 but was submitted late, on 20 August 2014 so
HMRC will have issued a surcharge liability notice specifying a surcharge period running to 30 June 2015.
Although the second and third returns were submitted by the due dates of 7 November 2014 and 7 February 2015 respectively,
the VAT due was paid late in each case.
Surcharges of 2% and 5% will therefore have been charged. The surcharge period will have been extended to 31 December 2015.
If the return to 31 March 2015 is late, a surcharge at the rate of 10% will be imposed and the surcharge period will be extended to
31 March 2016.
(b)
(c)
Cash accounting scheme

Geewizz Ltd can use the cash accounting scheme if:
its annual taxable turnover does not exceed 1,350,000
it is up to date with its VAT returns and VAT payments.
The scheme will result in the tax point becoming the date that payment is received from customers. This should be
advantageous where customers take extended credit periods since it delays the payment of output VAT until the cash is
actually received.
t
t
It also provides for automatic bad debt relief should a customer not pay as if no cash is received no output tax will need to be paid.
Input tax however may only be recovered if the payment has been made within the return period.
OR
(a)
(b)
Annual accounting scheme

Geewizz Ltd can apply to use the annual accounting scheme if:
it has been VAT registered for 12 months (unless its turnover is less than 1,350,000, in which case it can join the scheme as
soon as it registers for VAT)
its annual taxable turnover does not exceed 1,350,000
it is up to date with VAT returns.
Under the scheme only one VAT return is submitted each year, with nine monthly payments being made on account
between month 4 and month 12 of the period, or quarterly payments on account. The payments are based on the VAT
liability of the previous year or in the case of a new business on an estimate of the VAT liability for the year. The balancing
payment is due along with the VAT return two months after the end of the annual VAT period.
t
t
t
The scheme can be beneficial since there is less administration involved in only preparing one VAT return each year. There is also
less chance of incurring a VAT penalty and cash budgeting is made easier.
41 Factor Limited
(a)
Selling to non EU customers the VAT treatment is that sales to non EU customers are zero rated.
(b)
Selling to EU customers depends on the VAT status of the customer
t
t
sales to VAT registered EU customer are zero rated

sales to non VAT registered EU customer are standard rated (20%)
(c)
Purchases of goods from non EU suppliers involves the goods being charged UK VAT (20%) at the point of entry unless the
UK customer has elected for the duty deferment scheme, whereby the associated VAT is paid within 30 days from the end
of the month the goods entered the UK.
(d)
Purchases of goods from EU suppliers depends upon the VAT status of the EU supplier.
t
t
VAT registered EU suppliers will zero rate the transaction and the UK customer will account for UK VAT on the value of the
goods as output VAT on their own VAT return. This will be treated as input VAT in the same period, so recoverable, if the UK
customer makes wholly taxable supplies
Non VAT registered EU supplier will not charge VAT and the are no VAT consequences for the UK customer
42 Group relief
Calculate the upper and lower limits for small companies rate purposes and calculate the tax payable.
1,500,000
Upper limit
= 300,000
5
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
300,000
= 60,000
5
Corporation tax liability without group relief:
Lower limit
(a)
A Ltd

Corporation tax
at 20%
at 21%
Less:
00 (300,000 83,000)
00 (300,000 96,000)
(b)
Nil
B Ltd
20,000
C Ltd
83,000
D Ltd
96,000
E Ltd
375,000
17,430
20,160
78,750
(510)
20,550
78,750
4,000
(542)
Nil
4,000
17,463
The loss should be surrendered first to companies paying tax in the marginal rate band so as to bring their augmented
profits down to the lower limit, as they are paying an effective rate of 21.25% in the marginal band. The loss should then be
surrendered to companies paying tax at 21% to bring their augmented profits down to the lower limit. Any remaining loss
should be surrendered to companies paying tax at 20%.

Less: Group relief
Revised Taxable Total Profits
Corporation tax
at 20%
at 21%
A Ltd
Nil
B Ltd
20,000
Nil
Nil
20,000
C Ltd
83,000
(23,000)
60,000
D Ltd
96,000
(36,000)
60,000
4,000
12,000
12,000
4,000
12,000
12,000
E Ltd
375,000
(41,000)
334,000
70,140
70,140
The loss is first surrendered to C Ltd and D Ltd to bring their profits down to 60,000. The balance of the loss is surrendered to E Ltd.
(c)
Companies can form a VAT group if they are more than 50% held by another company. As A Ltd owns > 50% of B Ltd, C Ltd,
D Ltd and E Ltd, all companies can be a part of a VAT group.
The advantages and disadvantages of companies forming a VAT group are:
The advantages of group VAT registration are:
t
t
t
No VAT is accounted for on transactions between members of the VAT group

Only one VAT return is submitted for the group therefore an administrative advantage.
The group can choose which companies to include or exclude A cash flow advantage would be achieved by leaving out of
the group VAT registration a company which makes zero rated supplies and is therefore submitting monthly VAT returns to
get monthly repayments of VAT from HMRC.
The disadvantages of group VAT registration are:
t
t
t
The limits for cash and annual accounting will apply to the group as a whole and not on an individual company basis.
Joint and several liability of each company in the VAT group for VAT debts, not just the representative member who submits
the VAT return.
Possible administration issues collecting information to be passed on to the representative member.
253
254
Paper F6
PRACTICE ANSWERS
43 Jim
Payments on Account for 2014/15 will be based on the income tax payable by self assessment in 2013/14
Due Dates
31 Jan 2015
5,1002 = 2,550
31 Jul 2015
5,1002 = 2,550
31 Jan 2016
Balancing payment
7,629
Less Payments on Accounts
(5,100)
2,529
Plus CGT Liability
1,000
Balancing payment
3,529
The first payment on account for 2015/16 is based on income tax payable by self assessment in 2014/15
Total due
31 Jan 2016
31 Jan 2016
7,629/2
= 3,529 + 3,814
= 3,814
= 7,343
44 Enquiries
(a)
HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC) must normally give written notice within 12 months of the actual filing date.
(b)
HM Revenue and Customs can extend the above deadline by making a discovery assessment to prevent loss of tax. This may
be done if the HMRC make a discovery which they could not reasonably have been expected to make from the information
provided in the return. This assessment can be made up to 4 years from the end of the tax year, 6 years if the taxpayer has
been careless and up to 20 years if the error is deliberate.
(c)
An enquiry is normally commenced due to:
(d)
t Under-declaration of income.
t Overstatement of deductions.
t Selection for a random review.
The taxpayer can either:
t Accept the HMRCs amendment to the return; or
t Request a review of the decision by a HMRC officer and/or
t Appeal to a tribunal within 30 days of notification of any additional tax due to the enquiry.
45 Cannock Limited
Corporation tax due
FY 2013
2/12 x 2,400,000 = 400,000 @ 23% =
FY 2014
10/12 x 2,400,000 = 2,000,000 @ 21% =
Total =
92,000
420,000
512,000
Each instalment is 25% 512,000 = 128,000

Due Dates for y/e 31 January 2015
14 Aug 2014
14 Nov 2014
14 Feb 2015
14 May 2015
128,000
128,000
128,000
128,000
The return filing date is 31 January 2016

ACCA F6UK December 2015 Notes PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACCA F6UK December 2015 Notes PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACCA F6UK December 2015 Notes PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Se

Please spread the word about OpenTuition, so

OpenTuition Lecture Notes can be downloaded FREE from http://opentuition.com

The best things

IMPORTANT!!! PLEASE READ CAREFULLY

To benefit from these notes you must watch the free

December 2015 Examinations

Tax rates and allowances

The UK Tax System

Income tax computation

Property Income and Investments Individuals

Tax Adjusted Trading Profit Individuals

Trading Profit Basis Periods

Tax Adjusted Trading Losses Individuals

National Insurance Contributions (NIC)

Capital Gains Tax Individuals

Capital Gains Tax Individuals Shares

Capital Gains Tax Individuals Reliefs

Calculation of Corporation Tax Liability

Long Period of Account

Tax Adjusted Losses Companies

Chargeable Gains Companies

Chargeable Gains Companies Further Aspects

Chargeable Gains Companies Reliefs

Corporation Tax Groups

Value Added Tax VAT

Self Assessment and Payment of Tax for Companies

Self-Assessment and Payment of Tax for Individuals

OpenTuition Course Notes can be downloaded FREE from OpenTuition.com.

December 2015 Examinations

Practice Questions and Answers index

Tax avoidance and tax evasion

Income tax calculation

Income tax calculation restriction of personal allowances

Income tax calculation additional rate taxpayer

Mr & Mrs Elderely

Personal age allowance and planning aspects

Restriction of personal age allowances

Property Business Profit

Property Business Losses

Rent a Room Relief

Adjustment of trading profit

Calculation of capital allowances

Trading Income basis periods: opening years

Trading Income basis periods: opening and closing years

Trading Income basis periods: opening years with capital allowances

Capital allowances: plant and machinery

Trading losses New Business

Trading losses Continuing business

Anne and Betty

Partnerships: change in partners, losses

National Insurance Contributions

Adjustment of profit, calculation of Taxable Total Profits

Calculation of corporation tax

Corporation tax losses

Chargeable Gains Disposal of shares by a company

Chargeable Gains Part Disposal and Chattels companies

Chargeable Gains Destroyed assets

Capital losses Individuals